C^s  2H53 


George  Washington  Flowers 
Memorial  Collection    _ 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 


ESTABLISHED  BY  THE 

FAMILY  OF 

COLONEL  FLOWERS 


*    ? 


/     / 


THE 

SOLDIER'S  COMPANION: 

CONTAINING 

AN   ABRIDGEMENT   OF   HARDEE'S  INFAN- 
TRY TACTICS  ; 

WITH  THE 

HEAVY  IXFANTRY  AXD  RIFLE  MANUALS, 

SKIRMISH  DRILL  AND  BAYONET  EXERCISE,  FIELD 
FORTIFICATION, 

PICKET   AND  OUTPOSTDUTY, 

WITH  VARIOCS  REGULATIONS,  FORMS,  40.,  THAT  WILL  BS 

FOUND  USEFUL  TO  THE  SOLDIER  IN  CAMP 

AND  ON  THE  MARCH  ; 

WITH  AN  APPENDIX  CONTAINIXG     . 
FANCY  MOVEiMENTS  FOR  VOLUNTEER  COMPANIES, 
UNIFORM    AND   1)RES3   OF    THE    ARMY,  &0. 


By  Capt.  GEO.  C.  LEWIS, 

PROVIS10NA.L   ARMY    OF    THE    CONFEDERATE    STATES. 


RALEIGH,  N.  C. : 
JOHN   SPEfiMAN,  PRINTICR,  OFFICE  STATE  JOURNAL. 

1803. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1862. 

By  Capt.  GEO.  C.  LEWIS, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  Confed- 
erate States,  for  the  District  of  Pamlico, 
!^fo^th  Carolina. 


TO    THE 

OFFICERS  AND  SOLDIERS 

OF  THB 

NORTH  CxVKOLTNA  TROOPS, 

THIS   LITTLE  VOLUME  13  AFFECTION'ATELT   AXl)    IIESFKOTFCLLT 
INSCRIBED. 


340901 


PREFACE. 


The  following  paj^es  of  this  Uttle  votunie  hare  been  pre- 
pared and  compiled  by  the  undersigned,  with  the  view  of 
supplying  what  he  believes  to  be  an  important  want  of  the 
Officers  and  Soldiers,  constituting^  the  army  of  the  Con- 
federate States.  It  embracoB  an  abridgment  of  Harder's 
Infantry  TAorics,  with  the  Heavy  Infantry  and  Riflo 
Manuals,  adapted  to  the  use  of  either  the  Percussion  Mus- 
ket or  the  Enfield  Rifle;  also  the  Skirmish  Drill  and  Bayo- 
onet  Exercise,  and  a  Sysopsis  of  Field  Fortification, 
Picket  and  Outpost  Ddtt,  and  the  Regulations  as  to 
Parade?,  Reviews,  Inspections,  Guard-moKntings,  Ac. 

It  contains  nvany  suggestions  that  the  practical  soldier 
needs  in  camp  and  on  the  march,  with  various  forms  that 
are  essentially  necessary  in  a  work  ot  this  kind,  such  as 
guard-repoftSjIofhcers  and  soldiers,  pay  accotints,  fur-r 
loughs,  leaves  of  absence,  &c. 

It  has  been  the  object  of  the  compiler,  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  this  work,  to  embrace  as  much  as  possible  in  the 
emalieit  limit,  as  he  knows  from  experience  how  inconve- 
nient it  is,  in  an  active  campaign,  for  an  officer  or  soldier 
to  be  lugging  around  several  works,  when  all  that  he  need* 
might  easily  be  combined  in  on«. 


TVyETXCZ. 

Under  the  head  of  Firxn  Fortification,  the  author  hi's 
introduced  only  so  much  as  will  enable  the  inexperienced 
foldier,  in  case  of  necessity,  to  throw  up  temporary  breast- 
works for  the  protection  of  his  men,  or  to  enable  them  the 
better  to  hold  some  important  point  to  which  they  may 
have  been  assigned.  In  a  war  like  the  one  at  present 
waged  between  the  Confederate  and  United  States,  where 
there  is  such  an  extented  frontier,  it  is  very  essential  that 
every  soldier,  and  especially  every  officer,  should  knoiv 
something  of  field  fortification. 

During  the  winter  campaign  of  1861  and  1862,  on  the 
Potomac,  and  more  recently  when  the  City  of  Richmond 
was  beseiged  b}'  the  enemy,  the  compiler  paw  many  in- 
stances where  young  and  inexperienced  officers,  were  by 
force  of  circumstances,  placed  in  positions  that  rendered  it 
exceedingly  necessary  that  they  should.have  a  knowledge 
of  entrenching  and  erecting  temporary  breastworks. 

In  the  appendix  will  be  found  the  regulations  as  pre- 
scribed by  the  War  Department  for  the  dress  and  uniform 
of  the  army  ;  also^  some  movements  that  are  intended  prin- 
cipally for  volunteer  companies  in  times  of  peace  on  their 
public  parades.  They  were  translated  from  a  French  work 
written  by  M.  DuPre'  and  were  used  by  the  compiler 
previous  to  the  war. 

The  undersigned  presents  tl  is  little  volume  to  his  fellow 
soldiers,  with  the  knowledge  that  it  contains  many  defics- 
encies,  but  assures  them  that  none  but  official  works  and 
those  most  in  repute  have  been  coniulted  in  the  selection 
of  its  contents. 

It  was  prepared  during  the  long  weary  hours  when  the 
author  wsiB  confined  to  bis  room  from  disease  contracted 


in  cttmp,  and  was  written  partially  to  relieve  t\ie  monotony 
of  the  sick-room,  and  with  the  hope  that  though  prevent- 
cd  at  that  time  fr<tm  being  in  active  service,  he  still  might 
do  something  to  aid  t-lie  glorious  cause  for  which  our 
brave  people  are  so  gallantly  stmggling^  and  should  this 
work  be  tlie  means  of  imparting  to  a  brother  soldier  one 
item  of  information  that  he  otherwise  would  not  have 
known,  the  author  will  feel  amply  rewarded  for  his  trouble. 

GEO.  C.  LEWIS. 
Balej<5m,  X,  C,  January,  18^- 


INTRODUCTION, 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  CONDUCTING  DRILLS, 

A  good  method  of  instruction  in  military  discipline, 
should  exclude  everything  that  is  unnatural  or  not  appli- 
cable to  actual  military  eervice  in  action*  If  anything  be 
admitted  at  any  time  in  the  parades  of  show,  mounting 
guard,  or  the  like,  it  should  be  taught  separately,  and 
after  the  principles  of  a  rational  discipline  are  well  estab- 
lished. 

It  is  too  much  the  practice  to  commit  the  charge  of  the 
elementary  drills  to  non-commissioned  officers,  by  which 
many  great  evils  are  produced.  No  officer  can  expect  to 
command  a  company,  much  less  a  regiment,  ( to  which  evei  y 
officer  should  through  merit  aspire,)  unless  he  has  had 
practical  experience;  and  in  no  circumstances  can  an 
officer  so  soon  acquire  the  habit  of  command,  or  learn  the 
mode  of  instruction  and  the  effect  of  discipline,  as  by  per- 
sonall}'  conducting  the  drill  of  his  men.  By  devolvino' 
these  first  duties  on  non-commissioned  officers,  the  com- 
missioned officers  remain  ignorant  and  timid ;  and  the 
chance  of  finding  non-commissioned  officers  who  can 
clearly  comprehend  and  eacplain  the  principles  of  a  gool 


X  TXJKODlCTIfyy. 

discipline,  u  not  one  in.  twenty  ;  from  which  cause  it  is 
twenty  to  one  t^at  the  reeraits  are  imperfectl}'  or  errone- 
ously taught. 

He,  therefore,  who  has  the  charge  of  a  drill,  or  who 
teaches  others,  should  not  be  himself  ignorant  j  nor  should 
he  be  offended  at  the  ignorance  of  those  who  never  had  an 
opportunity  to  learn — he  should  be  patient,  but  firmj 
generous,  but  without  relaxing  from  the  strictness  of  duty  ; 
he  should  command  his  own  temper,  in  order  to  secure  re- 
ipect ;  and  he  shouid  never  be  tired  of  rendering  what  be 
teaches  intelligible,,  Every  word  should  be  explained, 
and  a  single  explanation  to  those  whom  he  is  to  teach,  will 
not  be  sufficient — every  man  in  the  drill  should  understand 
every  word  that  is  used,  and  the  use  ot  every  motion  and 
movement  he  makes  j  and  personal  actions  should  be  used 
as  examples  wherever  practicable ;  so  that  whenever  a 
word  is  used,  or  a  movement  commanded,  not  only  the 
word  shall  be  familiar  to  the  ear  by  repeated  use  and  illus- 
tration, but  the  movement  itself,  by  frequent  practice, 
familiar  to  the  eye. 

AUdrills  should,  therefore,  be  superintended  or  conducted 
by  a  commissioned  otlicerywho  should  always  keep  in  mind, 
that  discipline  is  as  necessary  for  him  who  teaches,  as  for 
those  that  are  taught.  He  should,  therefore,  be  careful 
that  he  acts  personally  according  to  the  manner  he  teaches, 
and  that  his  own  motions  conform  to  the  principles  ho 
gives  ;  he  should  keep  in  mind  that  the  soldier  very  soon 
discovers  the  capacity  of  the  officer;  and  that  unless  the 
officer  possesses  skill  himself,  he  cannot  expect  the  soldiers 
to  confide  in  him,  nor  to  respect  him  ;  they  may  be  made 
to  fear  his  power,  but  the  fonfiidence  which  is  most  pre- 


fNTROniTOTIOX.  if 

cious  to  a  good  ofllcer,  is  that  which  arises  out  of  the 
voluntary  esteem  and  respect,  produced  by  the  gene- 
rosity of  his  conduct  and  the  skill  which  he  manifests 
in  the  discharge  of  his  duty ;  when  he  treats  those 
OTcr  whom  he  is  placed,  as  men.  w^hose  hapiness  and 
credit  he  studies,  rather  than  as  slaves  over  whom  he  has 
the  right  to  tyranise.  The  celebrate  1  General  Lloyd, 
speaking  of  the  German  discipline,  reprobates  its  Bavage 
character  by  observing:  *' that  blows  may  make  a  man 
a  coward,  but  never  made  a  hero." 

The  instructor  of  a  drill  should  be  of  a  cheerful,  but  firm 
disposition;  he  must  have  discernment  and  good  sense  to 
know  that  as  the  habits  of  persons  newly  entering  upon 
military  exercises  have  been  formed  differently,  that  they 
cannot  be  expected  to  change  their  habits  suddenly,  or 
embrace  habitsat  once  different  from  those  they  hare  been 
accustomed  to. 

It  should  be  explained  that  the  first  lessons  of  the  posi- 
tion— the /aciii ga-^-ihe  step  and  toheelivg,  are  only  like  the 
first  lessons  ia  leading  and  writing  ;  that  it  is  requisite  to 
practice  them  often,  aud  ta  perform  them  with  the  greatest 
exactness  in  the  first  beginnings,  in  order  to  c.Try  the  samo 
correctness  and  exactness  into  more  enlarged  practice. 

That  the  duties  of  a  company  are  the  same  as^e  duties 
of  a  regiment  and  of  a  whole  array—that  the  whole  of 
the  military  art  consists  In  marching,  facing  and  reheeling, 
according  to  the  rules  which  experience  has  proved  to  be 
the  most  effective ;  and  that  without  perfec. ion  in  these 
particulars,  arms  would  be  of  ]jtt!c  or  Jio  usn,  opposed  ro 
troops  who  fire  v,'oll  disciplined, 


IJiTRODUeTIOK. 

These  instructions  should  be  introduced  in  familiar  and 
persuasive  language,  as  advice,  rather  than  command ; 
always  ivith  good  temper  and  kindness — ahuae  never  1 1 

The  advantages  and  security  of  a  good  discipHne  should 
be  constantly  brought  into  view  ;  and  the  necessity  of 
inarching  correctly  ever  equal  spaces  in  equal  times,  should 
be  hinted  at  as  being  the  means  by  which  the  whole  power 
and  strength  of  a  line  or  column  is  brought  to  bear  at  the 
same  instant. 

No  opportunity  should  be  lost,  that  is  practicable,  to 
present  to  the  eye  of  the  soldier  the  manner  of  any  opera- 
tion which  he  is  to  perform.  A  well  disciplined  man  pre- 
sented in  front,  whose  actions  may  accord  with  the  com- 
mand, and  who  may  be  seen  by  the  whole  of  the  drill,  will 
have  an  excellent  eflect  in  producing  a  ready  understand- 
ing, It  is  much  easier  to  imitate  what  is  seen,  than  to 
execute  what  is  barely  described.  The  variety  of  habits, 
and  the  different  signification  of  the  same  word  in  the  un- 
derstanding of  different  persons,  render  verbal  descriptions 
generally  imperfect.  There  can  pbe  no  mistake  by  the  eye, 
and  every  word  should  be  explained  which  may  not  be 
otherwise  understood. 

The€fcmpiler  of  this  work,  would  particularly  and  earn- 
estly suggest  that  officers  be  careful  in  their  treatment  of 
those  under  their  command.  In  some  armies,  the  mind 
and  feelings  of  the  man  are  never  studied;  his  passions 
are  never  called  forth,  except  to  excite  terror  and  hatred 
of  his  officers  ;  and.  there  have  been  men  who  have  held, 
that  the  army  should  be  more  a£raid  of  their  own  General 
than  of  the  enemy  I  But  we  mu«t  reprobate  such  ignor- 
ance of  human  nature,    "  He  who  attempts  to  govern  by 


IVTRODUCTIOK.  rfn 

ihe  lash,"  laid  Timoub  ''knows  not  how  to  govern."— 
There  is  no  incompatibility  in  exciting  the  generous  affec- 
tions of  the  soldier,  with  the  principles  of  discipline. 
Cruelty  may  make  cowards  and  deserters,  but  in  never 
made  a  good,  faithful,  honorable  soldier. 

Officers  have  only  to  convince  soldiers  that  they  under- 
stand their  own  duties,  and  the  soldiers  will  respect  them  ; 
officers  have  only  to  demonstrate  that  they  are  soldiers* 
friends,  and  they  may  lead  them  to  the  cannon's  mouth,  or 
in  the  face  of  the  death  dealing  bullet,  with  an  enthusiasm 
that  never  fails  to  triumph  when  regulated  by  discipline. 
The  triumphs  of  the  French  armies,  in  which  no  man  is 
ever  beaten  with  a  cane,  and  in  which  whipping  never  was 
known,  clearly  evince  the  futile  barbarity  of  military 
punishments,  by  the  lash,  or  by  any  species  of  degiading 
torture.  The  humblest  bred  man  that  fills  the  ranks  of  an 
army,  is  as  susceptible  of  the  sentiment  of  glory,  and 
honor,  and  shame,  as  the  proudest  captain  that  ever  car- 
ried a  plume. 

The  principle  of  discipline  most  prevalent  is  terror, 
cruelty  and  degradation— the  soldier  is  treated  as  an  out- 
cast of  the  earth,  and  however  different  he  may  be  when 
he  enters  the  ranks,  the  manni  r  of  his  treatment  too  often 
transforms  him  into  the  miserable  slave  which  he  is  pre- 
supposed to  be. 

This  treatment  is  inconsistent  with  reason  and  humanity. 
Officers  should  remember  that  the  great  majority  of  the 
privates  who  constitute  the  Confederate  army,  and  who 
are  so  gallantly  exposing  themselves  to  the  rigors  and 
hardships  of  a  soldier's  life— in  the  defence  of  our  countrj-, 
aio  not  of  the  material  that  compose  other  armies   and 


xir  iNTROnccnON. 

that  in  thousands  of  cases,  they  are  the  cherished  jtod  loved 
idol  of  some  household  circle. 

Besides,  it  is  not  neccsaary  to  discipline  or  subordination. 
A  generous,  aflectionate,  and  cherishing  courtesy,  will 
overcome  the  most  hardened  villian,  and  where  it  fails, 
cruelty  or  barbarity  vrill  never  succeed. 

The  line  between  familiarity  and  kind  conduct,  is  easily 
drawn  by  men  of  sense,  conscious  of  themselves.  None 
but  incompetent  men  will  treat  a  soldier  in  the  ranks  with 
contempt  or  cruelt3%  O-n  the  parade,  good  temper  and 
good  manners  should  never  be  absent.  Haughtiness  is  in- 
compatible with  true  dignity  ;  openness,  generosity  and 
firmness,  constitute  the  true  deportment  which  inspires 
respect  without  exciting  fear;  which  commands  with  de- 
cision, and  is  obeyed  implicitly,  and  which  is  inflexible 
only  in  the  discharge  of  duty. 

In  the  manner  of  command,  much  depends  upon  the 
clearness  and  distinctness  of  the  utterance  of  him  who 
teaches.  At  drill,  he  must  not  be  spai'ing  of  explanation, 
but  on  parade  he  gives  no  instruction ;  he  commands 
only,  and  sees  that  what  he  orders,  be  executed  promptly 
and  properly. 

It  is  observed  by  the  British  General  Dundas,  with  a 
degree  of  truth  that  cannot  be  too  strongly  impressed  upon 
the  mind  of  every  man  who  holds  a  military  commission — 
"  That  the  complete  instruction  of  an  officer  enlarges  with 
his  situation  and  at  last  takes  in  the  whole  circle  of  mili- 
tary science.  But  an  oflicer  who  cannot  thoroughly 'dis- 
cipline and  exercise  the  body  entrusted  to  his  command, 
large  or  small,  is  not  fit,  in  time  of  service,  to  lead  it 
against  an  enemy;  he  cannot  be  cool  and  collected  in  time 


nvTiioouci'iox.  ^^ 

of  danger;  he  cannot  profit  by  circamstanccs,  from  his 
inability  to  comprehend  ivhatis  doing  by  the  enemy,  or 
what  is  necessary  to  be  done  against  them,  to  direct  it 
properly.  The  fate  cf  many  depend  on  his  well  or  ill  ac- 
quitting himself  of  his  duty  ;  for  it  is  not  suflicient  to  ad- 
vance with  bravery  ;  it  is  requsite  to  possess  that  degree 
of  intelligence,  which  should  distinguish  every  officer,  ac- 
cording to  his  station.  Soldiers  will  not  act  with  spirit  or 
animation,  when  they  have  no  reliance  on  he  capacity  of 
thoffc  who  conduct  i.hem/' 

The  intention  of  all  discipline  is  to  auppy  a  kind  of  arti- 
ficial instinct,  and  to  make  this  uniform  throughout  the 
whole  mass  of  an  army,  so  that  whenever  an  operation  is 
required  to  be  performed  by  an  army,  no  wore  is  requisite 
than  to  assign  stations  to  the  several  divisions^  and  appoint 
the  time  whe'n  the  movements  commence,  or  when  the 
concert  of  operations  should  meet  and  produce  the  effect 
required. 

To  discipline  men  well,  there  must  be  a  familiar,  compre- 
hensible, and  rational  method. 

The  more  simple  it  is,  the  more  easily  it  is  understood^ 
the  better  will  it  be  executed. 

To  this  end,  the  language  must  be  that  of  the  science' 
and  it  must  be  taught  and  explained  with  clearness. 

There  must  be  nothing  unnecessary  or  unnatural  in  the 
svstem.  Every  operation  and  movement  should  be  exe- 
cuted exactly  as  required,  in  the  shortest  period  of  time, 
and  occupying  the  least  possible  space  in  which  it  can  be 
accomplished. 

As  all  discipline  is  intended  for  action^  and  not  for  parade^ 
discipline  should  be  directed  to  inculcate  that  which  is 


adapted  to  action  only,  as  fundamental,  and  to  make  all 
that  appertains  to  parade,  secondary — action  must  never  be 
'ost  sight  of  in  teaching  discipline. 

It  may  be  proper  to  remark  here,  for  the  information  of 
those  who  are  not  alread}'  conversant  in  the  subject,  that 
many  of  the  words  of  instruction,  direction,  and  precau- 
tion, employed  in  the  drill,  cease  to  be  employed  when 
the  battalion  is  completed  in  its  discipline.  Numerous 
words  and  commands  are  used  in  the  elementary  instruc- 
tion, which  are  no  longer  required  to  be  employed,  though 
their  application  and  practical  use  are  never  to  be  omitted. 
These  directions  cannot  be  made  too  familiar.    . 

Officers  should  remember  that  there  are  three  kinds  of 
commands,  viz  : 

The  command  of  caution,  which  is  attention. 

The  2)reparatory  command,  which  indicates  the  move- 
ment which  is  to  be  executed. 

The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or  halt,  or  in 
the  manual  of  arms,  the  part  of  command  which  causes  an 
execution. 

The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  distinct,  and 
of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  under 
instruction. 

The  command  attention,  is  pronounced  at  the  top  of  the 
voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced  in  a  tone 
firm  and  brief. 


THE  SOLDIER'S  COMPANION. 

PART  FIRST 

Position  of  the  Soldier  and  Squad  Drill. 

The  correct  position  of  the  soldier,  and  the  drill  of  the 
squad,  being  the  ground  work  of  proficiency  in  all  mili- 
tary exercises,  it  is  exceedingly  necessary  that  the  men 
should  fix  and  keep  their  attention  upon  the  instructor— 
who  should  be  as  clear  and  concise  as  possible  in  his  in- 
structions and  explanations,  and  should  endeavor  to  habitu- 
ate kiraself  and  men,  by  precept  and  example,  to  that  com- 
posure and  presence  of  mind  which  is  so  essentially  re 
quisite  in  drilling  and  instructing  recruits. 

Great  care  should  bo  taken  in  learning  them  the  correct 
position  at  first,  as  considerable  difficulty  is  sometimes 
experienced  in  their  further  progress  when  they  have  been 
incorrectly  taught  in  the  beginning, 

In  most  cases  it  is  impracticable  to  instruct  recruits  in 
squads  of  less  than  four  or  eight  men  at  a  time. 

Position  of  the  Soldier. 

1.  Heels  on  the  same  line  and  as  close  together  as  the 
conformation  of  the  man  will  permit,  the  feet  turned  out 
equally  and  forming  with  each  other  something  lese  than 


2  I'OSITIOX    OF    TUB    SOLIJ.KK. 

a  right  angle ;  knees  straight  without  stiffness  ;  body  erect 
on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward  ;  shoulders  square 
and  falling  equally ;  arms  hanging  naturally  ;  elbows  near 
the  body ;  palms  of  the  hands  turned  a  little  to  the  front, 
the  little  fingers  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  ;  head 
erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  constraint;  china 
little  drawn  in  and  near  the  stock  without  covering  it; 
eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front  and  striking  the  ground 
at  about  fifteen  paqes. 

2.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the  position 
of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  turn- 
ing of  the  head  and  eyes  ;  he  will  command  : 

1.  Eyes — Right.     2.  Front. 

3.  At  the  word  righ*,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  head 
gently  to  the  right,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the 
left  eye  in  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  eye  fixed 
on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or  supposed  to  be  in 
the  same  rank.  At  the  word  front,  resume  the  direct 
position. 

4.  The  movement  of  eyes — Left  will  be  executed  by  in- 
Terse  means. 

5.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  movement  of 
the  head  does  not  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders. 

Rest. 

6.  At  the  command  rest,  stand  at  ease. 

7.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  a  resumption  of 
the  habitual  position,  he  will  command : 


POSITION    OP    THE    SOLDIER.  J 

•  •  1.    Attention.     2.  Sqdad. 

8.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his  attention  : 
at  the  second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed  position  and 
steadiness. 

-^ 
Facings. 

1.   Squad.     2.   lii(jht  (or  left)— Face. 

9.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly, 
turn  to  the  right  (or  left,)  on  the  left  heel,  raising  th'^  toe 
a  little,  and  then  replace  the  right  heel,  by  the  side  of  the 
left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

10.  At  the  command  front,  turn  on  the  left  heel  so  as  to 
regain  the  first  position,  and  replace  the  right  heel  by  the 
side  of  the  left. 

11.  To  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front),  the  command  will 
be  given  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  About — Fack. 

12.  At  the  word  about,  turn  on  the  left  heel,  bi-ing  the 
left  toe  to  the  front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear, 
the  hollow  opposite  to  and  full  three  inches  from  the  left 
heel,  the  feet  square  to  each  other. 

13.  At  the  word  face,  turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toes 
a  little,  extend  the  thighs  and  face  to  the  rear, -bringing, 
at  the  same  time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

14.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the?o  motions  do 
not  derange  tho  position  of  tlio  body. 


4  POSITIOX    OF   THE   SOLDIER. 

The  Direct  Step     ■  ♦ 

15.  The  direct  step,  or  pace,  in  coimnon  time,  is  ttventy 
eight  inches,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel  and  at  the  rate  of 
ninety  a  minute. 

16.  The  instructor  wishing  to  instruct  the  recruit  in  the 
principles  of  this  step,  will  place  himself  six  or  eight 
paces  in  front  and  facing  him.  He  will  then  execute  the 
step  slowlj,  by  way  of  illustration,  and  command  : 

1.  Squad  foi'tvard.     2.    Common  time.     3.  March. 

17.  At  the  first  command,  feel  the  weight  of  the  body 
on  the  right  leg,  without  bending  the  left  knee. 

18.  At  the  command  march,  step  off  with  the  left  foot, 
carrying  it  straight  forward  twenty-eight  inches  from  the 
right,  the  solencar  the  ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe 
a  little  depressed,  and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned 
out ;  at  the  same  time,  throw  the  weight' of  the  body  for- 
ward, and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely 
at  the  distance  where  it  finds  itself  from  the  right,  when 
the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought  forward,  the  whole  of 
which  will  now  rest  on  the  advanced  foot.  Next,  in  like 
manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above,  the 
heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of  the  left  foot,  and 
thus  continue  to  march,  without  crossing  the  legs,  or 
striking  the  one  against  the  other,  without  turning  the 
shoulders,  and  preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

19.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  halt,  will  com- 
mand: . 

L  Squad.     2.  Halt, 

20.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  the 


POSITION    OF   Tllfi   vSOLDIER.  5 

rear  will  be  brought  up,  and  planted  by  the  side  of  the 
other,  without  shock. 

The   Quich-Stej). 

21.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are  the  same 
as  for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  one 
hundred  and  ten  steps  p^r  minute.  As  soon  as  the  recruit 
has  the  required  steadiness,  and  has  become  established  in 
the  manual  of  arms,  and  in  the  mechanism  of  the  step  i 
common  time,  he  will  be  practiced  only  in  quick  time,  the 
double  quick,  and  the  run.  "  When  the  time  is  not  indicat- 
ed in  the  preparatory  command,  the  squad  will  always 
move  in  quick  time. 

22.  Thi!  instructor  wishing  to  march  in  quich  time,  will 
command : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  March. 

23.  At  the  command  march,  the  squad  will  step  off  and 
continue  to  march  in  quick  time. 

The  Double  Quick-Step. 

24.  The  length  of  the  double  quick-step  is  thirty-three 
inches,  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred  and 
sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 

25.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruit  the  prin- 
ciples cf  this  step,  will  command  : 

1.  Double  qinch-Htep.     2.  March. 

26.  At  the  first  command,  raise  the  hands  to  a  level  with 
the  hips,  the  hands  closed,  the  nails  towards  the  body,  the 
elbows  to  the  rear. 


C  POSITION   OF    TIIF.    SOl.DIEH. 

27.  At  the  second  command,  raise  to  the  front  the  left 
leg  bent  to  its  greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  be- 
tween the  knee  and  inst(»p  vertical,  the  toe  depressed  ; 
replace  the  foot  in  its  former  po.^ition  ;  execute  with  the 
right  leg  what  has  just  boen  prescribed  for  the  left,  and 
continue  the  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  until  the  com- 
mand : 

1.  S'itiad.     2.  Halt. 

28.  At  the  command  halt,  bring  the  foot  which  is  raised 
by  the  side  of  the  other,  drop  the  hands  to  the  side,  and 
resume  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

29.  The  instructor  should  phice  'himself  six  or  eight 
paces  from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  and  indicate  the  ca- 
dence bj  the  commands  one  and  two,  given  alternately,  as 
each  foot  is  brought  to  the  ground. 

30.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in  tho 
principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2,    Double  quick.     3.  Makch. 

31.  At  the  first  command,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body 
on  the  right  leg. 

32.  At  the  second,  place  the  arms  as  indicated  in  No.  26. 
53.  At  the  third,  carry  forward  the  left  foot,  the  leg 

slightly  bent,  the  knee  raised,  plant  the  left  foot,  toe  first, 
thirty-three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right 
foot  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  left. 
This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  take  place  by 
throwing  the  weight  of  tho  body  on  the  foot  that  is  plant- 
ed, and  by  allowing  a  natural  oscillatory  motion  of  the- 
arms. 


rOSITION  or  THH;  SOLDIK!;.  <    , 

24.  The  instructor  should  cautien  the  recnuit  to  breathe 
as  much  as  possible  through  the  nose,  k-oping  the  moutfa 
closed,  as  it  will  enable  him  to  go  a  mncli  longer  distance, 
without  experiencing  the  fatigue  that  he  otherwise  would. 

The.   Run. 

35.  The  recruits  will  also  be  exercised  in  running. 

36.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  (he  double  quick 
gtep,  the  only  diflference  consisting  in  a  ;;rcater  degree  of 
swiftness. 

Aligmnenis. 

57.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to  make 
them  comprehend  the  principles  of  alignment ;  to  this  end 
he  will  command  the  two  men  on  the  right  flank  to  march 
to  the  front,  and  having  aligned  them,  ho  will  cause  the 
remainder  of  the  squad  to  more  up,  as  thoy  may  ba  suc- 
cessively called,  each  by  bis  number,  and  align  themselves 
successively  on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

38.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will  turn 
the  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  No.  3,  and 
will  march  in  quick  time  two  paces  forward,  shortening 
the  last  so  as  to  find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the 
new  alignment,  which  he  ought  never  to  pass ;  he  wil» 
next  move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the 
thighs  extended,  to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on 
the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the  head,  the 


8  rOSITIOX  OF  lilE  SOLnil'R. 

line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  shoulders,  he  inay  find 
himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor,  whose  elbow  he 
will  lightly  touch  without  opening  his  own. 

39.  The  instructor  eeeing  the  rank  well  aligned,  will 
command : 

FRONT. 

40.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  their  ejes  to  the  front 
and  remain  firm. 

41.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the  same 
principles. 

42.  "When  the  recruits  shall  have  learned  to  align  them- 
selves correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  entire  rank 
to  align  itself  at  once  by  the  command  : 

Bight  (or  left)  Dress. 

43.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed  in  ad- 
vance as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  more  up  in  quick  time, 
and  place  themselves  on  the  new  line  as  prescribed  in  No. 
38. 

44.  The  instructor  will  carefully  observe  that  the  princi- 
ples are  followed,  and  will  place  himself  on  the  flank  that 
has  served  as  a  basis,  to  see  that  the  alignment  is  correct. 

45.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  aligned,  will  com- 
mand : 

FRONT. 

46.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the  same 
principles,  the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little  beyond  the 


POSITION'   OF  A    SOLDIER.  \f 

line,  am^  thon  dressing  up  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  No.  38,  the  instructor  commanding : 

1.  Biffht  (or  left)  backtcard—DR^m. 

To  March  to  (he  Front. 

47.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the  instruc- 
tor shall  wish  to  causa  it  to  march  to  the  front,  he  will 
place  a  well  instructed  man  on  the  right  or  left,  according 
to  the  side  on  which  he  may  wish  theguid'  to  be,  and 
command  : 

1.  Squad,  foncnrd.     2.    Guide  right  {ov  left.)     3.  March. 

48.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off  smart- 
ly with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  to  march 
straight  to  the  front,  keeping  hia  shoulder  in  a  square 
with  that  line. 

49.  The  men  'hould  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the 
side  of  the  guide,  be  careful  not  to  open  out  the  left  el- 
bow nor  the  right  arm,  yield  to  the  pressure  coming  from 
the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  coming  from  the  o{>- 
posite  side. 

50.  They  should  keep  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no 
matter  on  which  side  the  guide  may  be,  and  if  found  be- 
fore or  behind  the  alignment,  the  man  in  fault  must  cor- 
rect himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step,  by 
degrees,  almost  insensible. 

51.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  the  recruits  to 


10  ror^iTTOx  of  thr  soldier. 

comprehend  that  the  alignment  can  only  be  preserved,  in 
snarching,  but  bv  the  regularity  of  the  step,  the  touch 
of  the  elbow,  and  the  maiutainance  of  the  shouldera  in  & 
square  with  tkQ  line  of  direction. 

62.  The  squad  being  in  mirch,  the  instructor  wishing  to 
march  them  obliquely,  will  command: 

I.  Itigkt  (or  left)  obli-^ue.     2.   Makch. 

53.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half 
face  to  the  right  (or  left)  and  will  then  march  straight 
forward  in  the  new  direction.  As  the  men  no  longer  touch 
elbows,  they  should  glance  along  the  shoulders  of  the  near- 
est files  towards  the  side  to  which  they  are  obliquing,  and 
should  regulate  their  steps  so  that  the  shoulders  shall  al- 
ways be  behind  that  of  their  next  neighbor  on  that  side, 
and  that  his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other  mem 
in  the  rank. 

54.  The  men  sh«uld  preserve  the  same  length  of  pace 
and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primitive  di- 
rection, will  command  : 

I.   Foru-ard.     2.   March, 

56.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half 
face  to  the  left  (or  right)  and  all  will  then  march  straight 
to  the  front,  as  in  the  direct  march. 

57.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  should 
wish, to  march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will  command: 

1.   Squadlacl-iOKtrd.     2.    Guide  right  {ov  left.)     3.   Miuoir. 

l-H.  At  the   oouiinand   marrh,   the  recruit   will  step  off 


Kosrrio.v  ok  ihk  solltier.  11 

smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourtecu  inches  to  tho  rear, 
reckoning  from  heel  to'  heel,  and  so  on  with  the  fset  in 
succession,  till  the  command  halt,  which  will  always  be 
preceded  by  the  cauti'>n,  tSquacl. 

59.  The  men  will  halt  promptly   at  this   command  and 
bring  the  foot  in  front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

60.  This  step  will  ahra3'S  be  execnted  in  quick  time. 

To  Mirk   Time. 


01.  The  .'quad  marching  in  the  direct  step  in  common 
or  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  3fark  time.     2.  March. 

62.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  ho,  given  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  groind,  make  a  sem- 
blance of  marching,  by  advancing  flr?t  one  foot  and  then 
the  other,  always  bringing  back  the  advanced  foot  and 
placing  its  heel  by  the  side  of  the  heel  of  the  other. 

To   Change  Step. 

63.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Change   step.     2.  March. 

Gi.  At  the  second  coiwraand,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  cither  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  bring  up 
quickly  the  foot  in  the  rear  to  the  side  of  that  just  come  to 
the  ground,  and  step  olV  v.ilh  the  latter. 


12  rosuiox  OF  ruK  soldieu. 

65.  The  squad  marching  in  common,  quick  or  double 
quick  time,  and  the  instructor  wishing  to  face  it  about, 
will  command  : 

J.  Sqnad,  right  about.     2.  MA.aCH. 

66.  At  the  comjiand  march,  which  will  be  given  the 
instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  t»  the  ground,  bring  this 
foot  to  the  ground,  and  turning  on  it,  face  to  the  rear,  then 
place  the  right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off  with 
the  left  foot. 

67.  If  the  squad  be  marching  and  the  instructor  wishes 
to  bring  it  to  a  halt  and  faced  to  the  rear,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Sqnad,  right  about.     2.  Halt. 

08.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  as  the 
left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  bring  this  foot  to  the 
ground,  and  turning  on  it  face  to  the  rear,  then  bring  the 
right  foot  to  the  side  of  the  left. 

69.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  wishing 
to  move  it  to  the  right  on  the  same  line,  will  command  : 

1.  Side  step  to  the  right.     2.  March. 

70.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  glance  his 
eyes  to  the  right,  and  at  the  same  time  carry  his  right 
foot  about  tcMi  inches  to  the  '•ight,  and  instantly  bring  up 
his  left  foot,  and  so  on,  the  whole  with  perfect  precision 
of  time. 

71.  The  shoulders  must  be  kept  square  to  the  front,  and 


13  rOSITIOiV   OF  THE  ROLPIBR. 

each  man  perceptibly  halting,  when  he  has  closed  on  the 
fixed  point,  or  on  the  man  next  to  him. 

72.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  squad  to  halt, 
he  will  command  :  ** 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

73.  At  the  command  halt,  bring  up  the  left  foot  to  the 
Bide  of  the  right,  and  stand  firm. 

74.  To  change  the  position  by  aide  step  to  the  left  it  will 
be  executed  on  the  same  principles  by  inverse  means. 

To  March  by  the  Flanh. 

75.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt  and  correctly  alligned,  the 
instructor  will  command  : 

Count   ttcos, 

6.  At  this  command  the  men  count  from  right  to  left, 
pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone, 
and  without  turning  the  head,  one,  two,  according  to  the 
place  which  he  occupies. 

77.  This  being  accomplished,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Squad,  right — Face.     2.  Fornard.     3.  March. 

78.  At  the  command  face,  the  squad  will  face  to  tho 
right;  the  even  numbered  men  after  facing  to  the  right, 
will  step  quickly  to  the  side  of  tho  odd  numbered  men, 
the  latter  standi^ng  fast,  so  that  when  the  movement  is 
executed,  the  men  wi;l  be  formed  into  files  of  two  abreast* 


1-i  *tllLIUl-   (»1-     1111',   SyLAll. 

70.  Xt  the  command  march,  tlie  equitd  will  jstep  oft' 
smartly  with  the  lePt  foot ;  the  files  keeping  alicjned  and 
prcsei  ving  their  intervals. 

80.  To  march  by  the  left  flank, %ill  be  executed  b}-  the 
same  command,  substituting  the  word  left  for  right,  and 
bj  inverse  means ;  in  this  case  the  even  numbered  men 
after  facing  to  the  left  will  stand  fast,  and  the  odd  num- 
ber will  place  themselves  on  their  left. 

81.  The  instructor  should  place  himself  five  or  six  paces 
on  the  flank  of  the  rank  marching  in  file,  to  watch  over 
the  execution  of  the  principles  prescribed.  He  will  also, 
sometimes  place  himself  in  its  roar,  halt  and  suffer  it  to 
pass  fifteen  or  twenty  paces,  the  better  to  see  whether  the 

.men  cover  each  other  accurately. 

82.  When  he  wishes  to  halt  the  rank,  marching  by  the 
flank,  he  w  ill  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

83.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  af- 
terward no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may  have  lost  his 
distance. 

84.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by  fac- 
ing to  the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  by  a 
face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the  left  flank. 

85.  The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the  same  time  move 
quickly  into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad  again  in- 
to one  rank. 

86.  To  change  direction  by  fik',  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  B>/file  left  (or  right)     2.  March. 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change  di- 
rection to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing  a  email  arc  of  a 


SCHOOT,  OF    THE  SQIUD.  15 

circle,  and  will  then  inarch  straight  forward  ;  the  two 
men  of  this  file  in  wheeling  will  keep  up  the  touch  of  the 
elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to  which  the  wheel  ia 
made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four  steps.  Each  file 
will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  where 
that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

88.  To  face  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  in  marching,  tlio 
instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  hij  the  ri;jht  {ov  left)  Jlank.     2.  March. 

89.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  a  little 
before  either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  will 
turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is  raised  in  the  new  di- 
rection, and  step  off  with  the  other  foot,  w'ithout  altering 
the  cadence  of  the  step  ;  the  men  will  double  or  undouble 
rapidly. 

90.  If  in  facing  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  the  squad 
should  face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into  one  rank 
agreeably  to  the  principles  as  indicated  in  Nos.  84  and  85. 
Observe  that  the  men  who  are  in  the  rear  always  move 
up  to  form  into  single  rank,  and  in  such  manner  as  never 
to  invert  the  order  of  the  numbers  in  the  rank. 

91.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  ihe  rear,  the 
instructor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  it  is  the 
even  numbers  who  will  double  by  moving  to  the  left  of 
the  odd  numbers;  but  if  by  the  right  flank,  it  is  the  odd 
numbers  who  will  double  to  the  right  o'  the  even  num- 
bers. 

92.  Should  the  instructor  wish  the  men  to  march  in  one 
rank,  he  will  caution  them  not  to  double  files. 


K>  $||U00L   OF  THE    SOLDIKR. 

Wheelings. 

93.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds  ;  from  halts  or  on  fixed 
pivots,  and  in  march  or  on  movable  pivots. 

9i.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  passing  a 
corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in  column,  or 
from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

95.  Wheels  in  marching,  take  place  in  changes  of  direc- 
tion in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  executed  to 
the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

96.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only  turns  in 
his  place  without  advancing  or  receding. 

97.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot-man  takes 
steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad  is 
marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to  clear  the 
wheeling  point  before  the  next  subdivision  arrives  on  the 
Bame  ground,  which  is  necessary  in  order  that  the  succeed- 
ing subcivisions  may  not  lose  their  distances  by  being 
delayed. 

98.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  fla:ik  will  take  the  full 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  or  thirty-three  inches,  accord- 
ing to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  Halt,  or  on  a  Fixed  Pivot. 

99.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place 
a  well  instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to  conduct  it, 
and  then  command  : 

1.  By  squad,  ri(jht  wheel.     2.   March. 

100.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off  with 
the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  tinip  tli!"  head  a  little  to 

A 


T-OSiriON   OF  TUE  .SOUDIKR.  17 

the  left,  the  C3'es  fi.Tod  on  the  line  of  the  oyc^  of  tlie  men 
to  the  left ;  the  pivot  man  will  merely  mark  fimc  in  grada- 
f.Wy  turning  his  body,  in  order  to  conform  himself  to  the 
movement  of  the  marching  flank  ;  the  man  who  conducts 
this  flank  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  from 
the  first  step,  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder,  cast  his 
eycji  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank,  and  feel  constantly 
the  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightly,  but  never  push  him. 

101.  The  other  men  wiil  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  th« 
next  man,  towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  cominjj  from 
the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  coRform  himself  to  the 
njarching  flank,  shortening  his  step  according  to  his  ap- 
proximation to  the  pivot. 

102.  The  instructor  will  make  tlic  rank  wheel  round  tlio 
circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  ^rder  to  cause  th^^ 
pijnciplss  to  be  better  understood,  and  he  will  be  watch- 
ful that  the  centre  docs  not  break. 

103.  The  wheel  to  the  left  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles. 

lOL  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  wheel 
he  will  command : 

1.  iSqtKtd.     2.  Malt. 

105.  At  the  second  command  the  rank  will  halt  and  no 
man  stir.  The  instructor  going  to  the  flank  opposite  t)ie 
pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the 
direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  rank,  without,  how- 
ever, displacing  the  pivot,  who  will  conform  the  line  of 
iiis  shouldei's  to  this  direction. 

IOC.  The  instructor  will  take  care  to  have  between  th-^PH 
two  men  and  the  pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to  cvsx- 
iii'm  the  other  men.     lie  will  theu  coaimaud  • 
li 


18  SCHOOL  or  Tna  soitDiEtr. 

1.  Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

107.  At  this  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  allignmcnt 
®f  the  two  men  established  as  a  basis  in  conformity  with 
principles  prescribed  in  No.  38. 

108.  The  instructor  will  next  cammand  Front,  which 
will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  No.  3^. 

Wheeling^  in  Marching,  or  on  a  Movable  Pivot. 

109.  The  rank  being  in  march,  and  the  instructor  ■«Tiab- 
ing  tO' chang-e  the  direction  to  the  reverse  flank,  (to  the 
side  opposite  to  the  guide  or  pivot  flank)  he  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Right  (or  left)  whtel.     2.  March. 

110.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is 
jot  four  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

111.  At  the  command  march,  the  wheel  will  be  executed 
in  the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except  that  the  toucb 
of  the  elbow  will  remain  towards  the  marching  flank  (or 
side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  the  actual  pivot  j  that  the 
pivot  man,  instead  of  merely  turning  in  bis  place,  will 
conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank, 
feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man,  take  steps  of  full 
nine  inches,  and  thus  gain  ground-forward  in  describing  a 
small  ciu've,  to  clear  the  point  of  wheel.  The  middle  of 
tha  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as  the 
movement  shall  commence,  the  man  who  conducts  the 
marching  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  on  the  ground  over  which 
Jie  will  have  to  pass. 

112.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 


rOSITION  OF  A   BOLOTUn.  19 

1.  Fortcard.     2.    March. 
a-  '.A. 

113.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when  ftiuv 
paces  are  yet  re^juired  to  complete  the  chan,fe  of  direc- 
tion. 

Hi.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  of  completinf^  the  wheel,  the  man  who-  conducts 
the  marching  flank  will  direct  himself  straight  forward  ; 
the  pivot  man  and  all  the  rank  will  retake  che  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the  head  direct  to  the 
froat. 

Turning. 

115.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide, 
In  matching,  will  be  executed  as  follows  :  The  instructor 
will  command  :  • 

1.  Left  (or  right)  tiirit.     2,  Mauch, 

116.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is 
yet/our  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

117.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face  to  the 
left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and  more  forward  in  the  new- 
direction  without  slackening  or  quickening  the  cadence, 
and  without  shortening  or  lengthening  the  step.  The  whole 
rank  will  promptly  conform  itself  to  the  new  direction,  to 
eflect  which,  each  man  will  advance  the  shoulder  opposite 
the  guide,  take  the  double  quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in 
the  new  direction,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of 
the  guide,  and  retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side 
in  placing  himself  on  the  allig-njiicnt  of  the  guide,  from 


20  POSITION  OF  rnK  soldiek. 

whom  he  will  take  the  step,  and  then  resynie  tho  direct 
position  of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus  arrive  pucc-g- 
sivelj  on  the  allignment. 

118.  When  the  reoruits  compreheiul  and  execute  well,  in 
quick-time,  the  wheels,  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the 
change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  same  movements  to  bo  executed  in  double 
quick  time. 

Manual  of  Aims  fur  Heavy  Infantry. 

119.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four  men, 
placed  at  first  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  aftcrwai-ds  ' 
in  two  ranks. 

120.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time,  (or 
pause)  and  this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions. 

121.  The  rate  or  swiftness  of  each  motion,  except  the 
motions  relative  to  the  cartrige,  to  the  rammer  and  to  the 
fixino-  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet,  is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth 
part  of  a  minute  ;  but  the  motions  here  excepted  should 
be  executed  with  promptness  and  regularity. 

122.  As  soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  comprehend  the 
positions  of  the  several  motions,  they  will  be  taught  to 
execute  the  time  without  resting  on  the  motions. 

123.  Tlecruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  defects 
in  the  conformation  of  the  shoaldcrs,  breast,  and  hips. — 
These  the  instructor  will  endeavor  to  correct  in  the 
lessons  without  arms,  ana  afterwards  by  steady  endea- 
vors, so  thai  the  appearances  of  the  pieces  in  tlie  same 
line  may  be  uniform,  and  this  without  constraint  to  the 
men. 


rOSTTIOX    OF    THE    SOLPIER.  21 

''         Princi2)fes  of  Shouldered  Arms: 

124.  The  recruit  being  jilaccd  in  the  position  of  the 
soldier,  thff  instructor  will  cause  him  to  seize  the  piece  in 
the  left  hand,  the  arm  but  a  very  little  bent,  the  elbow 
back,  near  the  body,  the  palm  of  the  hand  passing  on  the 
outer  edge  of  the  butt  on  the  upper  joints  of  the  fi^gcri, 
(the  inner  edge  on  the  lower  joints,  and  the  ends  inside,) 
the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  middle  and  forefingers, 
the  thuihb  on  the  front  screws  of  the  butt  plate,  the  re- 
maining fmgers  under  the  butt,  the  butt  more  or  less  kept 
back,  according  to  the  conformation  of  the  man,  so  that 
the  piece  seen  from  the  front  (or  side)  shall  appear  per- 
pendicular, and  also  that  the  movement  of  the  thigh,  in 
inarching,  may  not  raise  it,  or  cause  it  waver :  the  stock 
below  the  tail  band  resting  agiiinst  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der, just  within  the  joint,  the  right  arm  hanging  naturally 
as  in  the  position  of  the  soldier. 

125.  The  instructor,  before  proceeding  to  drill  the  re- 
cruit in  the  manual  will  causo  to  be  repeated,  the  move- 
ments of  eyes  right,  left  and/rout  and  the  facings. 

126.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  follo>Ving 
progression  :  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Pretent — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

127.  ( First  motion. )  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
the  lock  out,  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand,  the  piece  perpendicular  and  detached 
iV  ini  the  shoulder,  the  left  hand  remaining  under  the  butt. 

]'1R.  {Second  motion.)  Complete  the  turning  inwaids 
oT  ihe  jjiccc  so  as  to  bring  it  erect  before  the  centre  of  tlio 


22  ,  POSITION  OF  THE  SOLDlSlt. 

body,  the  rammar  to  the  front,  the  right  hand  under  and 
against  the  f^uard ;  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  time  with 
the  left  hand  above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended  along 
the  barrel  and  on  the  stock,  the  forearm  resting  on  the 
body  without  constraint,  and  the  hand  at  the  hight  of  the 
elbow. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  tu-o  motions. 

120.  {First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  out,  (with  the  thumb  on  the  S  plate,  and 
the  forefinger  against  the  cock,)  raise  and  support  it 
against  the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  drop  the 
left  hand  under  the  butt,  the  right  hand  resting  on,  with- 
out graspin'g  the  small  of  the  stock. 

130.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  quickly  the  right  hand 
into  its  position.  0 

Order — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions 

131.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  smartly  by  ex- 
tending the  left  arm,  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the 
right  hand  above  and  near  the  tail  band;  (without  the 
i?ast  pause.)  quit  the  hold  of  th^  left  hand,  and  carry  the 
piece  opposite  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  in  front,  the 
little  finger  behind  the  barrel,  the  right  hand  supported 
against  the  hip,  the  butt  three  inches  from  the  ground, 
the  piece  ei*ect,  the  left  hand  hanging  by  the  side. 

132.  {Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the 
rio-ht  hand,  without  shock,  to  the  ground  and  take  the  fol- 
lowing position  : 


POSTTrON    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  23 

Position  cf  Order  Arms. 

133.  The  liand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and 
forelinper,  extended  along  the  stock  ;  the  other  fingers  ex- 
tended and  joined  ;  the  muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the 
right  shoulder  ;  the  rammer  in  front :  the  toe  (f»r  beak'^ 
of  the  butt,  against,  and  in  aline  with  the  toe  of  the  right 
foot;  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

134.  The  instructor  will  see  the  recruit  is  well  establish- 
ed in  the  position  of  order  artnt,  and  then  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

Otie  time  a»d  trro  mofiomi. 

135.  [Firnt  motion.)  liaise  the  piece  smarlty  with  the 
right  hand,  carry  it  against  the  left  shoulder,  so  as  to 
bring  the  barrel  to  the  front,  place,  at  the  same  time,  the 
loft  hand  under  the  butt,  and  slip  the  right  hand  down  to 
the  hammer. 

136.  (Second  motion.)  Let  fall  smartlj  the  right  hand 
into  position. 

Siijyport — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motionn. 

137.  {First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand,  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  four  inches  below  the  lock,  raising  a 
little  but  r.ot  turning  the  piece. 

138.  {Second  motion.)  Take  the  left  hand  from  the  butt, 
extend  the  left  forearm  upward,  jicross  the  body,  under 
the  cock,  the  hand  flat  on  the  right  breast. 

139.  {Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  smartly  into 
its  position. 


24  POSITION    OF    THE    SOLDIErv. 

Shoulder  (or  carry) — Akms, 
One  time   and  three  motions. 

140.  {First  motion.)  Carry  quicklj  the  right  hand  to 
the  small  of  the  stock. 

141.  {Second  motion.)  Place  quicklj  the  left  hand  un- 
der the  butt,  and  at  the  same  time,  without  any  pause,  let 
the  right  hand,  with  the  fingers  extended  slip  up  under 
the  cock  of  the  piece,  the  cock  resting  on  the  forefinger 
between  the  middle  and  third  joints,  and  the  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  S  plate.* 

142.  {Third  motion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand 
into  its  position,  and  drop  with  the  left,  at  the  same  time, 
the  piece  into  tha  position  of  shoulder  armf. 

Unfix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

148.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  by  a  full  extension 
of  tho  left  arm,  seize  it  at  the  same  tim*  with  the  right 
hand  abore  and  near  the  tail  band. 

144.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  along  the  left  thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  abore 
the  right,  lengthen  out  the  left  arm,  re»t  the  butt  on  the 
ground  without  shock,  and  c  irrj  at  the  same  time  the 
right  hand  to  the  bayonet;  with  the  thumb  turn  the«lasp 

♦This  movement  is  somewhat  different  from  that  pre- 
scribed in  other  works,  but  it  will  be  found  that  it  causes 
uniformity  and  precision,  and  adds  much  more  ease  and 
grace  in  its  execution,  ea^iecially  li-om  a  front  yiaw.  It 
was  used  entirely  by  the  lamented  Col.  C.  C.  Tew,  Sup't. 
of  the  North  Carolina  Militarr  Academr,  at  Hillsboro', 
N.  C. 


POSITION   OF  THE  Sni.PIER  2.> 

against  the  stop,  seize  the  bayonet  at  the  s(X:ket  and  ihank, 
10  that  the  lower  end  of  the  socket  may  be  about  an  inch 
below  the  heel  of  the  palm,  and  that  in  wresting  off  the 
bayonet,  the  thumb  may  be  extended  on  the  blade. 

145.  (  Third  motion.)  Wrest  off  the  bayonet,  return  it 
to  the  scabbard,  place  imnu-diately  the  rijjht  little  finfijer 
on  the  butt  of  the  rammer,  lower  the  I'A'l  hand  alonp  the 
barrel,  extending  the  arm,  without  depressing  the  shoulder. 

Sliouhler-  -kuMS.  , 

0)lt  time  and  thrte  modnua. 

146.  {Fimt  motion.)  Uaise  the  piece  with  the  left  h^nd 
■lon{(  the  left  side,  the  hand  at  the  height  of  .the  chin,  th; 
forearm  touching  the  piece,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  drop 
at  the  same  time  the  right  hand  to  seize  the  piece  a  littU 
above  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  forefinger  touching  the 
^ock,  and  the  thumb  on  the  S  plate. 

147.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  drop  the  left  and  place  it  under  the  butt,  support 
the  piece  with  the  right  hind  against  the  shoulder  i  i  the 
pouition  of  $houlder  armt,  the  right  hand  resting  ou  with- 
ont  grasping  the  piece. 

143.  {Third  motion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand 
into  its  position. 

149.  The  instructor  should  be  careful  that  in  all  more- 
nients  where  the  hand  is  under  the  cock,  as  in  the  second 
motion  abore,  that  the  fingers  are  extended  and  perfectly 
•traight,  the  cock  resting  on  the  forefinger  between  the 
middle  and  third  joints,  and  Ihe  tliuiub  on  the  S  plate. 


26  POSITION  OF  THK  SOLDIKR. 

Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

150.  (Fir$t  motion.)  Seize  quickly  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  the  thumb  on  the  S  plate,  and  the  forefinger 
against  the  cock ;  at  the  same  instant,  detach  the  piece 
from  the  shoulder,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  seize  it  at  the 
tail  band  with  the  left  hind,  the  thumb  extended  on  the 
rammer,  the  piece  erect,  opposite  the  shoulder  the  left 
elbovT  on  the  piece. 

151.  {Second  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under 
the  left  arm  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  tail  band,  the 
thumb  on  the  rammer,  the  little  finger  resting  againit  the 
hip,  and  the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  into  ita 
position. 

Sho  aider — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

152.  {First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
(but  not  too  suddenly  lest  the  rammer  should  flj  out,) 
seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand  to  support 
it  against  the  shoulder,  allowing  the  hand  to  assume  the 
position  as  indicated  in  Xo.  141,  quit  the  hold  of  the  left 
hand  and  pass  it  quickly  under  th.e  butt. 

153.  {Second  ^notion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand 
into  its  position  ;  drop  at  the  same  time  the  piece  into  the 
position  of  shoulder  armt. 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

154.  {First  motion.)     Kimtrnfixhayontt,  '^o.  \iZ. 

155.  {Second   motion.)     As   in    unfix  bayonet,  No.  144, 


SCHOOL  OF   THE  SQCAB.  27 

except  that  the  right  hand  will  go  to  the  scabbard,  to  seize 
the  baronet  by  the  socket  and  shank,  so  that  the  lower  (now 
upper)  end  of  the  socket  shall  extend  about  an  inch  above 
the  heel  of  the  palm. 

156.  (  Third  motion. )  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scab- 
bard, carry  it  and  fix  it  on  the  muzzle,  turning  the  clasp 
towards  the  body  with  the  right  thumb:  place  immedi- 
ately the  little  finger  on  the  head  of  the  rammer,  lower 
the  left  hand  along  the  barrel,  extending  the  arm  without 
depressing  the  shoulder. 

iS'Ao«('(f*r~-AKus. 

One  time  and  three  motio7is. 

157.  (  First,  Second  find  Third  moliow^.)  As  in  shoulder 
armn  from  uvfix  bayonet. 

Charge — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

158.  {First  7not{on.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  place  at  the 
same  time  the  right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles  with 
the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  opposite  to  and  about 
three  inches  from  the  left  heel ;  turn  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  lock  outwards,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock 
at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand,  the  piece  perpendi- 
cular and  detached  from  the  shoulder  ;  leaving  the  left 
hand  under  the  butt. 

150.  {Second  7notion.)  Bringdown  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  into  the  left,  the  latter  seizing  it  a  little  in  advance 
of  the  tail  band,  the  barrel  up,  the  left  elbow  near  the  body 


28 


POSITION    OF    THE   SOLDIER. 


the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  at  the  height  of  the  eye. 

160.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  take  care  and  not 
touch  their  file  leaders  with  the  points  of  their  bayonots. 

Shoidder — Ahms. 

One  time  and  two  motions, 

161.  {First  motion.)  Face  to  the  front  by  turning  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  up  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the 
left  heel,  at  the  sause  time  spring  up  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand,  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left  hand 
under  the  butt,  allowing  at  the  same  time  the  right  hand 
to  assume  the  position  as  indicated  in  No.  141. 

162.  {  Second  motion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand 
into  its  position. 

Trail — Akms. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

1^3.  {First  motion.)  As  first  motion  of  order  armi 
No.   131. 

164.  {Second  motion.)  Incline  a  little  the  muzzle  to  the 
front,  the  butt  to  the  rear,  and  about  three  inches  from  the 
ground,  the  right  hand  grasping  the  piece  and  supported 
at  the  hip. 

165.  Should  the  instructor  wish  to  relieve  the  men  when 
marching  with  arms  trailed,  he  will  command  :  Change — 
Trail,  which  will  be  executed  in  one  motion,  by  raising 
the  muzzle  to  the  shoulder,  passing  the  piece  across  the 
front  of  the  bod}--,  trailing  it  with  the  left.  At  the  com- 
mand Iiec7iange—TRAUj,  raise  the  muzzle  to  the  shoulder, 
pass  the  piece  to  the  right  hand  and  retake  the  position  of 
trail  arms. 


ruSMION    UF    THE    SOLl>IER,  29 

Sh  o  u  Ider — A  R  m  s, 

IGG.  At  the  comniand  shoulder  raise  the  piece  pcrpcn^i- 
cuLar  in  the  right  hand  ;  at  the  command  arms  execute  the 
two  motions  in  the  shoxdder  arma,  from  the  positien  of 
order  anna. 

1C)7.  The  instructor  wishing  to  give  the  men  repose  in 
the  position  of  order  onus,  will  command: 

Rest. 

168.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  he  re- 
quired to  ])rescrve  silence,  or  to  remain  pteady  in  position. 
Or  he  may  command : 

1.   In  place.     2.   Rkst. 

ino.  At  the  second  command,  the  men  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  silence  or  steadineee  of  position,  but 
they  must  always  keep  one  of  their  heels  and  their  pieces 
on  the  allignment. 

[Jicninrkt.]  (The  instructor  will  be  careful  that  the  men 
do  not  squat  ur  lie  down,  as  it  is  exceedingly  unmilitary 
and  apt  to  make  them  careJess  and  inattentive.  The  com- 
piler of  this  woik  has  often  seen  reci-iaits  stretched  at  full 
length  on  the  ground,  l^iung  ofhcers  particularly,  should 
be  cautioned  against  allowing  it.) 

If  the  instructor  wishes,  he  will  commaisd  : 

1.  Parade.     2.  Rest. 

170.  At  the  second  command,  the  men  will  carry  th« 
right  foot  six  inches  in  rear  of  the  left  heel,  the  left  kne(» 
slightly  bent,  the  body  upright  upon  the  right  log,  th« 
piece  resting  against  the  hollow  of  the  ri^ht  shoulder,  tte 


3'(J  rOSITIOI*    OF   THE   JfOLDIETt. 

hands  crossed  in  front,  the  back  of  them  outwards,  the 
left  hand  uppermost,  the  eyes  directed  to  the  front. 

171.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  the  original  position,  the 
instructor  will  command  : 

I.  Attention     2..  Squai>. 

172.  At  the  second  command,  the  men  will  resnme  their 
correct  position  of  order  arma. 

173.  If  the  squad  should  be  at  the  position  of  support 
arms,  when  the  command  in  place  or  parade  rest  is  given, 
the  men  wiji  be  regulated  by  the  directions  indicated  in 
No.  169,  ITO  except  they  \Till  bring  up  the  right  hand 
amartly  to  the  small  of  the  stock  and  seize  it. 

174.  At  the  command  attention  they  will  resume  the  cor- 
rect po8itio>n  of  auj^pmH  arms^ 

1.  To  Ei^ht  Shotdder  Shift     2.  Arms.      (  From  a  STiouMer 
Arm9. ) 

One  tim«  and  two  mottona. 

175.  {First  motion. )  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

176.  {Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  the  lock  plate  upwards^  the  left  liand  still  holding 
the  butt,  the  muzzle  elevated;  |jiace  the  right  hand  on  th& 
Jautt,  the  beak  between  the  two  first  fingers,  the  other  twO" 

fingers  under  the  bait  plate,  and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

Shoulder— Krms. 
One  time  c$nd  two  motions . 

177.  ( First  motion. )  Raise  the  piece  and  extend  t&e 
right  arm,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  lock^  ca^-rj 


TOSITIOK    OF   THS   SOXDrRB.  "31 

tlie  piece  Jip:ainst  the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  barrel  to 
the  front,  (in  turning  place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand 
on  the  S  plate,  fingers  extended,  cock  resting  on  the  fore- 
finger as  indicated  in  Xa.  141,)  the  right  hand  being  at  the 
small  of  the  stock,  place  the  left  hand  under  the  bult. 

178.  (Stdftid  motion.)  L«t  the  r^ht  hand  fall  by  the 
fide. 

Arms — At  Will. 

One  f»o(io». 

175.  Carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  tSiomlder,  wit"k 
one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

Sh<nild-er— Av.iS£.  • 

180.  Retake  the  position  of  ahoidder  arms, 

Armn — Port. 

181.  Throvf  the  piece  diagouaUy  across  the  body,  the 
lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  time  with, 
both  hands,  the  right  at  the  small  ef  the  stock,  the  left  at 
the  tail  band,  the  thumbs  pointing  towards  the  muzzle,  the 
barrel  sloping  upwards  and  crossing  opposite  to  the  point 
of  the  loft  shoulder,  the  butt  proportionately  lowered  ;  the 
palm  of  the  right  haad  abore,  tliat  of  the  Mt  under  the 
piece,  and  the  nails  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  t© 
vrhich  the  elbows  will  be  clased. 

Sim  iildrcr — A  R  MS, 

On«  time  and  two  motions. 

182.  ( First  motion. )  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  left 
shoulder,  place  the  left  hand  quickly  under  the  butt,  th« 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  under  the  cock  and  extended  a4 
in  No.  UL 


■->-i  POSITION    OF    TXTK    SOLrHETt. 

183.  {Serond  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  sm.irtiv  hy 
the  sido. 

7b  Ground  Arm^. 

184.  The  se(_uad  being  at  ordered  arms,  if  the  instructor 
Irish  tbe  piece  to  be  placed  on  the  ground,  he  will  command; 

Ground — Arms. 
It 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

185.  {First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,, 
the  barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  seiz'e  the  cartridge 
box  with  left  hand,  bend  the  bodv,  advance  the,left  foot, 
the  heel  opposite  the  lower  band  ;  laj  the  piece  on  the- 
ground  with  the  right  hand,  the  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line 
with  the  right  toe,  the  knee  slightly  bent,  the  right  heej 
raised. 

186.  (Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot  by 
the  side  of  the  right,  quit  the  c?*rtridge  box  with  tbe  left 
hand,  and  drop  the  bands  by  the  side. 

Maise — Akms. 

187.  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend 
the  body,  advance  the  left  foot  opposite  tbe  lower  band, 
and  seize  the  piece  with  tfl*e  right  hand. 

188.  liaise  the  piece,  bringing  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  right ;  turn  the  piece  with  the  right  ham},  the  rammer 
to  the  front;  at  the  same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with 
the  left  hand,  and  drop  this  hand  by  the  side. 

7o  Sfock  Arms, 

189.  The  squad  bring  in  two  ranks  at  order  arms,  the 
mstructov  will  command  i 


ras7TT0N  OF  TiiK  &ni,rwj%v.  2.» 

Stack — Arms. 

100.  At  this  commaiHl,  the  front  rank  man  of  crory 
even  numbered  file  will  jjasp  his  jjicce  before  liini,  seizing' 
it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  middle  band,  and  place  the 
butt  outsidd  and  near  theleftfoot,  the  barrel  turned  to  the? 
front,  the  ifiuzzle  opposite  the  rifjht  shoulder.  At  the 
same  titnc  the  front  rank  man  of  ercry  odd  numbered  file 
■nill  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seizing  it  with  the  left  hand 
below  the  middle  band,  and  hand  it  to  the  man  next  on  the 
left)  the  latter  will  receive  it  with  the  rig^ht  hand  two 
inches  above  the  middle  band,  throw  the  butt  about  thirty- 
two  inches  to  the  front,  opposite  to  his  right  shoulder,  in- 
clining the  muzzle  towards  the  right  shoulder,  and  lock 
the  shanks  of  the  two  bayonets,  the  barrel  remaining  to 
the  rear  ahd  its  shank  above  that  of  the  first  piece.  The 
tear  sank  man  of  every  even  file  projects  his  bayonet  for- 
ward, the  barrel  to  the  right,  and  introduces  it  (usingboth 
hands)  between  the  muzzles  and  under  the  shanks  of  the 
two  other  bayonets.  He  will  then  abandon  the  piece  to 
his  file  leader,  who  will  receive  it  with  the  right  hand  un- 
der the  middle  band,  bring  the  butt  to  the  front,  holding 
up  his  own  piece  and  the  stack  with  the  left  hand,  ami 
place  the  butt  of  this  third  piece  bctwccr.  the  feet  of  the 
man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel  to  the  right.  The  sCack 
thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  file  will  pass 
his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the  barrel  turned  to  the  front, 
and,  sloping  the  bayonet  forward  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

li)l.  ^Yhen  organized  coiypanies  stack  arms,  the  ser- 
geants, (and  also  the  corporals,  if  in  the  rank  of  file 
closers,)  will  rest  thoir  pieces  against  ttie  stacks  nearest 
them  respectively,  after  ranks  are  broken  and  resume  thevf 
pieces  on  i':.v  sisMial  to  ■>•'  fi-u-in  CKiik'--. 


'^i  POSITION    OP    THK    SOLDTBH. 

"  192.  The  nien  of  both  ranks  haring  assumed  ihe  position 
of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  noaj  give  the 
command : 

2.   Break  rank*.     2.   Maroh. 

193.  The  instructor  Tiavlng;  reformed  tLe  ranks  wiil 
command :  ' 

Take — Arms, 

194.  At  this  command  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd 
file  will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the  stack;  the  front  rank 
Hian  of  ever  J  even  file  will  seize  his  own  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  and  that  of  the  man  on  his  right  with  his  right; 
ihe  rear  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  seize  his  piece 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  middle  band,  advancing  for  tke 
purpose  the  hollow  of  the  right  f«ot  as  far  as  the  right 
heel  of  the  file  leader;  these  two  men  will  raise  *up  the 
stack  to  loosen  tha  sfeanks  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
odd  file  receives  his  piece  from  the  hand  of  the  man  next 
on  the  left,  and  the  four  men  retake  the  position  of  the 
Boldier  at  order  arms. 

195.  The  instructor  having  brotight  the  mea  to  the  posi- 
tion of  shoulder  arms,  will  command  : 

Reverse — Arms- 

Otie  time  and  tito  motions, 

196.  {First  rAotiGn.)  Grasp  ike  piece  with  tiae  right 
hand,  the  finger  nail  to  the  front,  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  turn  the  piece  to  the  right  and  front  of  th®  body, 
and  bring  it  reversed  under  the  left  arm,  the  barrel  slop- 
ing to  the  rear  ;  at  the  same  time,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the 

•gmall  of  the  stock  grasping  it  with  the  finger  nails  up. 


P08ITI0X    OF   TnK    SOT-DIBB.  3S 

197.  {Second  motion.)  Remove  and  -carry  briskly  the 
right  hand  to  the  rear  of  the  body,  and  with  it  grasp 
the  piece  between  the  middle  and  lower  bands,  the  finger 
nails  outwards. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  ttco  madotia. 

198.  (Fir et  motion.)  Bring  the  right  hand  briskly  to 
the  front  and  with  it  grasp  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the 
Slock,  the  finger  nails  inward;  at  the  same  time  slip  the 
left  hand  to  the  butt  and  invert  the  piece  with  both  han(I» 
bringing  it  in  front  of  the  body,  to  the  shoulder,  and  slip- 
ping the  right  hand,  let  it  fall  to  the  hammer. 

199.  {Second  motion. )     Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side- 

Jieat  on — Arms. 
One  tivte  (tnd  two  motions. 

200.  {First  motion.)     Grasp  the  piece  at  the   height  o 
the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  the  finger  nails  to  tho 
front,  reverse  it  by  turning  it  to  the  right  in  front  of  tho 
body,  let  the  muzzle  rest  on  the  left  foot,  the  left  hand  rest- 
ing on  the  butt. 

201.  {Second  mofi&n.)  Ilemore  quickly  the  rigf^lit  hand 
to  the  butt  and  let  it  rest  there,  the  finger  nails  outward ; 
at  the  same  time  bow  the  head  and  bend  the  right  knee. 

[I^eynark.]  (This  movement  is  rarely  used  ezcept  in 
funeral  ceremonies,  Ac. ) 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  ttco  motions. 

202.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand,  and  with  it 
seize  the  piece  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  with  both  hands^, 


3G  rOSliluN    OF    TllH    SOLDIEK. 

(the  left  depressed  and  the  right  raised,)  turn  tlie  piece  in 
front  of  the  bod^^,  bringing-  it  against  the  shoulder,  and 
slipping  the  right  hand  let  it  fall  to  the  hammer. 

203.  {Second  motion.)     Drop  the  righthand  bj  the  side. 

Indirection  of  jlmis. 

204.  The  men  being  nt  orderod  arms,  and  having  the 
bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  the  instructor  will  command: 

Inspection — AuMS. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

205.  {First  motion.)     Face  to  the  right  once  and  a  half 
e    arryicg  the  right  foot  perpendicular  to  the  allignmcnt, 

about  six  inches  from,  and  at  right  angles  Mith  the  left, 
foot;  seize  promptly'' the  peice  with  the  left  hand  a  little 
above  the  middle  band,  incline  the  muzzle  to  the  rear  with" 
"out  displacing  the  heel  of  the  butt,  the  rammer  turned 
towards  the  body  ;  carrj'ing  at  the  same  time  the  right  hand 
to  the  baj'onet  as  indicated  in /?.»  hayonet. 

206.  {Second  motion.)  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the 
scabbard,  carry  and  fix  it  on  the  muzzle;  seize  next  the 
rammer,  draw  it-as  explained  in  the  fifth  time  of  loading 
(see  Z)raH-— Rammer,  Xos.  217,  218,  219.)  and  let  it  glide 
to  the  bottom  of  the  boi-e. 

207.  (  Third  motion. )     Face  promptly  to  the  front,  seize 
'  the  peice  with  the  right  hand  and   retake  the  position  of 

order  Mrm!*. 

208.  The  insti'uctor  will  then  inspect,  in  sviccession,  the 
piece  of  enfh  man,  in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank. 
Each  as  thi'  insti'uctor  roaches  him  will  laise  smartly  his 
piece  v.'ith  kis  right  hand^  seize  it  with  the  left  near  the 


I'UtilJlON    (IK    TUB    SULL>n-,lt.  0/ 

lower  band,  the  lock  to  the  front,  the  loft  hand  at  the 
height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye;  the 
instructor  will  take  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  handle, 
and  after  inspectinfj  it,  -will  return  it  to  the  recruit,  who 
will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  band  and  replace  it  ia 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

209.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each 
man  will  take  the  position  prescribed  in  No.  203,  return 
the  rammer  as  explained  in  the  seventh  time  of  loading;, 
(sec  ii'e/!n-»— Rammer,  Nos.  221,  222,  223.) 

210.  If,  instead  ol  tnitpcctioii  of  arms,  the  instructor 
shall  wish  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will  command: 

iYx— Uayonet. 

211.  Take  the  position  prescrioed  in  the  first  motion  of 
inspection  arms.  No.  203,  fix  bayonet  and  face  to  the  front. 

212.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  ascertain  if  any 
of  the  pieces  are  loaded,  he  will  command  : 

6'p?*t » (7 — II A  MM  EU . 

213.  Put  the  rammers  in  the  barrel  as  above  explained, 
and  retake  the  position  of  order  armif. 

The  instructor  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the 
rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or 
cause  each  man  to  make  it  ring  in  the  barrel. 

214.  Each  man  after  the  instructor  passes  him  will  re- 
turn rammer  and  resume  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Jiejitark.  [The  compiler  would  caution  oflicers  against 
striking  the  buds  of  the  pieces  against  the  ground  to 
make  the  rammer  J^pring,  as  it  is  liable  to  injure  tbclock.] 


38  POSITION    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

Loading  and  Firing. 

Load  in  ten  times. 

1.  Load. 

Two  motions. 

215.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  by  a  full  exten- 
sion of  the  left  arm,  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  above 
and  near  the  tail  band  ;  at  the  same  time  carry  the  right 
foot  forvrard,  the  heel  against  the  hollow   of  the  left  foot. 

216.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  with  the  right 
band  along  the  left  thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
middle  band,  and  with  the  left  hand  let  it  descend  along  to 
the  ground,  without  shock,  the  piece  touching  the  left 
thigh,  and  the  muzzle  opposite  the  centre  of  the  body; 
carry  the  right  hand  quickly  to  the  cartridge  box  and 
open  it. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

217.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two 
fingers  and  place  it  between  the  teeih. 

3.    Tear — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

218.  Tear  the  paper  down  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cart- 
ridge upright  between  the  thumb  and  next  two  fingers, 
near  the  top ;  and  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of  and 
near  the  muzzle,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

4.    Charge — CiRTRiDGE. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 
210.  Fix  the  eye  on  the  muzzle,  turn  quickly  the  back 


POSITIOH    OF    THE   SOLDIER.  39 

Of  the  risht  hand  towards  the  bodj,  in  order  to  discharge 
the  powder  into  the  barrel,  rai.e  the  elbon'  to  the  he.vtt 
of  he  wr.st  shake  the  cartrid<.e,  force  it  into  the  muzzle 
and  eave  the  hand  reversed,  the  fingers  extended,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  barrel. 

5.  2>ro«?— Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motiona, 
220    {Fir.t  motion. )    Drop  smartly  the  right  elbow  and 
seize  the  rammer  between  the  thumb  and  fore-fino-er  bent 
the  other  fingers  shut;  dra.v  it  smartly,   extending   the 
arm;  seize  the  rammer  again  at  the  middle,  between  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  hand  reversed,  the  palm  to  the 
ront,   the  nails  up,  the  eyes  following  the  movement  of 
the  hand;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  bj  again  ex- 
tending the  arm. 

221.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  rapidly  the  rammer  bo- 
tween  the  bayonet  and  the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  (the 
rammer  of  the  roar  rank  man  grazing  the  right  shoulder 
of  the  man  of  the  same  iile  in  front,  respectively,)  the 
rammer  parallel  to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the 
butt  of  the  rammer  opposite  to  the  muzzle,  but  not  yet 
inserted,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  muzzle. 

222.  {Third  motion.)     Insert  the  butt  of  the   rammer 
and  force  it  down  as  low  as  the  hand. 

6.  i?a»i— Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

223.  Extend  the  arm  to  its  full  length  to  seize  the  ram- 
mer between  the  right  thumb  extended  and  the  fore-fin- 
ger bent,  the  other  fingers  closed  ;  with  force  ram  home 
twice,   (the  right  elbow  down  and  near  the  piece,)  and 


40  POSITION    OP   THE    SOLDIER. 

seize  the  ramuier  at  the  little  end,  between  the  thumb  and 
fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers  closed,  the  right  elbow 
touching  the  body. 

7.   Return — Rammeu. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

224.  {Fir $t  motion.)  Draw  briskly  the  rammer,  re-seize 
the  middle  bet tveen  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  hand 
reversed,  the  palm  to  the  front,  the  nails  up,  the  eyes  fol- 
lowing the  movement  of  the  hand,  clear  the  rammer  from 
the  barrel  by  extending  the  arm. 

225.  [Seeond  motion.)  Turn  rapidly  the  rammer  be- 
tween the  bayonet  and  face,  closing  the  fingers,  (the  ram- 
mer of  the  rear  rank  man  grasing  the  right  shoulder  of 
the  man  of  the  same  file  in  front,)  tho  rammer  parallel  to 
the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  little  end  of  the  ram- 
mer opposite  to  the  first  pipe,  but  not  yet  inserted.  The 
eyes  fixed  on  that  pipe. 

226.  (  Third  motion.)  Insert  the  little  end,  and  with  the 
thumb,  which  willTollow  the  movement,  farce  it  as  low  as 
the  middle  band;  raise  quickly  the  right  hand  a  little 
bent,  place  the  little  finger  on  the  butt  of  the  rammer  and 
force  it  down,  at  the  same  instant  lower  the  left  hand  on 
the  barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  depressing 
the  shoulder.  '  • 

8.   Cast — About. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

227.  (  First  motion. )  Raise  the  pieco  with  the  left  hand 
along  the  left  side,  the  hand  at  the  hei^rht  of  the  chin,  the 
fore-arm  touching  the  piece,  the  bai'rel  to  the  front;  drop 
at  the  same  time  tho  right  hand  to  seize  the  piece  a  little 


rosmON    OF    THE    SOLDIER.  41 

above  tlie  pmall  of  tlic  stock,  the  fore-finger  touching  the 
lock,  the  thumb  on  the  S  plate,  and  bring  the  right  heel 
to  the  side  of  the  left. 

228.  (Second  iiio'ion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  rijht  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  the  right  foot 
behind  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left,  the  hollow  of  the 
right  foot  against  the  heel  of  the  left.  At  the  same  time 
seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand,  and  bring 
down  the  piece  with  both  hands  to  the  position  of  charge 
hayonet. 

9.  Phime. 

One  time  and  one  motion.  ♦ 

229.  Sustain  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  (half  cock  the 
piece,)  brush  ofl"  the  old  cap  and  with  the  thumb  and  first 
two  fingers  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  lirmly  on 
the  cone,  pushing  it  down  with  the  thumb. 

10.   Shoidder — AuMS. 
One  time  and  ttro  motions. 

230.  As  from  Charge— Bayontt.     Nos.  161,  162. 

To  Load  in  Four  Times. 

231.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  command 
Load  ;   the  three  others  at  the  words  tv-o,  three  and  four. 

Load  in  four  times— \jOkD. 

222.  Execute  w^hat  is  prescribed  for  Load,  Handle- 
Cartridge,  Tear — Cartridge  and  Charge — Cartridge. 

TWO. 

233.  Drato — Ramm'.r  and  Ram — Cartridge. 


42  POSITION    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

THREE. 

234.  Return — Rammer  and  Castr—  About. 

FOUR,. 

235.  Prime  and  Shonldar — Arms. 

To  Load  At  Will. 

236.  The  instructor  wishing  the  men  to  execute  the  load- 
ing without  pause,  will  command. 

Load  at  Will — Load. 

237.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  execute  the 
loading  as  in  four  times,  but  without  resting  on  the  times. 

Ready. 

One  time  and  four  motions. 

238.  {First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  place  at  the 
same  time  the  right  foot  behind,  and  at  right  angles  with 
the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right'foot  against  the  left  heel ; 
turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  outwards,  and 
seize  at  the  same  time  the  small  of  the  stock  wiWi  the  right 
hand,  the  piece  perpendicular,  and  detached  from  the 
shoulder;  leave  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

239.  {Second^motion.)  Bring  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  to  the  middle  of  the  body,  place  the  left  hand  just 
above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  stock  at  the 
height  of  the  chin,  the  S  plate  almost  turned  towards  the 
body,  the  rammer  obliquely  to  the  left  and  front. 

240.  (  Third  motion.)  Place  the  thumb  on  the  hammer, 
the  fore-tinger  under  and  on  the  guard,  the  other  three 
fingers  joined  to  the  first,  the  elbow  at  the  height  of  the 
wrist. 


POSITION    OF    THK   SOLDIKR.  43 

241.  (  Fourth  motion. )  Close  the  right  elbow  smartly  to 
the  body  in  cocking,  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the 
stock,  lot  it  descend  along  the  body  in  the  left  hand  to 
the  tail  bind,  which  will  remain  at  the  height  of  the 
shoulder,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  body. 

Aim. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

242.  Drop  smartly  the  muzzle,  the  left  hand  remaining 
at  the  tail  band,  support  the  butt  against  tkc  right  should- 
er, the  left  elbow  a  little  down,  shut  the  left  eye,  direct 
the  right  along  the  barrel,  drop  thr  head  upon  the  butt  to 
catch  the  object,  and  place  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger. 

243.  The  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  carry  the 
right  foot  about  eight  inches  towards  the  left  heel  of  the 
man  next  on  the  right. 

FiRB. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

244.  Apply  the  fore-fingor  with  force  to  the  trigger, 
without  further  lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain 
in  that  position. 

245.  The  instructor  wishing  the  men  to  load,  rom  this 
position,  will  command  : 

Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

246.  {First  motion. )  Bring  back  the  piece  quickly  with 
both  hands,  the  rear  rank  man  bringing  the  right  foot  be- 
side the  left;  depress  the  butt  strongly  by  extending  the 
right  arm,  and  carry  it  with  the  arm  thus  extended  to  the 
left  side,  the  barrel  turned  to  the  front,  and  opposite  the 


44  POSITION    OF    THE    SOLDIER. 

left  shoulder,  open  the  left  hand  to  let  the  piece  slide 
through  it  to  the  middle  hand,  the  back  of  the  hand  to 
the  front,  the  left  fore-arm  touching  the  stock  ;  at  the 
same  time  face  to  the  front,  and  cari'y  the  right  foot  for- 
ward, the  heel  against  the  hollow  of  the  left  foot. 

247.  {Second motion.)  Quit  the  hold  of  the  right  hand  ; 
with  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  middle  hand,  let  the 
piece  descend  to  the  ground,  without  shock,  and  take  the 
position  of  the  second  motion  of  the  first  time  of  loading. 

248.  The  men  being  in  the  position  of  Fire,  and  the  in- 
structor wishing  them  to  come  to  the  position  of  Shoulder 
— Arms,  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Aems. 

One  time  and  tico  motions. 

249.  (First  motion.)  Bring  back  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  face  to  the  front,  carry  the  piece  to  the  left  shoulder, 
the  right  hand  under  the  cock  in  the  position  as  prescribed 
in  No.  141,  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

250.  (Second  motion.)  Let  fall  smartly  the  right  hand 
into  position. 

251.  The  men  being  in  the  position  of  Aim,  if  the  in- 
structor wishes,  he  may  command  : 

Recover — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

252.  At  the  word  recover,  Avithdraw  the  finger  from  the 
trigger;  at  the  command  Arms,  thi-o^v  up  smartly  the 
muzzle,  and  re-take  the  position  of  tlie  fourth  motion  of 
ready. 

253.  The  men  being  in  the  position  of  rcacZv//  the  in- 
structor will  command; 


POSITION    OF    THE   SOLPIER.  45 

Shonliler — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

254.  At  the  word  ShoMcr,  face  to  the  front,  hv'ing  the 
piece  to  the  middle  of  the  bodj;  the  left  thumb  at  the 
height  of  the  chin,  the  piece  supported  by  the  left  hand, 
holding  it  fast  above  the  lock  ;.  next  place  the  righnhunib, 
on  the  head  of  the  cock,  support  tho  fore-linger  on  the 
trigger,  sustain  at  the  same  time  the  cock  in  its  descent 
till  it  nearly  touches  the  cone,  raise  the  cock  to  the  half 
cock  notch,  (the  reachino-  of  which  will  be  both  felt  and 
heard,)  and  seize  the  hamrlc  of  the  i>iece,  (or  small  of  the 
stock,.)  with  the  right  hand.  At  the  word  Armn,  carry 
the  pi.ece  smartly  to  tlic  shoulder,  and  re-take  the  position 
of  shoulder — arms. 

The  Firing. 

255.  The  firings  arc  direct  or  oblique,  and  \tili  be  exe- 
cuted as  follows : 

The  Direct  Fire. 

IftC.     For  the  direct  fire  the  instructor  will  command. 

1.  Fire   hrj   Spiad.      2.  Sqnad.     3.  Ready.     4.  Aim.     5. 

Fire.     6.  Load^ 

257.  These  several  commands  will  be  executed  as  Iras 
been  prescribed  in  the  Mannal  of  Arms. 

258.  At  the  fourth  command  they  will  aim  according  to 
the  rank  in  which  each  man  may  find  himself  placed,  the 
rear  rank  men  inclining  forward  a  little  tlie  upper  part  of 
the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may  reach  as  much 
bej-ond  tlie  front  rank  as  possible. 

259.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their  pieces 
and  return  immediately  to  the  position  of  ready. 


46  POSITION    OF    THG   SOLDIER. 

260.  The  instructor  Trill  re-commence  the  firing  by  the 
commands; 

1.  Squad.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

261.  When  the  instructor  wisnes  the  firing  to  cease,  he 
will  command ; 

Cease— Firing. 

262.  At  this  command  the  men  will  cease  firing,  hut  will 
load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and  afterwards  bring  them  to 
a  shoulder. 

The   Oblique  Fire. 

263.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the  right 
and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the  direct  fire,  with 
this  single  difference — the  command  Aim,  will  always  be 
preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or  left  oblique. 

Posiiion.  of  the  Ranks,  in  ihe  Oblique  Fire  to  the 

Right. 

264.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

265.  At  the  cautionary  command,  right  oblique,  the  two 
ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder  and  look  steadily 
at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

266.  At  the  command  Aim,  each  front  rank  man  will 
aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  his  feet ;  each  rear 
rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  eight  inches  to- 
wards the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his 
file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  par 
of  the  body  forward,  and  bending  a  little  the  left  knee. 

267.  At  the  command  load,  both  ranks  will  resume  the 
position  of  load,  in  the  fire  direct. 


POSITION    OP    THE    SOLS>Icn.  41 

Position  of  the  Ranks  in  the   Ohlique  Ffre  to  tke 
Left 

268.  At  the  command  left  ahliqne,  the  two  ranks  wil 
throw  back  tbe  left  shoulder,  and  look  tteadily  at  the  ob- 
ject to  be  hit 

269.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take  aim 
to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet;  each  man  in  the 
rear  r&nk  will  advance  the  right  foot  about  eight  inches 
towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right  of  his 
file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  inclining  the  upper  part  of 
the  body  forward,  and  bending  a  little  <be  right  knee. 

270.  At  the  command  load,  both  ranks  will  come  to  the 
position  of  load  as  prescribed  in  the  direct  lire. 

To  Fire  by  File, 

271.  The  fire  bj  file,  will  bo  executed  by  the  two  ranks, 
the  files  of  wliicb  will  fire  successively,  and  without  wait- 
ing on  each  other,  except  for  the  first  fire. 

272.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   Fire  by  file:      2.   Squad.      3.  Ready.     4.    Conwicnce — 
Firing. 

273.  At  tbe  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  tbe 
position  prescribed  in  tbe  direct  fire. 

274.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will 
aim  and  fire,  the  men  together,  the  rear  rank  man,  in  tak- 
ing aim,  will  carry  the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the 
right. 

275.  The  second  file  will  aim  at  the  instant  the  first 
brings  down  the  pieces  to  re-load ;  and  each  file  successive- 
ly on  to  the  left. 


-IS  rosi-TIOX    OF    TUB    SOi,DlEIl. 

276.  After  ?he  first  fire,  every  man  will  load  and  fire 
without  waiting  for  the  others. 

277.  The  instructor  wishing  the  Are  to  eease,  will  coiu- 
Qiand: 

Cease— FiuiNa. 

278.  At  this  command  the  men  will  cease  firing.  If  they 
have  fired,  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  biing  them  to 
a  shoulder  ;  if  at  the  position  of  ready,  they  wiH  half  cock 
and  shoulder-  arms.  It  in  the  position  of  Ami,  they  will 
bi'iHg  down  their  pieces,  half  cock  and  shoulder  arms- 

To  Fire  hy  Rank. 

■279.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  cntii"c 
rank,  alternately. 

280,  The  inst]'uctor  will  coraman-d  : 

1.  Fire  l>Tf  rank.     2.  Squad.     3.  Heady,     4.  Ecar  raulc 
5,  Aim-     6.  Fire,     7.  Load. 

281.  At  the  third  command,  both  ranks  Avili  take  the  po- 
sition of  ready. 

282,  At  the  seventh  comm.and,  th^^  rear  rank  will  load 
and  come  to  the  position  of  ready. 

283.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  shall  see  several  men  in 
the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  ho  will  command : 

1.  Front-rank.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire,     4.  Load, 

284.  At  these  commaads,  the  men  in  the  front  rank  v.- ill 
execute  what  has  been  presci'ib6,d  lor  the  rear  ra.nk,  but 
will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot. 

285,  The  instructor  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  the 
fire  from  rank  to  raAik,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to 
ceas',^,  whfii  he  will  command  cease  yirm^,  which  will  be 
e^iccuted  as  heretofore  prescribed. 


THE  COMPANY. 


PART  SECOND 
2'Ae  Formation  of  the  Company. 

286.  The  company  being  assembled  on  its  ground,  will 
be  formed  in  two  ranks,  b}'  the  first  serfjeant,  who  will 
command  :      * 

Fall  In. 

287.  At  which  command  the  rank  and  file,  (corporals 
jind  privates,)  will  form  in  two  ranks  faced  to  the  right, 
the  tallest  corporal  on  the,  right,  (or  head  of  the  com- 
pany,) the  two  tallest  men  next,  and  so  on  down  to  tho 
jcft  or  rear  of  the  rank. 

•288.  This  having  been  accomplii:»hed,  the  first  sergeant 
will  command  : 

•      FHONr. 

289.  At  this  command  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front;  the  command  Right — Dress,  will  then  be  given, 
which  will  be  executed  as'has  been  jirescribed ;  the  men 
keeping  their  etjes  right  until  the  command  front, 

290.  The  company  should  fall  in  at  a  support  arms,  and 
if  the  roll  is  called,  each  man  as  he  answi  rs  to  his  name, 
will  first  bring  his  jiiece  to  a  shoulder,  and  then  to  an  ojv 
der  ar}ni>. 

291.  This  being  done  the  fust  sergeant  will  bring  (^9 
company  to  a  shoulder,  and  command  ; 


ifjj  SCHOOL    or    THE    COMPAKJ'. 

292.  At  this  command  the  men  count  in  each  rank  from 
light  to  left,  pronouncing  in  aloud  and  distinct  voice,  in 
the  same  tone,  without  hurry,  and  without  turning  the 
head,  o«c,  two,  according  to  the  place  which  each  one 
«!ccupies. 

293.  He  will  then  divide  the  company  into  two  equal 
j^atoons,  and  each  plat6on  into  two  equal  sections,  place 
the  corporals  in  position  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  right 
and  left  of  platoons,  and  report  to  the  captain  the  forma- 

^  tion  of  the  company. 

294.  The  otficers  and  sergeants  will  now  take  their  posts 
a?  follows  : 

295.  The  captain  in  the  front  rank  on  the  rjght  of  the 
company,  touching  with  the  left  elbow. 

296.  The  Jirst  h'eM/enajii  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  opposite 
the  centre  of  the  fourth  section. 

297.  The  second  lieutenant  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  op- 
posite the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

298-  The  third  lieutenant  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  op- 
posite the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

299.  The  Jirst  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank  and  covering 
the  captain.  He  is  denominated  the  cohering  sergeant,  or 
right  guide  of  the  company. 

300.  The  second  sergeant  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  op- 
posite the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  company.  lie  is 
designated  as  left  guide  of  the  company. 

301.  The  third  sergeant  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  opposite 
the  second  file  from  the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

302.  The/('»r^A  sergeant  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  op- 
j.osite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

Z(iZ.  .T\\Q  fifth  sergeant  two  paces  in  rear  of  and  oppot^ite 
tlie  second  file  from  Ihc  right  of  the  tirrt  platoon. 


hCiiooL  Of  rut;  i     ipwr.  6G 

S04.  Absent  oflicers  an(Ksergeant3  will^be  re-placed  — 
officers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals.* 

305.  The  officers  and  sergeants  thus  posted  in  the  rear 
constitute  the  rank  of  closers.  This  rank  is  two  paces  ia 
rear  of  the  r^ar  rank.  • 

306.  The  pittneer  is  posted  on  the  line  of  file  closers  on 
the  right;  and  the  music  in  aline  with  the  front  rank, 
four  paces  on  its  right,  the  drum  on  the  right  of  the  tifer 
or  bugler. 

To  Open  Ranhs* 

3p7.  The  company  being  at  ordered  aims,  the  ranks  and 
,  tile  .closers  well  aligned,  to  open  ranks,  tl^e  instructor  will 
» command:  ».' 

1.   Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Shonlder-r-X'&yi^.     4.  Prt- 
pare  to  open  ranks.     5.    To  the  rear  open  order. 

308.  At  the  fourth  command  the  kft  guide  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank. 

309.  At  the  fifth  command  the  covering  sergeant  and 
the  left  guide  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces 
from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  alignment  of  the 
rear  rank. 

310.  The  instructor  having  observed  that  Uiese  two 
guides  are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  rank,  will  com- 
mand : 

G.  March. 

311.  At  this  command  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 


*When  the  captain  acts  as  instructor,  or  is  in  indepen- 
dent command  of  the  company,  the  first  lieutenant  takes 
his  post,  and  his  post  in  turn  is  filled  by  the  second  lieu- 
tenant, and  so  on. 


• 
-» 


S7  8CJI00L    OF   THK    COJfFAST. 

312.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear  without  count- 
ing the  step,  and  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  marked 
out  for  it.  "^ 

313.  The  covering  sergeant  will  then  align  the  rear 
rank  on  the  left  guide. 

314.  The  file  closers  will  step  off  at  the  same  time  with 
the  rear  rank,  and  place  themselves  two  paces  in  the  rear 
of  it  when  it  is  aligned. 

315.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  aligned,  will  com- 
mand: 

7.  FaoNT. 

316.  At  this  command  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
rear  rank,  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer.  ^- 

Jllignments  in  Open  Ranks. 

317.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in  the 
first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better  to 
iuculculate  the  principles. 

318.  To  effect  this  he  will  cause  two  men  on  the  right  or 
left  of  each  rank  to  march  two  or  three  paces  forward, 
and  after  having  aligned  them,  command  : 

By  file  right  (or  left) — Dkess. 

319.  This  command  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescri- 
bed. The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  men  to  align 
themselves  backward,  and  he  will  be  careful  to  observe 
^at  they  dress  correctly,  and  that  their  arms  are  in  proper 
position. 

Manudl  of  A^'ms. 

olQ.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will  place 


^ 


SCHOOL  or  XHK  COMPACT  6S 

himself  in  a  position  to  see  the  ranks,  and  will  command 
the  manual  of  arms  in  the  following  order  :* 

Present  Armi.  Shoulder  Anno, 

Order  Arms. 

dound  Arms. 

Raise  Arms.  Shoulder  Arms. 

Support  Arms.  Shoulder  Arms. 

Fix  Bayonet.  Shoulder  Arms. 

Charge  Bayonet.  Shoulder  Arms. 

Trail  Arms.  Shoulder  Arms. 

Unjix  Bayonet.  Shoulder  Arms, 

Secure  Arms,  Shoulder  ^rms. 

Load  in  ten  times. 

321.  To  close  the  ranks  after  the  execution  of  the 
manual  of  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Close  order.    2.  March. 

322.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  lank  will  close  up 
in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  his  file  leader. 

323.  The  company  should  be  exercised  in  the  manual  of 
arjns,  loading  at  will,  Jiring  by  Jile,  Jiving  by  rank,  and 
directjind  oblique  Jiring,  by  company  as  prescribed  in  the 
squad  drill,  the  instructor  substituting  the  word  company 
fcr  squad  w^hercver  it  occurs. 

324.  At  the  preparatory  command  in  firing,  the  captain 
will  promptly  place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  hia 
company,  and  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  o!  file  closers ; 

*The  compiler  would  suggest  to  officers  the  practica- 
bility of  causing  the  front  rank  to  about  face,  and  place 
themselves  at  one  end,  so  that  they  can  better  see  the  exe- 
cution of  the  movement  by  the  whole  company. 


69  SCHOOL    OF    IBB    COMPANY. 

the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place 
himself  opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general  for 
both  captain  and  covering  sergeant  in  all  the  different 
firings. 

To  Fire  hy  tJie  Rear  Rank. 

325.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be 
executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To  effect 
this  he  will  command  : 

\.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.    2.  Company.    Z.  Jlbout — Face. 

326.  At  the  first  command  the  captain  will  step  out  and 
place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of  his  com- 
pany;  the  covering  sergeant  and  file  closers,  will  pass 
quickly  through  the  captain's  interval,  and  place  them- 
selves faced  to  the  rear,  the  covering  sergeant  a  pace  be- 
hind the  captain,  and  the  file  closers  two  paces  fi^om  the 
front  rank  opposite  their  places  in  line,  each  passing  be- 
hind the  covering  sergeant. 

327.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the 
instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through  the 
interval,  the  company  will  face  about;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  in  his  interva,l  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become' 
the  front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the 
front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

328.  Faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  diflerent  firings  will  be 
executed  in  the  manner  already  prescribed. 

329.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the 
company,  now  become  the  right ;  and  in  the  fire  by  rank, 
the  firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank,  now  become 
the  rear. 


SCHOOL  IHS    COMHAHT.  « (-' 

330.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.   2.  Company.  3.  About — Face. 

331.  At  the  first  command  the  captain,  covering  ser- 
geant and  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  in 
Nos.  326,  327. 

332.  At  the  third  command  the  companj  having  faced 
about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  resume 
their  places  in  line. 

To  Advance  in  Line  of  Battle. 

333.  The  company  being  in  line  and  correctly  aligned,  to 
march  it  b}'-  the  front  the  instructor  will  cause  a  sergeant 
to  take  position  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  eaptain.  This 
advanced  sergeant,  who  is  charged  with  the  direction, 
will  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  to 
the  front  to  direct  his  course. 

334.  The  instructor  will  then  command  : 

1.   Company — Forward.     2.  March. 

335.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  step  off 
with  life.  The  directing  sergeant  will  observe  with  the 
greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step, 
marching  on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  ;  he  will  take  in 
succession,  and  a  little  before  arriving  at  the  points  near- 
est him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the  same  line 
with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces  from  each  othei-.  The  captain  will  march 
steadily  in  the  trace  of  the  directing  sergeant,  keeping  al- 
ways six  paces  from  him.  The  men  will  march  with  the 
li.'ad  direct  to  the  front,  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  captain,  and  resist  pres.-ure   coming-  from  the  opposite 


71  Si'HuOL    V¥    lUK    COMPANY, 

side.     The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  distance 
of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

336.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

To  </ie— Step. 

337.  At  this  the  men  will  glance  towards  the  directing 
sergeant,  re-take  the  step  from  him,  and  again  direct  the 
eyes  to  the  front. 

338.  The  instructor  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  -will 
command  ; 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt. 

339.  At  the  second  command  the  company  will  halt;  the 
directing  sergeant  will  remain  in  advance,  unless  ordered 
to  return  to  the  line  of  file  closers. 

340.  The  captain  will  then  rectify  the  alignment,  by  the 
commands  and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in 
No.  9. 

To  March  in  Retreat. 

341*  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly  aligned, 
to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  the  instructor  will  place  the 
directing  sergeant  sis  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file 
closers,  and  in  the  same  straigkt  line  with  the  covering 
sergeants,  and  will  then  command  : 

1.   Com-pany.     2.  About — Face. 

342.  The  company  and  directing  sergeant  having  faced 
to  the  rear,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.   Co/npan?/— Forward. 

343.  At  this  command  tho.  covering  sergeant  will  step 
into  the  line  of  file  closers,   opposite  to  his  inlerval.  and 


SCHOOL    or    THE    COMPANY.  72 

the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank  now  become 
the  front. 

344.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the  instruc- 
tor will  command : 

4,  March. 

345.  At  this  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain  and  the 
men  will  conform  themselves  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
in  No.  335. 

346.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  marching 
in  retreat,  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  marching  in  ad- 
vance; the  commands  and  the  means  of  execution  will  be 
the  same. 

Ohllqi\e  March  in  Line  of  Buttle. 

347.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  RigJit  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

848.  At  the  command  march  the  company  will  take  the 
oblique  step,  and  execute  the  movement  as  prescribed  in 
No.  53. 

349.  In  the  oblique  march  the  men  not  having  the  touch 
of  elbows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side  to  which 
the  oblique  is  maae,  without  any  indication  to  that  effect 
being  given,  and  when  the  direct  march  is  resumed,  the 
guide  will  be,  equally  without  indication,  on  the  side  where 
it  was  previous  to  the  march. 

350.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  direct  march  to 
be  resumed,  he  will  command  . 

1.  Forvnrd.     2.  March. 


73  SCHOOL  OF  THB  COMPANT. 

351.  At  the  command  march  the  company  will  resume 
the  direct  step.      '^ 

352.  The  instructor  should  now  exercise  the  company  in 
the  following  commands^  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  squad  drill : 

1.  Mark   Time.  2.  Mabch. 

1.  For  tear  d.  2.  March. 

1.  Common  Time.  2.  March. 

1.  Double  Quick,  2.  March. 

1.  Quick  Time.  2.  March. 

1.  Change  Step.  2.  March. 

1.  Right  About.  2.  Ma  ich. 

1.  liight  About.  2.  Halt. 

353.  When  the  company  is  inarching  in  the  double  quick, 
the  pieces  should  be  carried  at  a  right  shoulder  shift  arms 
or  a  trail  arms,  and  the  distance  between  the  ranks  should 
be  twenty-six  inches. 

354.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right  shoulder, 
in  quick  time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks  should  be 
sixteen  inches. 

355.  Whenever  the  company  is  halted,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  command 
halt;  and  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  to  its  proper  distance 
of  thirteen  inches.      These  rules  are  general. 

To  March  hy  the  Flanh. 

356.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a  halt, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the 
right  flank,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Company  right — Face.     2.  Forward — March. 

3a7.  At  th»  first  command,  the  company  willfacsr  to  th« 


SOBOOL    or    XJiK    (.'0H1«1.N"Y.  (4 

right,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  at  the  bead 
of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having  stepped  out  for  the 
purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself  by  the  side  of  the  ser- 
geant, and  on  his  left ;  the  front  rank  will  dot  ble  as  is 
prescribed  in  Xo.  77  ;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time, 
side  step  to  the  right  one  pace,  and  double  i»  the  same 
manner  so  that  when  the  movement  is  completed,  the  files 
will  be  formed  of  four  rnen  aligned,  and  elbow  to  elbow. 
The  intervals  will  be  preserved. 

358.  The  file  closers  will  also  juove  by  side  step  to  the 
right,  so  tha»  when  the  ranks  are  formed,  thej  will  be  two 
paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

359.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move  oflf 
briskly  in  quick  time  ;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head 
of  the  front  rank,  and  the  captain  on  his  left,  will  march 
straight  forward.  The  men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast 
of  their  respective  front  lank  men,  heads  direct  to  the 
front ;  the  file  closers  will  march  opposite  their  places  in 
line  of  battle. 

360.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  loft  flank 
to  be  excuted  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for 
right;  the  ranks  will  double  as  has  been  prescribed  in 
No.  83,  the  rear  rank  will  side  step  to  the  left  one  pace 
before  ioubling. 

361.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the 
left-guide  will  place  himself  at  the  hsad  of  the  front  rank; 
the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  left,  and  place  hiniself 
by  the  right  side  of  this  guide;  the  covering  sergeant  will 
replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank,  the  moment  the 
latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 

362.  Should   the    instructor  wish  to  face  the  company 


75  scuoot  or  thb  compast. 

to  the  right  or  left,  without  doubling  files,  be  will  com- 
mand : 

Compani/,  in  two  ranks,  right  (or  left) — Face. 

362.  At  which  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
right  or  left,  without  doubling. 

To  Change  Direction  hj  File. 

263.  The  company  being  facod  by  .he  flank,  and  either 
in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  command  : 

1.   By  file  left  {or  right.)     2.  March. 

365.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  wheel ; 
if  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take 
care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  describ  e  a  short  arc  of  a  cir- 
cle, shortening  a  little  the  first  five  or  si*  steps  in  order  to 
give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of  this  file  to  conform  himself 
to  this  movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear 
rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of  twenty- 
eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to 
the  movement  by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  as  has 
been  explained. 

3^6.  Each  file  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground 
when  that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

367.  When  the  company  is  marching  by  the  flank  and 
the  instructor  wishes  to  halt  it  and  face  it  to  the  front,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

368.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  No.  81,  82,  83.  As  soon  as  the  files 
have  undoubled,  the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  dis' 
lance. 


SBnOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  '  7$ 

369.  The  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  as  well  as  the 
left  guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return  to 
their  habitual  places  in  line  at  Uie  instant  the  company 
faces  to  the  front. 

370.  The  instructor  may  then  rectifiy  the  alignment  hw 
the  means  prescribed. 

371.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form 
it  on  the  right  (or  left)  by  file  into  line  of  battle,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.    On  tJie  right,  bi/ file  into  line.     2.  March, 
:^72.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men  doubled, 
will  mark  time,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will 
turn  to  the  right,  march  straight  forward,  and  be  halted 
hy   the  instructor,    when   they  shall  have  passed  at  least 
six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  tile  closers  ;  the  captain  will 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  will  direct 
the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the  front  ranfc  successively 
arrive ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  behind 
the  captain  at  the  dis'anee  of  the  rear  rank;  the  two  men 
on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to 
march,  and  passing  beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and  the 
captain,  will  turn  to  theright,-  after  turning,  they  wili 
continue  to  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  themselves 
toward  the  line- of  battle,  but  ^vhen  they  shall  arrive  at 
two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number  will  shcrtcn  the 
step  so  that  the  odd  number  may  precede  him  on  the  line, 
the  odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and  on  the 
left  of  the  captain  ;  the  even  number  will  afterwards  ob- 
lique to  the  loft,  and  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd 
number;  the  next  two  men  of  the  front  rank  doubled. 


7^  .SLUOOL  Of  IHK  DOM  PAS  r, 

will  i^ass  in  the  same  manner  behind  the  two  first,  turn 
then  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves  according  to  the 
means  just  explained,  to  the  left  and  by  the  side  of  the 
two  men  already  established  on  the  line  of  battle ;  the  re- 
maining files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be 
formed  to  the  left  in  the  same  manner. 

373.  The  i-ear  rank  doubled  will  execute  the  movement 
in  the  manner  already  explained  for  the  front  rank,  taki-ng 
care  not  to  commence  the  movement  until  four  men  of  the 
front  rank  are  established  on  the  line ;  the  rear  rank  men 
as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  accurately  their  file 
leaders. 

374.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank,  and 
the  instructor  wishes  to  cause  it  to  form  by  file  on  the  left 
into  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  r 

1.   On  the  left,  hy  file  into  line.     2.  March. 

375.  At  the  second  command,  the  same  movements  will 
be  made  to  the  left ;  in  this  case  the  odd  numbers  wilf 
shorten  the*  step,  so  that  the  even  numbers  may 
precede  them  on  the  line.  The  captain,  placed  on  the  left 
of  the  front  rank,  and  the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their 
places  in  line  of  battle,  by  order  of  the  instructor,  after 
the  corapany  shall  be  formed  and  aligned. 

376.  The  instructor  should  at  first  cause  this  movement 
to  be  executed  separatelj^  by  each  rank  doubled,  and  after- 
wards by  the  two  ranks  united  and  doubled.  He  should 
also  place  himself  on  the  line  cf  battle,  and  without  the 
point  where  the  right  or  left  is  to  rest,  in  order  to  estab- 
lish the  base  of  alignment,  and  afterward  will  assure  him- 
self that  each  file  conforms  itself  to  what  has  just  been 
5)rosLcrihcd. 


377.  If  the  company  be  marchipg  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  undouble  the  files,  whick 
inight  sometimes  be  found  necessary,  he  will  cause  arms  to 
OQ  shouldered  or  supported,  and  command  : 

1.  In  I  ICO  ranks,  undouhle  files.     2.  March. 

^78.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers  will 
shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left  will  place  them- 
selves promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers;  the  rear  rank 
will  gain  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  retake  the  touch  of 
elbows  on  tJie  side  of  the  front  rank. 

;;7y.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  loft  flank.,  it 
u-ill  be  the  evoa  numbers  who  will  ci^ntinuc  to  march  for- 
ward, and  the  odd  numbers  who  will  undouble. 

380.  If  the  iustiuctor  should  wish  to  double  the  files,  he 
will  command  : 

],   In  four  ranks,  doiihle  fUn^     2.   Maiich. 
■m.  At  the  command  mavdi,  the  files  will  double  in  the 
iuanner  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces  bv  the  ric^hi 
or  left  flank.  '  " 

382.  The  instructor  should  also  cause  these  movement 
to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time. 

Movements  in   Column. 
383    The  company  being  in  n^.arch  bj  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  wishing  to  form  into  line,  mil  command, 
1.  %  compaay  into  line.     2.   March. 
384.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering-sergeant  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward  ,•  the  men  will  ad.anc. 
th.  nght  shoulder,  take  the  double  quick  step,  and  moT. 


70  SCHOOL    or    THE    COilfAAT. 

into  line  by  the  shortest  route,  taking  care  to  uadowbie 
the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line  one  after  the  other. 

385.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  into  line 
with  the  covering  sergeant,  thej  will  take  from  him  the 
step,  and  then  turn  their  ejos  to  the  front. 

386.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  move- 
ments of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  without  endea- 
Toring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same  time  with  the  latter. 

387.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  instructor 
will  face  the  company  and  observe  the  execution  ;  and  as 
soon  as  the  company  is  formed,  he  Mill  command,  guideJeft. 

388.  At  the  cemmand  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant 
will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left,^ 
lo  serve  as  guide,  and  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the 
opposite  flank,  will  remain  there. 

389.  When  the  company  is  in  march  by  the  left  flank, 
this  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  the  same  commands.  The  company  being 
formed,  the  captain  will  command,  guide  right  ;.  the  cover- 
ing sergeant,  who  is  on  right  of  the  front  rank,  will 
serve  as  guide,  and  the  second  sergeant  placed  on  the  left 
flank  will  remain  there.  * 

390.  Thus  in  column  by  C()mp.any,  right  or  left  in  front, 
the  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  of  each 
company,  will  always  be  placed  on  the  right  and  left,  re- 
spectively, of  the  front  rank,  and  they  will  be  denominat- 
ed right  guide  and  left  guido,  and  the  one  or  the  other 
charged  with  the  direction. 

391.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  and  the 
instructor  wishing  to  form  platoons,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  jjlaioon  into  line,     2.  3Iakcii. 


SCnOOi.    OF    THE    CUMPANT.  80 

392.  This  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon 
according  to  the  above  principles.  The  captain  will  prompt- 
ly place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
the  first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the  second,  and 
command,  without  waiting  for  each  other — guide  left  (or 
right)  as  soon  as  the  platoons  are  formed. 

393.  At  the  command,  guide  left  {or  right),  the  guide  of 
each  platoon  will  pass  rapidlj-  to  the  flank  indicated,  if 
not  already  tb«ro. 

394.  The  right  guido  of  the  company  will  always  serve 
39  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve,  in  like  manner, 
as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 

395.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  platoon,  there  will  be  but  one 
guide  to  each  platoon,  and  he  will  always  be  placed  on  the 
jeft  flank,  if  the  right  is  in  front,  and  on  the  right  flank  if 
the  left  is  in  front. 

396.  In  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will  follow  the 
platoons  to  which  they  are  attached. 

397.  The  instructor  should  exercise  the  company  in  pas- 
sing, without  a  halt,  from  the  march  to  the  front  to  the 
march  by  the  flank,  and  reciprocally,  and  in  either  case  he 
will  command. 

1.  Company  by  the  right  (or  left)  fiotk.     2.  March 

398.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right  or  left,  as  is  prescribed  in  No.  88,  and  the  cap- 
tain,  file  closers  and  guides  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  each,  in  the  march  by  the 
flank,  or  the  front, 

^99,  If  after  facing  to  the  right  or  lefi.  ia- niarrhing,  th";- 


SI  SCHOOL    tf?    THfci    COMPASr. 

company  find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  captarn 
"svill  place  hiinstdf  two  paces  behind  the  centre  of  the  front 
lank,  now  tiio  rear,  the  guides  vs ill  pass  to  the  rear  rank, 
now  leadinfj,  and  the  file  closers  will  march  in  front  of  this 
rank. 

400.  Wlien  the  company  i.s  marching  in  column  by  pla- 
toon, right  in  front,  and  the  instructor  wishes  to  march  it 
by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Column,  hy  the  right  jlank.     2,  By  file  left.     3.  March, 

401.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  platoon  and 
its  guide,  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  right  flank,  to  conduct  it. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  will  face  to 
the  right  in  marching,  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  then 
march  straight  forward  ;  the  leading  file  of  the  second  pla- 
toon will  unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  first ,  the  chief  and 
guide  of  the  second  will  pass  through  the  interval  to  their 
places  as  file  closers. 

403.  When  the  left  is  in  front,  the  movement  wili  be 
executed  by  inverse  means,  substituting  in  the  command, 
lefi  fov  ricjh',  and  rif/ht  fov  left.  The  captain,  (if  a  hall 
he  will  not  irumediately  commanded),  will  replace  the  first 
lieutenant  and  conduct  the  left  flank,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  wili  return  to  his  place  on  the  right  fl  ink  now  be. 
come  the  rear. 

404.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  the 
Instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by  pLitoon  to 
,the  right,  will  command  t 

1.  l',y  lAatoon,  right  u-heel.     2.  MaRch. 

403,  At  th.3  first  command,  the  chiefa  of  platoon  will 
rapidly  pluc'-j    ihemselves  two   paces  before  tha  centre*   •( 


their  respectire  platoons,  the  lieutenant  parsing  around 
The  left  of  the  company.  Ther  need  not  occupy  theni- 
i-elves  with  dressing  one  upon  the  other.  The  coveriug^ 
sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front  rank. 

406-  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank  man 
of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  covering  ser- 
geant standing  fast ;  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  movo 
quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyond  the  point  at 
which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when  the  wheel  shall 
be  completed,  face  to  the  late  rear,  and  place  himself  so 
that  the  line  wljich  he  forms  with  the  msn  on  the  right 
(who  had  faced)  shall  be  perpendicular  to  that  occupied  by 
the  coiupan}'  in  line  of  battle;  each  platoon  will  wheel  ac 
cording  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  tho  wheel  on  a 
fixed  pivot,  and  when  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching 
flank  shall  approach  near  to  the  peri>endicul!ir,  its  chief 
will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

407.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  hv  given  at  the 
instant  the'  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall 
have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpondicular,  the 
platoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move  to  the 
point  where  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  is  to  rest,  passing 
b}'  the  front  rank  ;  the  second  -«ergeaut  will  place  himser 
in  like  manner,  in  regard  to  the  second  platoon.  Each 
will  take  care  to  leave  between  himself  and  tho  man  on  the 
right  of  his  platoon,  a  space  equal  to  its  front ;  the  cap- 
tain and  first  lieutenant  will  look  to  this,  .and  each  take 
care  to  align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  af 
the  platmm  who  had  faced  to  the  right. 


83  SCHOOL    or    THH    COilPAXt, 

408.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  established 
on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place  himself  two 
paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  facing  towards  him,  will 
command  : 

409.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  platoon 
will  command  Fuoxr,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before 
its  centre. 

410.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the 
movements  of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving  always 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

411.  Should  the  instructor  wish  to  break  by  platoon  to 
the  left,  he  will  execute  it  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means,  and  will  give  the  following  com- 
mands : 

1.  Bi/ platoon  left  wheel.   2.  MARCH.   3.  Platoon.  4.  Halt. 
5.  Right — Dress.     6.  FROiJT. 

Post  of  Officers  in   Column. 

412.  In  column  hy  company  the  captain  is  two  paces  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  his  company  ;  the  first  sergeant  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank,  and  is  the  right  guide  of  the 
company ;  the  second  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front 
rank,  and  is  the  left  guide  of  the  company. 

413.  In  cohimn  by  platoon  the  captain  commands  the 
first  platoon,  the  first  lieutenant  the  second  platoon  ;  each 
two  paces  in  front  of  the  certre  of  his  platoon;  the  first 
sergeant  is  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  ;  the  second  ser- 
geant is  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  ;  they  will  be,  un- 
less otherwise  ordered,  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of 
their  respective  platoons,  if  the  column  is  right  in  front, 
aoi  oa  th2  ri^^bt,  if  tb?  left  is  in  front. 


kMiiiDl.    OF    THE    COMPANT,  64 

414.  In  column  by  section  the  captain  commands  the 
first  section ;  the  first  lieutenant  the  third;  the  second 
lieutenant  the  second  ;  the  third  lieutenant  the  fourth  ; 
each  two  paces  in  front  of  his  section  ;  the  first  sergeant 
is  guide  of  the  first  section,  the  second  sergeant  is  guide  of 
the  fourth ;  the  third  is  guide  of  the  third  ;  and  the 
fourth  is  guide  of  the  second  ;  each  on  the  left  front  rank 
of  his  section,  if  the  column  be  right  in  front,  and  on  the 
right  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

415.  In  column  b}'  company,  platoon  or  section,  the  file 
closers  not  otherwise  provided  for,  are  in  their  proper 
places  behind  the  rear  rank  of  their  respeotire  sub-divi- 
sions. 

To  March  in  Column. 

316.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right  (or 
left)  in  front,  the  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  column 
to  march,  will  command  : 

1.   Column  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right.)     3.  March. 

417.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  th*^  whole  will  step  ofi"  together. 

418.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his 
neighbor  toward  the  guide,  and  conform  himself  to  the 
principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  squad. 

419.  The  man  next  to  the  guide,  in  each  platoon,  will 
take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and  also  to  march  always 
about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or  left)  from  him,  in  order 
not  to  push  him  out  of  the  directiofl. 

420.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  maintain 
the  direction  of  his  match  by  means  prescribed  in  No.  335. 


>?5  «t'HOUl,    OP     lUK    t'CJilPASy. 

421.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  leading  one,  preserving  between  the  latter  and  him- 
self a  distance  precisely  equal  to  the  front  of  his  platoon, 
and  inarching  in  the  same  step  with  the  leading  guide. 

422.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from  the 
one  leading  (which  can  only  happen  by  his  own  fault,)  he 
will  correct  himstlf  by  slightly  lengthening  oi^shortening 
a  few  steps,  in  order  that  there  may  not  be  sudden  quicken- 
ings  or  slackenings  in  the  march  of  his  platoon. 

423.  The  guide  of  each  sub-division  in  column  will  be 
responsible  for  the  direction,  distance  and  step. 

424.  The  chief  of  each  sub-division,  will  be  responsible 
for  the  order  and  conformity  of  his  sub-division  with  the 
movements  of  the  guide,  accordingly  the  chief  will  fre- 
quently turn,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  sub-division. 

425.  In  column  the  chiefs  »f  sub-divisions  will  always 
repeat,  with  the  greatest  promptitude,  the  commands 
march  and  halt;  they  will  give  no  other  command  given  by 
the  instructor,  but  may  explain,  if  necer.sary,  to  their  sub- 
divisions, in  an  under  tone,  what  they  will  have  to  exe- 
cute, as  indicated  by  the  commands  of  caution. 

To   Change  D'rection. 

426.  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while  march- 
ing, will  be  executed  according  to  the  pi-inciples  prescri- 
bed for  wheeling  on  the  march.  Whenever,  therefore,  the 
direction  of  the  column  is  to  be  changed,  the  instructor 
will  change  the  guide^  if  not  already  there,  to  the  flank 
opposite  the  side  to  which  the  change  is  to  be  made. 

427.  The  column  being  in  march  i-ight  in  front,  if  it  be 
the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change*  direction  to  the  right, 


*       SCHOOL    OF  IHB  COMPAN  V.  86 

he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
immediately  go  himself  or  send  a  marker  to  tlie  point  at 
which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made ;  the  instruc- 
tor or  marker  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that  flank  of  the 
column. 

428.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  hia  march  on  that 
person,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just  graze  hia 
breast.  "When  the  leading  guide  shall  have  approached 
near  the  marker,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  cemmand: 

1.  Eight  icheel.     2,  March. 

429.  The  first  command  will  be  given,  when  the  platoon 
is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the  marker. 

430.  At  the  com  in  and  march,  which  will  be  pronounced 
at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arriveH  opposite  the 
marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  squad. 

431.  The  wheel  being  almost  completed,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

3.  Forward. 

432.  And  when  the  wheel  is  finished,  he  will  command  : 

4.  March. 

433.  At  which  the  platoon  will  march  straight  forward 
in  the  new  direction. 

434.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight 
forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to  the 
riffht,  ai'd  i-e-take  the  direct  march  b}-  the  same  commands 
and  the  same  means  which  governed  the  first  platoon. 

435.  Should  the  instructor  wish  to  change  the  direction 
to  the  l.eft.  Via  will    command  rfuid'!  right.     At   lhi«  covi^- 


87  SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY. 

mand  the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of 
their  respective  platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  sub- 
division ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 
right ;  the  instructor  conforming  to  what  has  been  pres- 
cribed. 

436.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  change 
ol  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 

437.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the  in- 
structor will  command,  guide  left. 

438.  The  change  of  direction  in  a  column  left  in  front, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

439.  Each  chief  will  observe  that  his  subdivision  arrives 
at  the  point  of  change  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direc- 
tion; with  this  view,  he  will  face  to  his  subdivision  when 
the  one  wWch  precedes  has  commenced  to  turn  or  to 
wheel,  and  he  will  be  watchful  that  it  continues  to  march 
squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the  point  where  the  change  of 
direction  is  to  cpmmence. 

To  halt  the  column  and  to  form  to  the  right  or 
left  into  line,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the  march. 

440.  The  column  being  in  march,  right  in  front,  to  halt 
it  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1   Cohimn — 2  Halt. 

441.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoons,  the  column  will  halt;  the  guides  also 
will  stand  fast,  although  they  C'^ay  have  lost  both  distance 
and  direction. 

442.  The  instructor  wishiHg  to  lorm  ii  into  line  will 
place  himself  at  platoon   distance  in  frent  of  the  leading 


StllOOL    OF    rUR    COMPANT.  Sft 

guide,  face  to  him  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position 
of  the  guide  beyond  J  which  being  executed  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Left — Dress. 

443.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place  himself 
briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide  and  direct  the 
alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direction 
of  the  column. 

444.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  com- 
mand Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in  the  column. 

445.  The  instructor  having  seen  this  disposition  made, 
will  command  : 

1.   Left  i)ito  line,  wheel.     2.  March. 

446.  At  the  command  inarch,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  p  atoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  tlie  left,  and  place  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  arm  of  the  guid  -  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast ; 
the  platoons  will  then  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principles  of 
wheels  from  a  halt. 

447.  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon  to  observe  its 
movements,  and  wht?n  the  marching  flank  of  his  platoon 
is  three  paces  from  the  line,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

448.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  halted  it, 
will  return  to  his  place  as  file  closer,  passing  Iround  the 
left  of  his  subdivision. 

449.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  j^oint  at  which  the  rig^t  of  the  com- 
pany will  revt  in  lino  of  battle,  und  command ; 


*J1  «CHt)Cr.    <1P    lUli    COMBANY. 

Right.     Dress. 

450.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on 
the  alignment. 

451.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand : 

Front. 

452.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of  battle* 
will  command: 

Guides.     Posts. 

453.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as 
file  closer. 

453.  If  the  column  be  left  in  frorjt,  and  the  instructor 
wishes  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  it  will 
be  d»ne  upon  the  same  principals  and  bv  inverse  means. — 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into   line  wheel.     2,   March. 

454.  At  the  command  mar^'h,  the  front  rank  man  on 
the  right  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the 
guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  each  platoon  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief, 
when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of 
battle  ;  for  this  purpose  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

455.  The  pl^oon  having  halted,  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  will  return  to  hia  place  as  file  closer,  and  the  cap- 
tain will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the 
company  is  to  rest?  and  command  ;  * 


SCHOOL    OF    THE    COMPANY.  90 

Ze/V.     Dress. 

456.  At  the  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on 
the  alignment;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon, 
opposite  the  instructor,  will  place  his  breast  lightly  against 
the  right  arm  of  this  oflicer,  and  the  captain  will  direct 
the  alignment  from  the  left  on  the  man  on  the  opposite 
flank  of  the  company. 

457.  The  company  being  aligned  the  captain  will  com- 
mand: 

Front. 

458.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of  battle» 
will  command  : 

Guides.    Posts. 

459.  At  the  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the 
right  of  his  company,  the  coyering  sergeant  will  cover 
him,  ana  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  file  closer. 

460.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halt- 
ing the  column,  he  will  give  the  command  prescribed  in 
No.  444,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance  in  front  of 
the  leading  guides.  _ 

461.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt  short,  the  in- 
structor, the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  platoons  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed  in  No.  445. 

462.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  the  forma- 
tion will  be  made,  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inveise  means. 

463.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  to  form 
it  into  line  without  halting,  and  to  march  the  company  in 
line  to  the  front,  the  command  is  : 


SI  SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPAKT. 

1,  By  lilatQonSfleft  wTitel.     2.  March. 

464.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the 
chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt;  the  man  next 
to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark  time;  the 
platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left ;  conforming  to  the  princi- 
ples of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

465.  When  the  right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near 
the  line  of  battle,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right  (or  left.) 

466.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  the  instant  the 
wheel  is  completed,  the  company  will  move  promptly 
together,  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
the  covBring  sergeant  and  the  left  guide  will  take  their 
positions  as  in  line  of  battle. 

467  At  the  fifth  command,  to  be  given  immediitely 
after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  if  not 
already  there,  will  move  briskly  to  the  side  on  which  the 
guide  is  designated. 

468.  The  same  principals  are  applicable  to  a  column 
left  in  front. 

To  break  tke  company  into  platoons. 

469.  The  company  marching  right  in  front  and  suppos 
ed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  to  cause  it  to  break  by  pla. 
toon,   the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Break  into  platoons.     2.  March. 

470.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  place  him- 
self before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon  and  give  the 
caution:  1.  First -platoon.  2.  Forward;  the  first  lieu- 
tenant will  pass  quickly   around   the  left  to   the  centre  o*^ 


SCHOOL    OF    TSB    COyTAYT.  92 

hifl  plato«n  and  give  the  cautioH.     1.  iSnond  platoon.    2, 
Mark  time. 

471.  At  the  command  march,  promptlr  repeated  bv  the 
captain  and  first  lieutenant,  the  first  platoon  will  continue 
to  march  straight  forward. — the  covering  sergeant,  as 
joon  as  the  flank  is  disengaged  will  5hift  to  the  left  fiank  of 
this  platoon;  the  second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time 
and  its  chief  will  immediatel.y  add  1.  Right  ohliqxie.  2. 
March.  The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that  this 
platoon  may  commence  tobliquing  the  instant  the  rear 
rank  of  the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed. 

472.  The  men  will.shorten  the  step  in  (/bliqing,  so  that 
when  the  command  forioard  march  is  given,  the  platoon 
may  have  its  exact  distance. 

473.  The  guide  of  the  second  plato»n  being  near  the.  di- 
rection of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second 
will  command  Forward,  and  add  March  the  instant  that 
the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

474.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will  break 
into  platoons  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  first  pla- 
toon all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  the  second  and  reci- 
procally. 

475.  In  this  case,  the  left'  guide  of  the  company  will 
shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  reform  the  compcniy. 

476.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right  in 
front  and  the  instructor  wishing  to  form  it  into  company 
will  command  : 

1.   Form  company,     2,  Mabch. 


93  scnoOL  OF  the  compakt. 

477.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  give  ths 
caution,  1.  Firnt  platoon;  2.  Right  oblique;  the  first 
lieutenant  will  give  the  caution.  1.  Second  platoon.  2. 
Foricard. 

478.  At  the  command  march,  promptlj  repeated  by  tha 
captain  and  first  lieutenant,  the  first  platoon  will  obligue 
to  the  right  in  order  to  unmask  the  second — the  covering 
sergeant  will  return  to  the  right  of  the  company,  and  the 
second  will  continue  to  inarch  straight  forward. 

479.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  unmasked 
the  second,  the  captain  will  command  :  Mark  time,  and 
at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall  be  complete,  he 
will  add  :  2.  March.  The  first  platoon  will  then  cease  t<> 
oblique,  and  will  mark  time. 

480.  In  the  meantime  the  second  platoon  will  have  con- 
tinued to  march  straight  forward,  and  when  it  shall  be 
nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain  will  command,  for- 
toarc?,  and  at  the  instant  the  t^vo  platoons  unite,  he  will 
add,  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  mark 
time,  the  whole  company  stepping  ofl:'  together. 

481.  In  a  column  left  in  front,  the  same  movements  will 
be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon  giving  the  command,  foricard,  and  the  captain 
adding  the  command  March,  when  the  platoons  are  united. 

482.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will 
pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoon  begins  to  ob- 
lique^ the  guide  of  the  first,  on  its  right,  remaining  on 
that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

Being  in  column,  to  break  files  to  the  rear^  and 

to  cause  (hem  to  re-enter  into  line. 


tCnutjU    tiK    TJIH    (;(.iVPA!<V.  SI 

483.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  constituting^ 
part  of  a  column,  rigbt  in  front,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.    Tuo  files  from   left  (o  rear.     2,  Maiich. 

484.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  on  the 
left  of  the- company  will  mark  time,  the  others  will  con 
tinue  to  march  straitforvvard  ;  the  two  rear  rank  men  of 
the  files  will,  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the  company 
shall  clear  them,  move  to  the  right  by  advancing  the  outer 
shoulder;  the  odd  number  will  place  himself  behind  the 
third  file  from  that  flank,  the  even  number  behind 
the  fourth,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  num- 
ber^  the  two  front  rank  men  will,  in  like  manner,  move  lo 
the  right  when  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear 
them,  the  odd  number  tvill  place  himself  behind  the  first 
file,  the  eren  number  behind  the  second  file,  passing  for 
this  purpose  behind  the  odd  number. 

485.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  already  broken, 
advancing  a  little  the  outer  shoulder,  will  gain  the  spac^e 
of  t\vo  files  to  the  right,  shortening  «t  the  same  time,  the 
step,  in  order  to  make  room  between  themselves  and  the 
rear  rank  of  the  company  for  the  files  last  ordered  to  the 
rear;  the  latter  will  break  by  the  same  commands  and  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  first.  The  men  who  double  should 
increase  the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent  dis- 
tances being  lost. 

486;  Should  the  instructor  wish  to  break  files  from  the 
right,  he  will  command  : 

1.    Twojiles  from  right  to  rear.     Maiich. 

487.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  now  move  to 
the  left,  advanciiiff  the  outer  shoulder,  thcpvi-n  number  of 


95  sCniOOL    OF    THE    COlIfANY. 

the  rear  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the 
odd  number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth  ;  the  eren 
number  of  the  h-ont  rank  behind  the  second,  the  odd  num- 
ber for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the  even  numbers. 

489.  When  the  front  of  the  company  is  thus  dirainifhed 
by  breaking  off  successive  groups  of  two  files,  the  rear  files 
must  always  be  broken  from  the  same  side. 

490.  If  the  instructor  wish  the  files  broken  ofl'  to  return 
into  line,  he  will  command  : 

1.   I'lco  files  into  line.     Makch. 

490.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  ten  files  of  those 
marching  by  the  flank,  will  return  brisklj-  into  line,  as  the 
others  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  by  advancing  the 
Inner  shoulder  towards  the  flank  to  which  they  belong. 

491.  On  the  same  principals  any  number  of  files  may 
be  broken  ofif  togher,  in  which  case  the  command  will  be  ; 
I.  Four  or  six  files  from  left  {or  right)  to  rear.     2.  Mauch. 

On  the  same  principals  any  number  of  files  jnay  be  bro- 
ken ofi' together,  in  which  case  the  command  will  be  r 
1,  Fiyur  or  six  files  into  line.     2.  Mabch, 

493.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  rear,  the  guide 
on  that  flank  will  gradually  clase  on  the  nearest  front  rank 
man  remaining  in  line,  and  he  will  also  open  out  to 
make  roomfBr  files  ordered  into  line. 

494.  Whenever  there  is  on  the  right  or  left  of  a  subdi- 
vision, a  file  which  does  not  belong  to  a  group,  it  will  be 
broken  off  and  bi'ought  into  line  singly. 

The   Coulumn  in  Rout^. 

495.  The  r'ompany   boino;  in  march,    and  supposed  to 


"•  £CHOOI.    OF    THE    POMPA.VT,  'SJ 

<'on3titute  a  part  of  a  eoluinn,   if  the  in3tructor  wish  io 
tnarch  it  in  the  route  step,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Botite  step,     2.  'SIkv.cu. 

496.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  the  captain, 
the  front  rank  will  continue  the  step  of  twentj-eight  inch- 
es, the  rear  rank  wiil  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the 
step,  the  distance  of  tvrenty-eipht  inches  from  tlic  front 
rank,  which  distance  will  be  computed  from  the  breast  of 
Ibbe  man  io  the  rear  rank  to  tho  knapeack  of  the  maa  in  the 
front  rank. 

497.  The  men  without  further  command,  will  immediate^ 
ly  carry  their  arms  at  will,  ^.s  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  tlie  squad.  They  will  no  longer  be  required  to 
inarch  in  the  cadence  step,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  re- 
main  silent. 

498.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  its  front 
may  be  diminished  by  breaking  ipto  piatoons  or  sections, 
't)y  the  same  G.^mro^^nds,  and  by  the  same  means  as  if  the 
poinpany  were  marching  in  the  cadence  step. 

499.  When  tl;e  corapajay  br^^^':^'  ijito  platoons,  the  chief 
of  each  will  more  to  tbe  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will 
take  the  place  of  tjie  guide,  who  will  step  back  into  tfee 
rear  r.ank. 

&0G.  As  so©n  tts  the  platoons  sUalJ  be  bri>]ten,  each  chie^ 
flf  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  the 
front  rank,  and  the  Ifle  closer  will  close  up  to  within  ono 
pace  of  this  rank.  The  moment  the  platoons  are  re-form- 
ed, t  )e  chiefs  of  the  left  sections  will  rrtjjrn  tp  tbeir pUceai 
ps  til»;  closera. 

5.01.  The  f^<)iiij>;niv  r»i.7i''!i:rRr  in  *};•'  ^••M'^'^■|P/^•  f<'  ?'(|i!s« 
i  '  ' 


^  SCHOOL   OF   THE    COMPANY.  ^ 

it  to  paag  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor  will  order 
the  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  cona- 
inand : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

502.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume  the 
cadence  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  of 
sixtcn  inches  between  the  rear  rank  and  the  front. 

503.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  it  t©  change  direction,  which  will  be 
executed  without  formal  commands,  en  a  simple  caution 
from  the  captain ;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up  to  change 
direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front  rank. 

504.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself  to  the  piinciples 
prescribed  for  the  change  in  close  ranks  with  this  differ- 
ence only  ;  that  in  wheeling  the  pivot  man  will  take  steps 
of  fourteen  inches,  instead  of  nine,  to  close  the  wheeling 
point. 

505.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step 
shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command  halt, 
ftnd  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

Counlermaj'ch, 

506.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  con- 
stitute part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instruc- 
tor shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Countermarch.      'I.   Company,   right  Face.     3.  By  file 
left.    4.  March. 

507.-  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right-about ;  the  captain, 
will  go  to  the  right  of  his  companr   and  cause  two  files  to 


SCHOOI-  OF  THK    CClM^AWT.  99 

break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  hiin?olf  by  tbe  side  of  the 
front  rank  man  row  to  conduct  him. 

508.  At  the  command  march,  hoih  guides  will  stand  fast; 
the  company  will  step  off  smaKly  ;  the  first  file  conducted 
by  the  captain  will  wheel  around  the  right  guide,  and  di- 
rect its  march  along  the  front  rank  so  as  to  arrive  behind, 
and  two  paces  from  the  left  guide  ;  each  file  will  come  in 
succession  to  wheel  ok  the  same  ground  around  the  right 
guide;  the  leading  file  having  arrived  at  a  point  opposite 
the  left  guide,  tke  captain  will  command: 

1.     Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Right-Dii.'Ess. 

509.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four  paces 
from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to  halt. 

510.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 
611.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

512.  At  the  fourth,  the  captain  will  step  two  paces  out- 
side of  ttie  left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the 
Alignment,  s»  that  the  front  rank  may  be  enclosed  between 
the  guides  ;  the  company  being  aligned  he  will  command, 
Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  company 
tis  if  in  column  ;  the  guides  passing  along  the  front  rank, 
will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  on  the  right  and  left  of 
that  rank. 

513.  In  a  column  by  platoon,  or  section,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  ac- 
cording   to   the  same    principles;     the    guide    of    each 

,  platoon,  or  section,  will  face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  file  on  the  right  to  conduct  it. 

614.  In  a  column  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will  be 
executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means  but  according 
to  the  same  principles.    Thus  the  movement  will  be  made 


20U  aCBOOL  OV  THE  COMPAJSTT, 

by  the  tigbt  flank  of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  be  in  front, 
and  by  the  left  flank  if  tbe  left  be  in  front ;  in  both  casesj 
the  subdivisions  will  wheel  by  file  ts  the  side  of  the  front 
rank. 

Being  m  column  hy  jtlatoon,   to  form  vn  the  right  (or  left) 
into  line  of  battle. 

515.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in 
niarch,  the  instructor  wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right 

516.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each  platoon 
will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank;  the  column  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward ;  the  instructor  will  move 
briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  com. 
pany  ought  to  rest  in  line,  and  place  himselt  facing  the 
point  of  direction  to  the  left  which  he  will  choose. 

517.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite  the 
instructor  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  command: 
1.  night  turn  ;  and  when  exactly  opposite  to  that  point  he 
will  add  :     2.  March. 

618.  At  this  command  the  first  platoon  will  turn  to  tbe 
right  occording  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  No.  lid, 
its  guide  will  so  direct  his  march  as  to  bring  the  front  rank 
man  next  on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instructor ;  the  chief 
Qf  the  platoon  will  march  before  its  centre,  and  when  the 
guide  shall  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 
1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt, 

510.  At  this  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  light  uf  the  platoon  ehall  arrive  at  the  distance  ef 


SOtfOUL    OF    IHK    f-'OMPANY.  10 1 

;hrce  paces  from  the   line  of  battle,  the  platoon  will  halt ; 
the  files  not  yet  in  line  will  come  up  promptly. 

520.  The  guide  will  throw  himself  on  the  line  of  battle 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon,  and 
face  to  the  instructor,  who  will  align  him  on  the  point  of 
direction  to  the  left. 

521.  The  chief  of  the  platoon  having  at  the  same  time, 
gone  to  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to 
rest,  will,  as  soon  as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in 
line  command  : 

Bight — Dress. 

522.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  itraight 
forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left 
file  of  the  first;  it  will  then  turn  to  the  right  at  the  com- 
mand of  its  chief,  and  march  towards  the  line  of  battle, 
its  guide  directing  himself  on  the  left  file  of  the  first  pla- 
toon. 

523.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of  three 
paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will  be  halted, 
as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at  the  instant  it  halts  its 
guide  vvill  spring  on  the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of 
the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon,  and  will  be  assured  in  his 
position  by  the  instructor. 

524.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  his  files 
in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on  the  dii-ection,  will 
command : 

Hight— Dress. 
626.  Having  given  this  the  command,  he  will  return   to 
his  place  as  file-closer,  passing  around  the  left;  the  second 
platoon  will  dress  up   on   the  alignment  of  the  first,  and 
when  eetabliehed,  the  captain  will  command  ; 


102  school  of  the  company. 

Front. 
i26.  The  movetrient  ended,  the  instructor  will  command! 
Guides — Posts. 

527.  At  this  comiBand  the  guides  will  return  to  their 
places  in  line  of  battle. 

528.  A  column  by  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form  on  the 
left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles, 
and  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  second  platoon 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  reciprocally. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having  aligned  it 
from  the  left,  will  return  to  his  place  as  file  closer. 

630.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon  three 
paces  behind  the  Inie  of  battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point 
to  align  this  platoon,  and  then  command  :  Front.  At 
the  command,  guides-posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the 
captain  will  shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take 
their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

Formation  of  a   company  from,  two  ranks  into 

single  rank,  and  reciprocally. 

531.  The  company  being  in  two  ranks,  and  supposed  to 
make  a  part  of  a  column,  right  or  left  in  front,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  single  rank,  he  will 
command : 

1.  In  one  rank  form  company.     2.  Makch. 

532.  At  the  first  command  the  right  guide  will  face  to 
the  right. 

533.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step 
off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank. 

534.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  satme  time  with  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANT.  103 

guide  ;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right  at  the 
first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed  by  the 
rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who  will  turn  on  the  same  spot 
where  he  turned. 

535.  The  second  file,  and  all  other  files  successirelj,  will 
Btep  off  as  has  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  the  frontVank 
man  of  each  file  following  immediately  the  rear  rank  man 
of  the  file  next  on  his  right.  The  captain  will  superintend 
he  moTement,  and  when  the  last  man  shall  have  stepped  oC, 
he  will  halt  the  company,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

636.  The  file-closers  will  take  their  places  in  line  of  bat- 
tle, two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

637.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  where  the  in- 
structor wishes  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  In  two   ranks,  form  compani/.     2.  March. 

638.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right ;  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  tlio  vi<rht  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front.  " 

639.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  hare  faced  to 
the  right  will  step  off  and  form  files  in  the  following  man- 
ner ;  the  second  man  in  the  rank  will  place  himself  behind 
the  first  to  form  the  first  file;  the  third  will  place  him 
selfby  the  side  of  the  first  in  the  front  rank;  the  fourth 
behind  the  t^hird  in  the  rear  rank.  AH  the  others  ,..7/  in 
like  manner  place  themselves,  alternately,  in  the  front  and 
rear  rank,  and  will  thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on  the  lott 
of  those  already  formed. 

Formation  of  a  compauf^  Jrun    two  ranks  hito 
four,  and  reciprocal} ij,  at  a  halt  andin  march. 
alO.  The  company  being   in    two    ranks,  at  a  halt,  and 


104  •  SCHOpii    Ot   r»£    eO»[FA>'Y. 

supposed  to  form  part  of  a'coluinn  right  in  front,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Jn/our  ranks, form  company.     2.    Company,  left — Fl.CB. 
3.  March,  {or  double-quick — March.) 

541.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  wilLremain 
faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the  left,  the 
rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  one  pace  from  the  front 
by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear,  and  the  men  will  form 
into  four  ranks  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  squad. 

542.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men 
will  reface  to  the  front  without  undoubling.  All  the  oth- 
er files  of  four  will  step  off,  and  closing  successively  to 
about  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file,  will  halt,  and  im- 
mediately face  to  the  front,  the  men  remaining  doubled. 

543.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in  line 
of  battle  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank. 

544.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

645.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  ha  will  com- 
mand : 

I.  In  ttco  ranks  form  company.     2.   Company  right — Face. 
3.  March,  {or  double-quick — March.) 

646.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will  stand 
fast,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right. 

547.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step 
off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  The 
leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off  ac  the  same  time,  the 
other  files  standing  fast;  the  second  file  will  step  off  when 
there  shall  be  between  it  and  the  first  space  soffioient  to 
form  two  rankp. 


««HOOL    OF   laE  COMJ'AKr.  lOo 

548.  The  following  files  will  execute  successively  whatha* 
been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As  soon  as  the  last  file 
shall  have  its  distance,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.   Company,     2.  Halt.     3.  Front, 

549.  At  the  cocimand/roMf,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

650.  The  company  being  in  two  ranks  and  marching  to 
the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
four  ranks,  he  will  command: 

1.  In/our  ranH  form  company.     2.  By  the  left,   double 
files.     3.  March,  {or  double-quick— yikuca.) 

651.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  ffuide  and  the  left 
file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the 
front ;  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  th« 
odd  numbers  placing  themselves  behind  the  even  numbers. 
The  even  numbers  of  the  rear  rank  will  shorten  their  stepa 
a  little,  to  permit  the  odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  to 
get  between  them  and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank. 

552.  The  files  thus  formed  of  fours,  except  the  left'file, 
will  continue  to  march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps 
slightly,  so  as  to  k^ep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guides- 
each  file  will  close  successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left, 
and  when  at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face 
to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take'the  touch 
ol  elbows  to  the  left. 

553.  The  company  being  i„  march  to  tV  front  in  four 
ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two 
ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Ih    (wo  rank, form   company.  2.   By  the  right  undonhU 

.fif'f.     Maeck,  (or  ffofihl€-p/i.ek—}4A-Rva.) 


100  8iH0(H.  or  THE  COMPAJ<T. 

554.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  •j;uide  and  the 
l'»f(  file  of  the  company  will  march  straight  to  the  front ; 
the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  and  march 
obliquely,  lengthening  the  step  a  little,  in  order  to  keep 
as  near  as  possible  abreast  of  the  guide. 

555.  As  soon  as  the  second  file  from  the  left  shall  have 
gained  to  the  right  the  interTal  necessary  for  the  left  file 
to  form  into  Wo  ranks,  the  second  tile  will  face  to  the 
front  by  a  half  face  to  the  left  and  march  straight  for- 
ward; the  left  file  will  immediately  form  into  two  ranks, 
and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

656.  Each  file  will  execute  successiyeiy,  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  the  left,  and  each  file 
will  form  into  two  ranks,  when  the  file  next  on  its  right 
has  obliqued  the  required  distance  and  faced  to  the  front. 

557.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  col- 
umn, left  in  front,  these  different  morements  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  inre  "se 
means,  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right. 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  MANUAL. 


PART  THIRD. 

Manual  of  Arms  for  Riflemen  or  Light  Infantry. 

Position  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

1  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the  first  part 
of  squal  drill,  the  instructor  will  cause  him  to  bend  the 
right  arm  slightl}',  and  to  place  the  piece  in  it  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner, 

2.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand  —the  barrel  nearly  rerti- 
cal  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — the  guard 
to  the  front,  <  he  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its  full  length, 
near  the  bodv  ;  the  thumb  and  forefinger  embracing  the 
guard,  the  remaining  fingers  closed  together,  grasping 
the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under  the  cock,  which  rests  on 
the  little  finger. 

3.  In  learning  the  reoruits  the  manual  of  arms,  the  last 
syllable  ot  the  command  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of 
the  fi''st  motion  of  each  time  or  pause,  and  the  commands 
tuo,  three  and  four,  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the 
other  motions. 

4.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  following 
progression.  The  recruit  having  the  piece  at  the  shoulder, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 


108  EIFLB   AND    LIGHT    INTA.N'lur    SiA^UVAt. 

Suppert —AviMB. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

5.  (First  motion. )  Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand, 
perpendicularly  to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes,  the 
barrel  to  the  rear;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
lower  band,  raise  this  hand  as  high  as  the  chin,  and  seize 
the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  four  inchei 
below  the  cock. 

6.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front  ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  left 
shoulder,  and  pass  the  forearm  extended  on  the  breast  be- 
tween the  right  hand  and  the  cock;  support  the  cock 
against  the  left  forearm,  the  left  hand  resting  on  the  right 
breast. 

7.  (Third  motion.)     Drop  the  right  hand  by   the  side* 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

8. (  First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
under  and  against  the  left  forearm  ;  seize  it  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended  ;  detach  the 
piece  slightlj»  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  forearm  along 
the  stock. 

9.  (Second  motion. )  Carry  the  piece  vertically  with 
both  hands,  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front, 
change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the 
guard  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger,  slip  the  left  hand  t» 
the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

10.  (Third  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  th« 
«ld«. 


Pretent—  AtU%. 
One  titnt  and  tte9  taotioHt. 

11.  (First  naotioa.)  With  (he  rigrht  hand,  briny  the 
piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  rammer  to 
the  front ;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  half  way  between  the  guide  sight  and  lower  band, 
the  thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  against  the 
stock,  the  forearm  horizontal  and  resting  against  the  body, 
the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

12.  (Second  motion. )  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  witk 
the  right  hand  belon  and  against  tlie  guard. 

.S'^owWer— Akms. 
One  tune  and  ttco  motion«. 

13.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoul- 
vJer,  at  the  8»me  time  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand 
so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
linger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder, 
the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 

H.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  guickly  to 
tiie  side. 

Order — Arms. 
One  dmt  andtivo  .mottont.  • 

15.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the 
left  hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  detach  it  slightly  from 
Ihe  shoulder  with  the  right  hand  ;  loosen  the  grasp  of  the 
right  hand,  lower  the  piece  with  the  loft,  re-seize  the  piece 
ivith  the  right  hand  above  the  lower  band,  the  little  fingec 
io  the  repT  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  abautfour  inohe?  frons 


110'  RirLF  AJfD    trSHT   rNFANTRT   MANUAI,, 

« 

mhe  groirad,  the  right  hand  Bvvpported   against  the  hip;. 
drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

16.  (Second  position^)  l>et  the  piece  slip  through  the- 
iright  hand  to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly  the  finders, 
and  take 

The  posiiton  of  Order  Arms^. 

17.  The  hand  lowr,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  extended  along  the  stock;  the  other  fingers 
extended  and  joined ;  the  muzzle  asbout  two  inches  from: 
She  right  shoulder;  the  rammer  in  front;  the  toe  (or 
beak  of  the  butt  against  and  in  a  line  ^th  the  toe  of  the 
right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two- motions, 

18.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  peace  verticariy  with 
the  right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and  op- 
posite the  shoalder,  the  elbow  close  to  the  body  ;  seize  th-e- 
piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right,  and  drop  qiUicklj 
the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  pi^ce  at  the  smafU  of  the  stocky 
the  thumb  and  forefinger  embracing  the  guard  ;  press  the 
piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  righit 
arm  nearly  straight. 

19.  (Second  motion.)  I>i*op  the  left  hand  qutckly  hj 
the  side. 

Load  in  nine  timei, 

I.    JLOAI>.* 

20.  Grasp  the  piece  with   the  left  hand  as  high  as  the 

*(NoTE.)  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be 
executed,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to 
18>e  brought  to  the  front. 


UIFLK    ASU    LIGHT    INFASTRT    MAHCAL.  lU 

right  elbow,  and  bring  it  rertically  opposite  the  middle  of 
the  body,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  upper  band,  place  the 
butt  between  ike  feet,  barrel  to  the  front ;  seize  it  witX 
the  left  hand  near  the  muzzle,  which  should  be  three  inch- 
es  from  the  body;  carry  the  right  ha«d  to  the  cartrid|:« 
box. 

2.    i/flMdie— CARTRIOaB. 

0ns  time  and  one  mottoa. 
2L  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb   and  next  two 
f.ngere,  and  place  it  between  tftie  teeth. 
3.   Tear— Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

22.  Tear  tJie  pap»r  to  the  powder,  hold  ihe  cartridge 
upriglit  between  tJie  th«mb  and  first  two  fingers,  aear  the 
top  ;  in  this  position  place  it  in  front  of  and  near  the  mux* 
zle— the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

4.   C'Aor^e— Cartribqb. 
0*«  time  and  one  motion. 

23.  Empty  tho  powder  into  the  barrel ;  disengage  the 
ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  hand  and  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left  ;  insert  it  into  the  bore, 
the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it  down  with  the 
right  thumb ;  seize  the  head  of  the  rauiiaer  with  the  thumb 
and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  fhe  other  fingers  closed, 
ihe  elbow  near  the  body. 

5.   jDraip— Rammeu. 
One  time  and  three  viotionn. 
U.  (First  motion.)     Half  draw   the  rammer  by  extend- 
in^. the  right  arm;  steady  it  in  this  poiition   with    lefi 


t)iu«»b  ;  grasp  the  rammer  near  the  muzzle  with  the  riglk 
hand,  the  little  finger  itpperm^wt,  tfee  nails  to  the  front, 
the  thumb  extended  along  the  rammer. 

25.  (Second  motion. )  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes 
By  again  extending  the  arm  :  the  rammer  i-n  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  pipes. 

2G.  (Third  motion.)  Turis  the  rammer,  the  little  end' 
of  the  rammer  paBsiing  near  tbe  left  shoulder  ;  pfeec  the 
lead  of  the  rammer  on  the  ball,  the  back  of  the  hand  t» 
the  ft-ontv 

G.  Bam — CARiniDGE, 

One  time  and  ove  matio^. 

27.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the-right,  ffnd'  steady  ft 
m  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand  ;  seize  the 
rammer  at  the  small  end  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of 
the  right  hand,  tlje  back-  of  tli«  hsind  to  thte  front  j  press 
the  ball  home,  the  elbows  nea;r  tSie  body, 

7.  Return — Rammer, 

One  time  andtnree  motions. 

28.  (First  mstion. )  Draw  the  rammer  half  way  oufe^ 
and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb  ;  grasp  it 
aear  the  muzzle  with  the  right  band,  the  little  ferefl-nger 
uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  along  ih^e 
rammer  ;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore  by  extending 
the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer  in  the  proton- 
gation  of  the  bore. 

29.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammcT,  the  head  of 
the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  and  insert  it  in 
the  pipes  until  the  right  hand  voachct?  tt^e  muzile,  the  nails 
to  the  froftt. 


30.  (Third  motion.)     Force  tiie  rammer  home  by  plac- 
ing the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the 
rammer  ;  pass  the  left  hand  down  the  barrel  to  the  extent 
of  the  arm,  without  depressing  the  shoulder, 
8.  Fbimb- 
One  time  and  two  motinna. 

SI.  (First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise  the  piece 
until  the  hand  is  as  high  as  the  ej^e,  grasp  the  small  of  the 
Btock  with  the  right  hand  ;  half  faeo  the  right ;  place  at 
eamc  time,  the  right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles  with 
the  left,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  against  the  left  heel. 
Slip  the  left  hand  down  to  the  lower  band,  the  thumb 
along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ;  bring 
the  piece  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore- 
arm— the  smafl  of  tbo  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upward,  the  muz- 
zle on  a  IcTcl  with  the  eye. 

32.  (Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  H)c  thumb  of  tho 
right  hand,  tho  fingers  supported  against  the  guard  and 
pmall  of  the  stock — remove  the  old  cap  with  one  of  the 
fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger of  the  same  hand,  take  a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place 
it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down  with  the  thumb;  seize 
the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

9.  Shoulder — Arms. 

0;jfl  time  and  two  motion  •;. 

33,  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoul- 
der and  support  it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the 
front ;  bring  the  right  hand  to  the  side  of  and  on  a  line 
with  the  left;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  li^ht  hand  as  indl- 
eated  in  the  po.^ilion  o(  nhoi'hfrr  nrmt. 


114  niFLK    AND    LIGHT   INFANTRY    HANtJAL, 

34.  (Se«ond  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  to 
the  side. 

Readt. 
One  time  and  three  mottona. 

35.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the 
right  hand,  raakingf  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left 
beel ;  carry  the  righ  foot  to  the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right 
angles  to  the  left,  the  hollo\y  of  it  opposite  to  and  against 
the  left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder. 

36.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both 
Lands,  the  barrel  upward,  the  left  thumb  extended 
along  the  stock,  the  butt  along  the  right  forearm,  th« 
small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches  below 
the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eye,  the  left  el- 
bow against  the  side;  place  at  the  same  time,  the  right 
thumb  on  the  Jaead  of  the  coek,  the  other  fingers  under  and 
against  the  guard.. 

37.  (Thir4  motion.)  Cock  and  seize  the  piece  at  the 
small  of  the  stock,  without  deranging  the  position  of  the 
butt. 

Aim. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

38.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support  the 
butt  against  the  right  shoulder  ;  the  left  elbow  down,  the 
right  nearly  as  high  as  the  shoulder,  incline  the  head  upon 
the  butt  so  that  the  right  eye  may  perceive  quickly  the 
object  aimed  at ;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  .stock,  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger. 

39.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the 


UIFLB    AND    LKjlHr    INFANTRY    MANIAL.  115 

right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  towards  the 
left  beelof  the  man  next  on  the  right,  inclining  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  forward. 

FlKE. 

40.  Press  the  forefinger  against  the  trigger,  fire,  without 
lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  this  position. 

LOADk 

One  time  and  one  motxoif, 

41.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hand'^,  at  the  same- 
time  face  to  the  front,  and  take  the  position  of  load.  Each 
rear  rank  man  will  bring  bis  right  foat  by  the  side  of  the 
left. 

43.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the 
recruits  to  re-load,  he  will  command  : 

Sho  nlder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

43.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand^ 
and  resume  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  at  the  same  time 
face  to  the  front,  trarningon  the  left  heel,  and  bringing  the 
right  heel  on  a  Tine  with  the  left. 

44.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  camnfiand,. 
Jlre,  the  instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  position  ofaiiri^ 
will  command  : 

liecover — Arms. 
One  time  ttnd  orte  motion. 

45.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw  the  fin*- 
ger  from  the  trigger;  at  the  command,  arms,  retake  tfe^e 
position  of  the  third  motion  of  rei%dy. 


116  RIFLE    A.X9   LI6HX   I^'FA^'TRr   MAXPAL. 

46.  Tte  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  mo- 
tion ofrtady  ;  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring  them 
to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

47.  At  the  com\na.nd  shoulder,  place  the  thumb  upon  the 
cock,  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger,  half  cock,  and  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand.  At  the  command 
arms,  bring  up  the  piece  briskly  to  the  right  shoulder  and 
re-take  the  position  o^  shoulder  arms. 

Fix — Bayonet. 

Onetime  and  three  motions. 

.48.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  and  detach  it  Blightly  from 
the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand. 

49.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  lower  it  with  the  left  hand,  opposite  the  middle  of 
the  body,  and  place  the  butt  between  the  feet  without 
shock,  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  vertical,  the 
muzzle  three  inches  from  the  body ;  seize  it  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  upper  band,  and  carry  the  left  hand  reversed 
to  the  handle  of  the  sabre  bayonet. 

50.  (Third  motion.)  Draw  the  sabre  bayonet  from  the 
scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel ;  seize  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  the  aim  extended,  the  right  hand  at  the  upper 
band. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motiom^ 

51.  (First  mcti«n,)     Kaise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 


KIFIJk   ANP    LIGHT   ISFiiNTRT    MASUAL.  117 

and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the 
front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 
hand,  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  forefiger, 
embracing  the  guard,  the  right  arm  nearly  extended. 

52.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  piece  briskly,  the  left 
hand  by  the  side. 

Charge-^BxronsT. 

One  time  and  two  motioiu, 

53.  (First  motion. )  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with  the 
right  hand,  and  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left 
heel ;  place  the  Lollow  of  the  right  foot  opposite  to,  and 
three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  f«et  square ;  seize  the 
piece  at  the  same  time,  with  the  left  hand  a  little  above  the 
lower  band. 

64.  (Second  motion. )  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the 
body;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  at  the  same  time,  with 
the  right  hand,  which  will  be  supported  against  the  hip  ; 
the  point  of  the  sabre  bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 
Shoulder — Arms, 
One  time  and  two  viotiona. 

55.  (First  motion. )  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with 
the  left  hand,  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against  the 
right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  turn  the  right 
hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right  hand  nearly  extended. 

66.  (Second  motion. )  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by 
the  aide. 

TratV— Arms. 
Out  tiiiie  and  ti»o  motietit. 


118  RIKLE    AND   LIGHT   IM^ANTRT    MANUAL. 

57.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of 
Order  arms. 

58.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to 
the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches  from 
the  ground.  The  right  hand  supported  at  the  hip,  will  so 
hold  the  piece  that  the  rear-rank  men  may  not  touch  with 
their  bayonet,  the  men  in  the  front  rank. 

Shoulder — Ahms. 

59.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpendic- 
ularly in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  bar- 
rel. At  the  command  arms,  execute  the  two  motions  pre- 
scribed for  the  shoulder,  from  the  position  of  order  arms. 

Unfix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions, 

60.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  first  motion  of  yiaj 
hayonet. 

61.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  second  motion  of_/?J5 
bayonet,  except, that  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  will  be 
placed  on  the  spring  of  the  sabre  bayonet,  and  the  left  hand 
will  embrace  the  handle  of  the  sabre  bayonet  and  the 
bai  rel,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  blade. 

62.  (Third  motion. )  Press  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand 
on  the  spring,  wrest  off  the  sabre  bayonet,  turn  it  to  the 
right,  the  edge  to  the  front,  lower  the  guard  until  it  touch- 
es the  right  hand,  which  will  seize  the  back  and  the  edge 
of  the  blade  between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  the 
other  fingers  holding  the  piece;  change  the  position  of 
the  hand  without  quitting  the  handle,  return  the  sabre 
bayonet  to  the  scabbard,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
band,  the  arm  extended. 


RIFLE    AND    LIOHT    INFANTRT    MANUAL.  119 

Shoulder — A  BMS. 
One  time  and  two  motiona. 

63.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion,  from 
fix  bayonet. 

(54.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion 
in  Jixbar/onet. 

Secure — Alms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

65.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of 
support  arms,  except,  with  the  right  hand  seize  the  piece 
at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

6(5.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands, 
the  barrel  to  the  front ;  bring  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder 
the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band, 
the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and  extended  on  the  rammer; 
the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left 
forearm  against  the  piece. 

67.  (Third  motion.)  Raise  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the 
left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  lower  band,  the 
thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it  from  falling  out,  the 
little  finger  resting  on  the  hip,  the  right  hand  falling  at 
the  same  time  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  lime  and  three  motions. 

68.  (First  motion. )  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
and  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock, 
the  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  butt 
against  the  hip,  left  foream  along  the  piece. 

69.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motioB 
of  shoulder  armn from  a  inpport. 


120  hlSin    A^O    U.UBI    infantry    MA.NCA-Ii. 

70.  (Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  motion  of 
shttuldtr  arms  from  a  support. 

Right  Shotilder  Shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  n\ptio7u. 

7i.  (First  motion. )  Detach  the  piece  perpendicularly 
from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  raise  it  with 
the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight,  raise  the 
piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder  and  four 
inches  from  it;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  hand  ou 
the  butt,  the  back  between  the  first  two  fingers,  the  other 
two  fingers  under  the  butt  plate. 

72.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
raiae  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shoulder  with  the 
right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards ;  let  fall,  at  the  same 
time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  ttco  motions, 

73.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by 
extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to 
the  front,  at  the  same  time,  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight. 

74.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right 
hand,  which  will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  lower 
the  piece  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arras,  slide  up  the  left 
hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended 
and  closed.     Drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

75.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor  will 
sometimes  causfe  the  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoul- 
der.    To  effect  this,  he  will  command  : 


ElfLS   i^'D    LieHX   UfFAlTTKT   MAXUAX.  121 

Bight  Shoulder  Shift — Ariis. 
One  time  and  tico  motiont. 

76.  (First  motion.)  feize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand, 
below  and  near  the  left  forearm,  place  the  left  hand  under 
the  butt,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  first  two  fingers. 

77.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
the  lock  plate  upward,  carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the 
left  hand  still  holding  the  butt,  the  muzzle  elevated  ;  hold 
the  piece  in  this  position  and  place  the  right  hand  upon 
the  butt  as  is  prescribed  in  No.  71,  and  let  fall  the  hand 
by  the  side. 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

78.  (Finst  motion. )  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of 
»houlder  arms,  No.  73. 

79.  (Second  motion. )  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands, 
the  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder, 
slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  place  the  left 
forearm,  extended,  on  the  breast  and  let  fall  the  right  hand 
to  the  side. 

Arms — At  Will. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

80.  Carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  ghoulder, 
with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

Shoxdder—  Arms. 
One  time  and  one   motion. 

81.  Retake  quickly  the  position  of  shoiUder  armt. 

Ground— Aniiis. 
Oiif.  time  aitd  twH  vwtion-fi. 


122  EIl-LB   AND    LIGHT   INFANTUy    MANUAL. 

82.  (First  motion.)  As  prescribed  in  heavy  infantry 
manual,  (squad  drill.) 

83.  ( Second  motion. )  As  prescribed  in  heavy  infantry 
manual,  (sqaad  drill.)  ^ 

Raise — Aries. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

84.  (First  motion. )  As  prescribed  in  heavy  infantry 
manual,  (squad  drill. ) 

85.  (Second  motion.)  As  prescribed  in  Aeavy  tn/a»try 
manual,  (squad  drill. ) 

86.  The  recruits  being  at  order  arms,  and  having  the 
sabre  bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor  wishes  to 
cause  an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  command, 

Inspection — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

87.  (First  motion. )  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
below  and  near  the  upper  band,  carrj  it  with  both  hands 
opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  the  butt  between  the  feet, 
the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle 
about  three  inches  from  the  body  ;  carry  the  left  hand  re- 
versed to  the  sabre-bayonet,  draw  it  from  the  scabbard 
and  fix  it  on  the  barrel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand 
below  and  near  the  upper  band,  seize  the  rammer  with  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  right  hand,  bent,  the  other 
fingers  closed. 

88.  (Second  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer,  as  has  been 
explainednn  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the 
bore,  replace  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  opposite  the 
right  shoulder,  and  take  the  position  (»f  order  arms. 

89.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect   in  sur-rogiion.  the 


RTFLE    AND    LIGHT   INFA.NTRT    MANUAL.  123 

piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank, 
in  conformity  with  the  principles  prtscribed  in  squad  drill 
for  the  inspection  of  arms 

90.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him,  each  re- 
cruit will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the  command 
insjyection  armn. 

91.  The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command, 

Stack — Arms. 

92.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even 
numbered  lile  will  pass  his  piece  before  him,  seizing  it 
with  the  left  land  near  the  upper  band  ;  will  place  the  butt 
a  little  in  advance  of  the  left  toe,  the  barrel  turned  toward 
the  body,  and  draw  the  rammer  slightly  from  its  place  , 
the  front  rank  man  «f  every  odd  numbered  file  will  also 
draw  the  rammer  slightly,  and  pass  his  piece  to  the  man 
next  on  his  left,  who  will  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  near 
the  upper  band,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of  . 
the  right  toe  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel  turn- 
ed to  the  front ;  he  will  then  cross  the  rammer  of  the  two 
pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd  numbered  man  be- 
ing inside;  the  rear  rank  man  of  evry  even  file  will  also  draw 
his  rammer,  lean  the  piece  forward,  the  lock  plate  down- 
ward, advance  the  right  foot  about  six  inches,  and  insert 
the  rammer  between  the  rammer  and  the  barrel  of  the  piece 
of  his  front  rank  man  ;  with  his  left  hand  he  will  place  the 
butt  of  his  piece  on  the  ground,  thirty-two  inches  in  rear 
of  and  perpendicular  to  the  front  rank,  bring  back  his 
right  foot  by  the  sids  of  the  left ;  the  front  rank  man  of 
every  even  file,  will  at  the  same  time  lean  the  stock  to  the 
rear,  quit  it  with  the  right  hand  and  force  all  the  rammers 


.  l",iI4  a.l?LK   AHl}   lilUHI    t^trANlAT    MANUAL. 

down.  The  stack  being  thus  fbrmed,  the  rear  rank  man  of 
every  odd  file  will  pass  his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the 
barrel  to  the  front,  and  inclining  it  forward,  will  rest  it 
on  the  stack. 

93.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  position  of 
the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will  command 

1.  Break  ranks — 2.  March. 
To  Resume  Arms. 

94.  Both  ranks  beinc:  reformed  in  rear  of  their  stacks, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

Take — Arms. 

96.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd 
numbered  piece,  will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the  stack  ; 
the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  file,  will  seize  his  own 
piece  with  the  l«ft  hand,  and  that  of  the  man  on  his  right, 
with  his  right  hand,  both  above  the  lower  band ;  the  rear 
rank  man  of  the  even  file  will  seize  his  piece  with  the  right 
band  below  the  lower  band ;  these  two  men  will  raise  up 
the  stack  to  loosen  the  rammers  ;  the  front  rank  man  of 
every  odd  file,  will  facilitate  the  disengagement  of  the  ram- 
mers, if  necessary,  by  drawing  them  out  slightly  with  the 
left  hand,  and  will  receive  his  piece  from  the  hand  of  the 
man  next  on  the  left ;  the  four  men  will  retake  the  position 
of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 

formation  of  a  Regiment  in  line  of  Battle  or  in 

line, 

96.  A  Regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which 
will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to  left,  in  the  follow- 
ing 6rder:  first,  «iith,  fourth,  ninth,   third,  eighth,  fifth. 


Rffi/B   AND    LIOHT    INFAWTRT    JMNCAL.  125' 

^tenfh,  seteath,  second,  according  to  the  p»nk  cf  captains. 

07.  With  a  less  numbar  of  companies  tlio  same  principle 
trill  be  observed,  viz  :  the  first  captain  will  command  the 
right  company,  the  second  captain  the  left  company,  the 
third  captain  the  right  centre  company,  and  so  on. 

98.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated  from 
right  to  lcft,^r«<  company,  eecond  company,  etc.  This 
designation  will  be  observed  in  the  mancriivrcs. 

09.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever  their 
denomination,  will  form  the  Jirst  division  ;  the  next  two 
companies  the  second  divistom  ;  and  so  on,  to  the  left. 

100.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal  parts 
which  will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second  platoon, 
countine  from  the  ri}.ht;  and  each  platoon,  in  like  man- 
ner, will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

101.  In  all  exercises  and  mancevres,  every  rcgin-ent,  or 
part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  moro  companies, 
will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

102.  The  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter  designated, 
will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  battalion 
company.  That  company  and  all  on  its  right,  will  be 
denominated  the  right  wing  of  the  battalion  ;  the  remain- 
ing companies  the  left  tviiig. 

103.  The  farmation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks ;  and 
each  company  will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner :  the  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front 
rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  platoons,  according  to 
height ;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the  tallest  man  will  form 
the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest  men  will  form  the  second 
file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file,  which  will  be  eompoeed  of 
the  shortest  corporal  and  the  shortest  man. 


126  RIFLE   AND   LIGHT   INFANTRY    MANUAL. 

104.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two,  in  the 
company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of  four  men, 
who  will  fee  designated  comrades  in  battle, 

105.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  be  thir- 
teen inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the  rear  rank 
men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front  rank  men. 

106.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion  will 
always  be  equalized,  by  transferring  mea  from  the  strong- 
est to  the  weakest  companies. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regiment'/ 1  Staff. 

107.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel  and 
major,  are  supposed  to  he  mounted,  and  on  active  service 
shall  b«  on  horseback.  The  adj  utant,  when  the  battalion 
is  manoeuvring,  will  be  on  foot. 

108.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file  closer,  and  opposite  the  centre  of  the  battalion.  This 
distance  will  be  reduced  whenever  there  is  a  reduction  im 
the  front  of  the  battalion. 

,109.  The  lieutentant-eo!onel  and  the  major  will  be  oppo- 
site the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respectively, 
and  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

110.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  opposite 
the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively,  and  eight 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  file  closers, 

111.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  will  aid  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel and  major,  respectively,  in  the  manoeuvres, 

112.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, and  the  latter  by  the  ihajor.  If  all  the  field 
officers  be  absent,  the  senior  captains  will  command  the 
battalion  3  but  if  either  be  present,  he  will  not  fl^U  the 


RIftK    AND    LKJHT    IXKANTR    MA.NfAL.  127 

senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer ,  except  in  case  of  evi- 
dent necessity. 

113.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff  oflScers, 
in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  paces  in 
his  rear. 

114.  The  quarter-master  sergeant  on  aline  with  the  front 
rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

115.  The  buglars  will   be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and 

posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the  left  op- 
posite the  centime  of  the  left  centre  company.  The  senior 
principle  musician  will  be  two  paces  in  front  of  the  field 
musie,  and  the  other  two  paces  in  the  rear. 

116.  The  regimental  band,  it  there  be  one,  will  be  drawn 
up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  numbers,  and 
posted  fiye  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music,  having  oqe  of 
the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-  Guard. 

117.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  composed 
of  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right 
centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  time  being, 
the  guard  will  make  a  part. 

118.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  ajsergeant,  to  be 
selected  by  the  colonel,  who  will  be  calied,  for  the  time, 
color-barer,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals,  respectively, 
on  his  right  and  left;  the  rear  rank  will  be  composed  of 
tlie  three  corporals  next  in  rank  ;  and  the  three  remaining 
corporals  will  be  posted  in  their  rear,  and  on  the  line  of 
file  closers.     The   left  guide  of  the  color   «^f>inpany,  when 


these  three  last  nanced  corporals  are  iu  the  rank  of  fiit- 
closers,  will  be  immediately  on  their  left. 

119.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  proaont, 
there  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  displaj  of  colors,  e*- 
cept  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

120.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  seiected 
from  those  most  distinguished  for  regularity  and  percisioc, 
as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms  as  in  their  marching. 
The  latter  advantage,  and  &  just  carriage  of  the  person, 
are  to  be  more  particularly  sought  for  in  the  selection  of 
the  color-bearer. 

Getierai   Guides. 

121.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion, 
•elected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among  the  ser- 
geants (other  than  first  sergeants)  the  most  distinguished 
for  carriage  under  arms  and  accuracy  in  marching. 

122.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denominated, 
in  the  manoeuvres,  right  general  guide  and  left  general 
guide,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers;  the  first  in 
sear  of  the  right  and  the  second  in  rear  of  the  left  fl^ulf  of 
the  batt»lioa. 


SKIRMISH   DRILL    AND   BATONET  EXERCISE. 


PART  FOURTH. 

INSTRUCTIOX  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 
General  principle.^  and  division  of  the  iiisiruction» 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  subjected  to 
such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander  the  means  of 
moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the  greatest  prompti- 
tude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should  be  exe 
cuted  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed  ranks,  nor  is  it 
desirable,  as  such  exactness  would   materially  interfere 
with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the  way 
for,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of  the  main  corps,  their 
movements  should  be  so  regulated  by  this  corps  as  to  keep 
it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  hare  a  reserve,  the 
strength  and  composition  of  which  will  vary  according  to 
circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining  distance 

5 


S3'0  !»KlltMlftiH    DKIH,    ANU    BAVUNKV    KXEROISfi. 

of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserre  will  be  sufFicienfc 
for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  fill  vacant  pla- 
ces, furnish  the  line  with  cartridges,  relieve  the  fatigued,, 
and  serve  as  a  rallying  point  for  the  skirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance,  be- 
sides the  compan}'  reserves,  another  reserve  will  be  re- 
quired, composed  of  entire  companies,  which  will  be  em- 
ployed to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts  of  the  line  as 
may  be  warmly  attacked ;  this  reserve  should  be  strong 
enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the  companies  deployed  as 
skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserve  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre  of  the 
line  of  skirmishers,  the  company  reserves  at  one  hundred 
and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at  four  hundred  paces. 
This  rule  however,  is  not  invariable.  The  reserves,  while 
holding  themselves  within  sustaining  distance  of  the  line, 
should  be,  as  much  as  possible,  in  a  position  to  afford  each 
other  mutual  protection,  and  must  carefully  profit  by  any 
accidents  of  the  ground  to  conceal  themselves  from  the 
view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves  from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed  in 
quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be  resorted  to 
only  in  cases  of  urgeant  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their  piefcs 
in  the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by  the 
sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-commisaioned 
officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  commands  to  be  execu- 
ted, as  soon  as  they  are  given  ;  but  to  avoid  mistakes, 
when   the  signals  arc   employed,  thvy   r\iii   wait  until  the 


•SkinMI^H    DRILT,    ANT)    HAYONRT    LXKUPI.SK.  ISl 

last  bugle  note  is  sounded  befvsrc  commencing  the  move- 
ment. ^ 

12,  When  skirmishers  are  «9rdercd  to  more  rapidly,  the 
officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  sec  that  the 
men  econemize  their  strength,  keep  cool,  and  profit  bj-  all 
thr"  advantages  which  the  ground  may  offer  for  cover.  It 
is  (>nly  by  this  continual  watchfulness  on  the  part  of  all 
grades,  that  a  line  of  skir'mij-hers  can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  bcdivdedinto  five  article.',  ano! 
subdivided  as  follows  : 


Article  First. 

1-  To  deploy  forward. 

2.  To  deploy  by  the  flank, 

ij.  To  extend  interval.-. 

4.  To  close  ijitervals. 

f>.  To  relieve  skirmishers. 

Aktici.k  Skooki^. 

1.  To  advance  in  line, 

2.  To  reteat  in  line. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  march  by  the  flank. 

Article  Thihi>. 

i.  To  fire  at  a  halt. 

■2;  Tn  fire  marcfoiii^.. 


132  SKIRMISH    DRILL   AND   BAYONET   EXERCISE. 

Article  Fourth. 

1.  The  rally. 

2.  To  form  coIuihh  to  march  in  any  direction, 

3.  The  assembly. 

Article  Fifth. 

1.  To  deploy  a  battallion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmishers, 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that  the 
juovemente  are  executed  by  a  company  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the  battalion  in  order 
of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is  supposed  that  each  com- 
pany of  the  battalion,  being  deployed  as  skirmishers,  oc- 
cupies a  front  of  one  hundred  paces.  From  these  two 
examples,  rules  may  be  numerically  deduced  for  all  cases^ 
whatever  may  be  the  strength  of  the  skirmishers,  and  the 
extent  of  ground  they  ought  to  occupy. 

Article  First. 
J)ejjloi/?nents. 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  in  two 
ways  :  forward  and  by  the  flank. 

16.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when  the 
company  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be  established 
as  skirmishers:  it  will  be  deployed  by  the  flank,  when  it 
fipd?  itself  already  on  thj^t  line. 


SKIUMT.«H    DRILL    iND   8AY0SET   EXKKCI8E.  133 

17.  Whenever  a  company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skirmish- 
ers, it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and  each  platoon 
will  be  subdivided  ioto  two  sections ;  the  comrades  in  bat- 
tle, forming  groups  of  four  men,  will  be  careful  to  know 
and  to  sustain  each  other.  The  captain  will  assure  him- 
Belf  that  the  files  in  the  centre  of  each  platoon  and  section 
are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  on  its 
right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other  named  file  what- 
soever. In  this  manner,  skirmishers  may  be  thrown  for- 
ward with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  on  any  ground 
they  may  be  required  to  occupy. 

19.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  preserve 
thoir  alignment,  but  no  advantage  which  the  ground  may 
present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain  this  regularity. 

20.  Tile  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on  the 
extent  of  ground  to  be  covered ;  but  in  general,  it  is  not 
proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men  should  be  removed 
more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other.  The  habitual 
distance  between  men  of  the  same  group  in  open  grounds 
will  be  five  paces  ;  in  no  case  will  they  lose  sight  of  each 
other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalion  com- 
prehends its  front  and  the  half  of  each  interval  which 
separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right  and  left.  If  a 
line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported,  should  be  covered  by 
skirmishers,  it  will  be  i»ecessary  either  to  protect  the  flanks 
with  skirmishers,  or  to  extend  them  in  front  of  the  line  so 
far  beyond  the  wings  as  effectually  to  oppose  any  attempt 
which  might  bo  made  by  the  er  emy's  skirmishers  to  di.v- 
*urb  the  flank?. 


134:  SKi-HMlSH    ©KILL    AJ<D    BArOiiET    SXEECISfi. 

To  deploy  forward. 

22.  A  company  being  at  a  halt  or  in  march,  when  tho 
captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the  left  file  of 
the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  platoon  in  reserve,  he 
will  command: 

1.  First  platoon — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  left  file — take  intervals. 

3.  March  {or  double  qiiich — JIarch.) 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third  lieuten- 
ants will  place  themselves  rapidly  two  paces  behind  the 
centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of  the  first  platoon  ; 
the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre 
of  the  first  platoon,  and  will  place  himself  between  the  two 
sections  in  the  front  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement  begins  ; 
the  foul  th  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  same  platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass. — 
The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  sergeant  the  point  on 
which  he  Vi'ishes  him  to  direct  his  march.  The  first  lieu- 
tenant, placing  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon,  will  command:     • 

Second  platoon  hachicard — March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step  three 
paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unniiisk  the  flank  on  the  first 
platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted  by  its  chief,  and  the  se- 
cond sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left,  and  the  third 
sengeant  on  the  right  flank  of  this  platoom 

25.  At  the  0*1  m"<m Iliad  rnnrch.  the  left  eronp  of  four  men. 


SKIRMISH    t>niLL    AN'O    EATONCT    EXERCI.'E.  135 

conducted  by  the  fourth  fergeant,  will  direct  itself  un  thu 
point  indicated  ;  all  the  other  groups  rf  fours  throwing 
forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder,  will  moyd.'diagonally  to 
the  front  in  double  quick  time,  so  as  to, gain  to  the  right 
the  space  of  twenty  paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance  be- 
tween each  group  and  that  immediately  on  its  left.  "When 
the  second  group  from  the  loft  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with 
and  twenty  paces  from  the  first,  it  will  march  straight  to 
the  front,  conforming  to  the  gait  and  direction  of  the 
first,  keeping  constantly  on  the  same  alignment  and  at 
twenty  paces  from  it.  The  third  group,  and  all  the  others, 
will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  (or  the  se- 
cond ;  they  will  arrive  successively  on  the  line.  The  right 
guide  will  arrive  with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where  the 
left  of  the  line  i^hould  rest,  the  captain  will  command  the 
skirmishers  to  halt;  the  men  composing  each  group  of 
fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each 
other,  and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  even  file  in  each  group,  the  rear  ^ank  men  placing 
themselves  on  the  left  of  their  file  leaders.  If  any  groups 
be  not  in  line  at  the  command  halt,  they  will  move  up  rap- 
idly, conforming  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be  fired 
upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the  groups  of 
fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their  proper  distances. 

28.  The  line  being  formed  the  non-commissioned  officers 
o&  the  right,  left  and  centre  of  the  platoon  will  place 
themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  the 
position  they  respectively  occupied.  The  chiefs  of  sections 
will  promptly   rectify  any  irrrgularitie?,  and  then  place 


136  SMRMISH    DRILL    AND    BATO^iET    KXBRCISB. 

themselves  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre 
of  their  sections,  each  having  with  him  four  men  taken 
from  the  reserve,  and  also  a  bugler,  who  will  repeat,  if 
necessary,  the  signals  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed  to  take 
advantage  of  any  cover  which  the  ground  may  offer,  and 
should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  whenever  such  a  movement 
is  necessary  to  protect  them  from  the  fire  of  the  enepiy. 
Regularity  in  the  alignment  should  yield  to  this  important 
advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant,^ 
will  face  the  second  platoon  about,  and  march  it  promptly, 
and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  hold  it 
always  at  this  distance,  unless  ordered  to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  movements 
of  the  line.     This  rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habitually  in 
the  scabbard,  and  this  rule  applies  equally  to  the  skirmish- 
ers and  the  reserve ;  whenever  bayonets  are  required  to 
be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will  he  given.  The  captain 
will  give  a  general  superintendence  to  the  whole  deploy- 
ment, and  then  promptly  place  himself  about  eighty  paces 
in  the  i  ear  of  the  centre  of  the  line.  He  will  have  with 
him  a  bugler  and  four  men  taken  from  the  reserve. 

„  33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or  the 
centre  of  the  platoon,  by  the  same  commands,  substituting 
the  indication  right  or  centrcy  for  that  ofleft  file. 

34.  The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will  be 
made  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above ;  in  this 
latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  be  marked  by 


5KIRMWH    DRILL    AND    BIYOXKT    KIERCIS-B.  137 

the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second  section  ;  the  fifth 
sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  this  group,  and 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  platoon  during   the  deployment. 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the'deployment  be  made,  on  the 
right,  left  or  centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of  fours  will 
alvvays  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other,  and  upon  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  even  ijumbered  file.  The  deploy- 
ments will  habitually  be  made  at  twenty  paces  interval ; 
but  if  a  greater  interval  be  required,  it  will  be  indicated 
in  the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so  near 
the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary,  the  en- 
tire company  will  be  extended  in  the  same  manner,  and 
according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the  deployment  of 
a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third  lieutenant  will  command 
the  fourth  section,  and  a  non-commissioned  oflicer  desig- 
nated for  that  purpese,  the  second  section ;  theJifth  ser- 
geants will  act  as  centre  guard  ;  the  file  closers  will  place 
themselves  ten  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite 
their  places  in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second  lieu- 
tenant will  each  have  a  bugler  near  him. 

To  deploy  by  thefianh. 

37.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain  shall 
wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  flank,  holding  the  first  platoon  in 
reserve,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  shirmhhers.  2.  By  the  right  /lank 
— take  intervals.     3.   Marcu,   {or  douhle  quick — March.) 

iJ8.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieutenants 


l')S  SKIRMISH    DraLL    AXD    BAYOKET   EXEROISE. 

will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces  behind  the 
centres  of  the  first  and  second  sections  of  the  second  pla- 
toon ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  pace  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon  ;  the  third  serge- 
ant, as  soon  as  he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  right 
of  the  front  rank  of  the  same  platoon.  The  captain  will 
indicate  to  him  the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct 
his  march.  The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
IVos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself 
on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant  will  re- 
main on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third  lieuten- 
ants will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind  the  left  group 
of  their  respective  sections. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement;  the  left  group 
of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  as  soon  as  there  is 
room  on  its  right,  comforming  to  what  has  been  prescrib- 
ed, No.  26  ;  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  right  group,  to  conduct  it ;  the  second  group 
will  halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  one  on  its  left,  the  third 
group  at  twenty  paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the 
right.  As  the  groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy, 
and  deploy  as  has  been  explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  w'ill  pay  particular  attention 
to  the  successive  deployments  of  the  groups,  keeping  near 
the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as  to  rectify  any  errors  which 
may  be  committed.  When  the  deployment  is  completed, 
they  will  place  themselves  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  cen- 
tre ef  tkeir  sections,  as  has  been  heretofore  prescribed. 


SHBIlMiSn    DRILL    AND    B.VTONET    HXERGISE.  13§ 

The  non-commissioned  officers  will  also  place  themselves 
as  previously  indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  connnencos,  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move  it  as 
indicated,  Xo.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  substituting  left  flank  for 
right  flank. 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deplo}'  the  company 
upon  the  centre  of  the  platoons,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  platoon — an  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right  and 
left  flank — take  intervals.  3.  March  {or  double  piick — 
March.) 

• 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  ofllcers  and  non-commis- 
sioned oflicers  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed, 
No.  38. 

46.  At  the  second  command,  the    first  lieutenant  wil 
place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  ihc  right  section  of 
the  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant  behind  the  right 
group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to  the  lelt,  the  group 
on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will  stand  fast.  The  two 
sections  will  move  oft"  in  opposite  directions ;  the  third 
sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  file  to 
conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant  on  the  right  of  Ihe  left  file. 
The  two  groups  nearest  that  which  stands  fast,  will  each 
halt  at  twenty  paces  from  this  group,  and  each  of  the  oth- 
er gfroups  will  halt  »t  twenty-  paces  from  the  group  which 


140  BUrRJUSH    PRILL   AND   BATONBT   BXBRCISE. 

is  in  rear  of  it.     Each  group  will  deploy  as  heretofore  pre- 
scribed, No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants,  will  direct  the  move- 
ment, holding  themselves  always  abreast  of  the  group 
which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be  mado 
on  any  named  group  whatsoever ;  in  this  case^  the  fifth 
sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group  indicated, 
and  the  deployment  will  be  made  according  to  the  princi- 
ples heretofore  prescribed. 

60.  The  entire  company  may  he  also  deployed,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles. 

To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a  line 
of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to  tke  principle* 
prescribed  for  deployments, 

62.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is  at  a 
halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to  the  left, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  Bif  the   left  Jlanh,  {so  inany  2^(^ce8),   extend  intsrvaU. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

53.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  group  on  the  right  will 
stand  fast,  all  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
each  group  will  extend  its  interval  to  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance by  thecaeans  indicated,  No.  40.  * 

54.  The  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to  preserve 
between  each  other  the  distance  of  five  paces,  unless  the 
satur«  ©f  the  ground  should  render  it  necessary  tliat  they 


SEIBMISU    DRlJ.L    ANU    BAYOXfcf    F.XtRClSE.  I4l 

should  close  nearer,  in  order  to  keep  in  sight  of  each  other. 
The  intervals  reler  to  the  spaces  between  the  groups,  and 
re>t  to  the  distances  betw'een  the  men  in  each  group.  The 
intervals  will  be  taken  from  the  right  or  left  man  of  the 
neighboring  group. 

56.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the  front, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the  right,  he 
will  command: 

1.   On  the  left   group  {to  many  paces),   extend  inM-vals, 
2.  M-xncii  {ov  double  qtiick — March.) 

5*5.  The  loft  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  contin- 
ue to  march  to  the  point  of  direction  ;  the  other  groups 
throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and  taking  the  double 
quick  step,  will  open  their  intervals  to  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance, by  the  means  indicated,  No.  25,  conforming  also  to 
what  is  prescribed.  No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the  line, 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that  one 
company  or  platoon  should  occupy'  a  line  which  had  been 
previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  «f  the  company  or 
platoon  which  isto  retire  will  fall  successively  to  the  rear 
as  they  are  relieved  by  the  extension  of  the  intervals. 

To  close  intervals^ 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals,  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
deployments. 

60.  If  the  line   of  skirmishers  be   halted,  and  ths  cap- 


14.2.  SKIttMISII    DKILIi    ANU    BAVONET   KXEUCISE, 

tain  should  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the  left,  he  will  coui- 
manil : 

1.   Z?v   th-^   left  Jlank  {no    many   paces)    dose    inlervalt, 
2.  March  {or  doulle quick— '}iI.j\.vi.ch.) 

61.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  will  stand 
fast,  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left  and  close  to  the 
prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to  ih-e  enemy  as  it 
attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  captain  wiU 
command : 

1.    On  the   left  fp'oup  {so   many   paces)  clo^e    intercaU^ 
2.  Marsh  (or  double  qHicfc— March.) 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will  contin-  , 
ue  to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously  indicated  ;  the 
other  groups,   advancing  the  right  shoulder,  will  close  ta 
the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced  to  th<e  prescribed 
distance.  , 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  riglit,  or  o-u  tht>  centre, 
according  to  the  same  principles. 

G5.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to  reiu- 
foFce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two  companies 
to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  previously  occupied 
by  one,  the  new  company  will  deploy  so  as  to  finish  its 
movement  at  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  it  is  to  occu- 
py, and  the  men  will  successively  move  upon  that  lino,  as 
they  sliall  be  unmasked  by  the  mon  of  the  old  company. 
The  reserves  of  the  two  companies  will  unite  behind  the 
centre  of  the  line. 


.nKIRMISII    UUU.L    and    liAYONKT    K  XKIUMSI- .  U^f 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

6G.  When  a  company  of  ?kirmidicrs  is  to  bo  relieved, 
the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  intention,  which  he  will 
immediately  communicate  to  his  first  and  second  lieuten- 
ants. 

67.  The  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment  for- 
xvard,  so  as  to  finish  the  movement  at  about  twenty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  line. 

C8.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new  compa- 
ny, by  command  of  their  captain,  will  advance  rapidly  a 
few  paces  beyond  th6  old  line  at  halt ;  the  new  line  being 
established,  the  old  company  will  assemble  on  its  reserve, 
taking  care  not  to  get  into  groups  of  fours  until  they  are 
beyond  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

(59.  If  the  skirmishers  to  bo  relieved,  are  marching  in 
retreat,  the  company  thrown  out  to  relieve  them  will  de- 
ploy by  the  fiank,  as  i)rescribed.  No.  38,  and  following. 
The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire  with  order, 
and  having  passed  the  new  line,  thej  will  form  npnn  the 
reserve^ 

Atjticlk  Seconb. 

To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line. 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company,  deployed  as  skirmish- 
ers, is  marching  by  the  front,  the  guide  will  be  habitually 
in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication  to  this  effect  need 
ha  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  on  the  contrary  it  be  in- 


144  SKIRMISH    DRILI.   AND   BAYONET   EXKRCISK. 

tended  that  tbe  directing  guide  should  be  on  the  right,  or 
left,  the  command  guide  right,  or  guide  I'^ft,  will  be  given 
immediately  after  that  of  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to  ad- 
Tance,  will  command ; 

1.  Foricard.    2.  March   (or  dotihle  quick — March.) 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  greatest 
rapidity  by  the  chief  of  sections,  and  in  case  of  need,  by  the 
sergeants.  This  rule  is  general,  whether  the  skirmishers 
march  by  the  front  or  by  the  flank. 

73.  At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will  move 
briskly  on  the  line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the  second  on  the 
left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  more  to  the 
front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction,  will  move  on 
to  the  jx>int  indicated  to  him,  the  skirmishers  will  hold 
themselves  aligned  on  this  guide,  and  preserve  their  inter- 
vals toward  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately  behind 
their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their  movements. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintendence  to 
the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he  Avill 
comraniand  : 

IlAtT. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line  will  halt. 
The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectifj'  any  irregulari- 
tv  in  the  alignment  and  -intervals,  and  after  taking  every 


SKIRMIJ^H    DRILL   AND   BATONBT    SXERCISK.  145 

possible  advantage  which  the  ground  may  oflfer  for  pro- 
tecting the  men,  they,  with  the  three  sergeants  in  the  line, 
viil  retire  to  their  proper  places  in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers  in 
retreat,  will  command  : 

1.  Jn  retreat.     I.  March  (or  double  quick — March. 

SO.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will  more 
on  the  line  as  prescribed,  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will  face 
about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear,  conforming  to 
the  principles  prescribed.  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exertion 
to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat,  the 
captain  will  command  : 

Halt. 

8-J.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishei's  will  halt,  and  im- 
mediately face  to  the  front. 

85.  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides,  will  each 
conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  7S. 

To  chang^e  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  cf  skirmishers  shall  wish 
to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Right  tcTt eel.     2.  Mkv.(TSi{(si'  double  quick — Mauok.) 


T46  SKrRMf:;H  BRir.i  aw  bayonet  exep.\;i-;e. 

87.  At  the  eominand  march,  the  right  guide  will  mark 
time  in  his  place  ;  the  left  guide  will  move  in  a  circle  to 
the  right,  and  that  ho  may  properly  regulate  his  morc- 
ments,  will  occa-jionally  east  his  eyes  to  the  right,  so  as  to 
observe  the  di'fction  of  the  line,  and  tiie  nature  of  the 
ground  to  be  passed  over.  The  centre  guide  will  also 
inarch  in  a  circle  to  the  right,  and  in  order  to  conform  his 
movements  to  the  general  direction,  will  take  care  that  his 
fite"""' are  only  h.i.lf  the  length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on 
t'      Joft 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of  their 
steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank,  being  less 
as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as  they  are  re- 
moved from  it ;  they  will  often  look  to  the  marching  flank^ 
fio  as  to  preserve  the  direction  and  their  intervals.  . 

89.  When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to  re- 
sume the  direct  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Foricard.     2.  Marod. 

90.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  line  willcease  to  wheel, 
and  the  skirmi.<hers  will  move  direct  to  the  front;  the  cen- 
tre guide  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated 
to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in  place 
of  moving  it  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command,  the  line  will  halt. 

93.  A  changt"  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made  ac- 
cording to  the  ?ame  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 


\  SKlIlKISfl  «)RILIi   AND   BATONKT   EXERCISE.  147 

# 

y-l.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  will 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  bj  the  same 
c^^mmands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance;  for  example, 
if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left,  now  become 
the  right,  he  will  command  :  1.  Left  ivli eel.  2.  MARcn. 
At  the  command  halt,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the 
cnemv. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  lino,  the  captain  should 
wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will,  when  he 
judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently,  command  ; 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March. 
To  inarch  by  the  flank. 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishera  to  march  by 
the  right  flank,  will  command  : 

1.  Bi/thcriffhJlanJc.     2.  MAncfi  {or  double  r/vick — MARfn.) 

97.  At  the  first  ccmmand,  the  three  sergeants  will  place 
themselves  on  the  Hne. 

98.  At  the  command  mnrck,  the  skirmishers  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  move  off";  the  right  guide  will  place  him- 
self by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  on  the  right  to  conduct 
liim,  and  will  march  on  the  point  indicated  ;  each  skir- 
misher will  take  care  to  follow  exactly  in  the  direction  of 
the  one  immediately  preceding  him,  and  preserve  his  dis- 
tance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left  flank^ 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  com- 
asands,    substituting'  left  for   ri'jkf  ;  Wi?  l.i't   g-uide  wil! 


148  SKIRMISH    DRILL   AND   BAtONET   EXERCIIB. 

place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  to  conduct 
him. 

100.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  them,  he  will  command : 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt  and 
face  to  the  enemy.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed,  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements  of 
the  line,  and  be  held  always  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to  second  its  opera- 
tions. 

103-  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to  march 
it  in  advance,  he  will  command  :  1.  Platoon,  forward. 
2.  Guide  left.  3.  March.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  it 
in  retreat,  he  will  command  :  1.  In  retreat.  2.  March. 
8.  Guide  right.  At  the  command  halt,  it  will  re-face  to 
the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  underLtand  that  the 
elgnals  or  commands,  such  ix^  forward,  mean  that  the  skir- 
mishers shall  march  on  the  enemy  ;  in  retreat,  that  they 
shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  flank,  that  the  men 
must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may  be  fheir  po- 
sition. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
the  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the  right 
(or  left)  he  will  command:  1.  By  file  right  (or  left)  2. 
MaIvCh.  These  movements  will  be  executed  bv  the  signali 
Xes.  11  and  I.'), 


ffiriaMKH    DRILL    AKB    BATONBT    EZERCISR.  l40 

Article  Third. 

The  firinga. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

To  fir  eat  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  bo  executed,  the  captain  will 
command : 

Commence — FiRINO. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  men  of  the 
front  rank  will  commence  firing  ;  they  .will  reload  rapid- 
ly, and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  fire  again.  During 
this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  come  to  a  ready, 
and  as  soon  as  their  respective  file  leaders  hare  leaded, 
they  will  also  fire  and  reload.  The  men  of  each  fire  will 
thus  continue  the  firing,  conforming  to  this  principle,  that 
the  one  or  the  other  shall  always  hare  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to  aim 
with  accuracy;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor  to  esti- 
mate correctly  the  distances  between  themselves  and  the 
enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  deliver  their  fire 
with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  reloading,  unless  protected  by  accidents  in  the 
ground. 

To  fire  marching. 

111.  This  fire  will  bo  executed  by  the  nam*  a^raroandg 
as  1%«  fir^  at  a  halt. 


150  SKIRMISH    DRILL   AND    BAy0NET  EXERCISE. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing,  if  the  line  be 
advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt,  fire, 
and  reload  before  throwing  himself  forward.  The  rear 
rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  after 
passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man, 
will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select  his  object,  and  fire  when 
his  front  rank  man  has  loaded  ;  the  fire  will  thus  continue 
to  be  executed  by  each  file  ;  the  skit-mishiirs  will  keep 
united,  and  endeavor  as  much  as  po.ssible  to  preserve  the 
general  direction  of  the  alignment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  command 
commence  Jiring,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will  halt, 
face  to  the  enemy,  §re,  and  then  reload  whilst  moving  to 
the  rear  j  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue 
to  march,  and  halt  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond  his  front 
rank  man,  face  about,  come  to  a  ready,  and  fire  when  his 
front  rank  man  has  passed  him  in  retreat  and  loaded ;  after 
which  he  will  move  to  the  rear  and  reload  ;  the  front  rank 
man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to  the  rear,  will 
halt  ten  or  twen#)'  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  face  to  the 
enemy,  load  his  piece  and  fire,  conforming  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed ,  the  firing  will  thus  be  continued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank,  at 
the  command,  commence  Jlring ,  the  front  rank  manof  eve- 
ry  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one  pace  forward,  halt, 
and  fire;  the  rear  rank  man  will  continue  to  move  for- 
ward. As  soon  as  the  front  rank  man  has  fired,  he  will 
place  himself  briskly  behind  his  rear  rank  man  and  reload 
whilst  marching.  When  he  has  loaded,  the  rear  rank  man 
will,  in  his  turn,  step  one  pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire  ; 
and   returning^  to   the  ranks,    will   place  himself  behind 


SKIRMI?!!    DRILL    AND    BAYONET    SXERCISE.  151 

his  front  rank  man  ;  the  latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in 
the  same  niannor,  observing  the  same  principles.  At  the 
comrmnd,  ceanefirinj,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  re- 
take their  original  positions,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marchincj  by  the  loft  flank,  the 
fire  will  be  executed  accordinc^  to  the  same  principles,  but 
in  this  case,  it  will  be  the  rear  rank  men  who  will  fire  first. 

116.  The  following  ruks  will  be  observed  in  the  cases  to 
which  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  marching 
by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Forxcard — March,  it  will 
be  the  mbn  whosj  pieces,  are  loaded,  without  regard  to 
the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong,  who  will  move 
to  the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces  have  been  discharg- 
ed, will  remain  in  their  places  to  load  them. before  moving 
forward,  and  the  firing  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the 
principles  prescribed,  No.  112. 

118.  If  the  line  be  fii-ing  cither  at  a  halt,  advancing,  or 
whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  command.  In  re- 
treat— March,  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded  will  re- 
main faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire  in  this  position; 
the  men  whose  pieces  are  discharged  will  retreat  loading 
them,  and  the  fire  will  be  continued  agreeably  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed,  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  liiie  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at  a  halt, 
advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command,  By  the  rijlit 
(or  lej't)JIanh — March,  the  men,  whose  pieces  arc  loaded, 
will  step  one  pace  out  of  the  general  alignment,  fact  to  the 
enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position  ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are 
unloaded  will  face  to  the  right  (or  left)  and  march  in 
the  direction  indicated.     The   men  who   stepped   out   of 


152  SKIRMISH   BRILL    A:sD    TATO'BT    EXERCI6E. 

the  ranks  will  place  themselves,  immediatelj  after  firing, 
upon  the  general  direction,  and  in  rear  of  their  front  or 
rear  rank  men,  as  the  case  may  lie.  The  fife  will  be 
continued  according  to  the  principles  prescribed,   No  114. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their  pieces 
whilst  marching  ;  but  they  will  be  enjoined  to  halt  always 
an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charging  cartridge  and 
priming. 

121.  They  should  be  practised  to  fire  and  load  kneeling, 
lying  down  and  sitting,  and  much  liberty  should  be  allowed 
in  these  exercises,  in  order  that  they  may  be  executed  in 
the  manner  found  to  be  most  convenient.  Skirmishers 
should  be  cautioned  not  to  forget  that,  in  whatever  posi- 
tion they  may  load,  it  is  important  that  the  piece  should 
be  placed  upright  before  ramming,  in  order  that  the  entire 
charge  of  powder  may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same  rank 
should  not  all  fire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the  same  file 
should  be  particular  that  one  or  the  other  of  them  be  aU 
ways  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the  skir- 
mishers should  seize  on  every  advantage  which  the  ground 
may  present  for  arresting  the   enemy  as  long  as  possible., 

124.  At  the  signal  to  cease  firing,  the  captain  will  see 
that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed;  but  the  men  who  may 
not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the  line  be  marching,  it  will 
continue  the  movement;  but  the  man  of  each  file  who 
happens  to  be  in  front,  M'ill  wait  until  the  man  in  rear  shall 
be  abreast  with  him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing,  at  tho 
♦ommand/irt?/,  the  line  will  re-form  upon   the  ^kirmisUevs 


AKIRUISU    DRILL    i.N'D    BATQ^'ET    EZEROISB.  Ibo 

who  are  in  front ;  when  the  line  ia  retreating,   upon  the 
skirmisherB  who  are  in  rear. 

126.  Officers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  posaiblo 
Tigilance  over  a  line  of  skirmishers;  in  battle  they  should 
neither  carry  a  rifle  or  fowling  piece.  In  all  the  firings, 
they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants,  should  see  that  order  and 
silence  are  preserved,  and  that  the  skirmishers  do  not 
wander  imprudently  ;  they  should  especially  caution  them 
to  be  calm  and  collected  ;  not  to  fire  until  they  distinctly 
perceive  the  objects  at  which  they  aim,  and  are  sure  that 
those  objects  are  within  proper  range.  Skirmishers  should 
take  advantage  promptly,  and  with  intelligence,  of  all 
eheltcr,  and  of  all  accidents  of  the  ground,  to  conceal 
themselves  from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  in  protect 
themselves  from  his  fire.  It  may  often  happen  that  inter. 
vals  are  momentarily  lost  when  several  men  near  each  other 
find  a  common  shelter  ;  but  when  they  quit  this  position, 
they  should  immediately  resume  their  intervals  and  their 
places  in  line,  so  that  they  may  not,  by  crowding,  needless- 
ly expose  themselves  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 


Article  Fourth. 

THE  RALLY. 

To  form  column, 

127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers,  is  rallied  in 
order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success ;  the  rallies 
are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets  fixed  ;  when  ordered 
to  rally,  the  gkirmishors  fix  bayonets  without  command. 


154  SKIRMISH    DRILL    AND    BAYONET    KXERflgE. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which  the  chief 
of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  circumstances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching*  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely  dis- 
turbed by  scattered  horsemen,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to 
fall  back  oji  the  reserve,  but  the  captain  will  cause  bayo- 
nets to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should,  however,  ad- 
vance to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand, rally  hy  fours.  The  line  will  halt,  if  marching,  and 
the  four  men  of  each  group  will  execute  this  rally  in  the 
following  manner  :  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  num- 
bered file  will  take  the  position  of  guard  again't  cavalry  ; 
the  rear  rank  man  of  the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take 
the  position  oi guard  agmmt  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to 
him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right  foot  of 
the  former,  and  parallel  to  it ;  the  front  fank  man  of  the 
odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file,  will  also 
place  themselves  back  to  back,  taking  a  like  position,  and 
between  the  two  men  alreadly  established,  facing  to  the 
right  and  left ;  the  right  feet  of  the  four  men  will  be 
brought  together,  forming  a  square  and  serving  for  mutu- 
al support.  The  four  men  in  each  group  will  come  to  a 
ready,  fire  as  occasion  may  oflfcr,  and  load  without  moving 
iheir  feet. 

130.  The  captains  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each  cause 
the  four  men  who  constitute  his  guard  to  form  square,  the 
men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him  and  the  bugler  to  place 
themselves  in  the  centre.  The  three  sergeants  will  each 
promptly  place  himself  in  the  group  nearest  him  in  the 
line  of  skirmishers. 

131.  When  ever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares  too 
weak,  but  should  wish  to  hold  his  position  by  strengthen- 

n^:  his  lin-v  h*  v  ill  ce;nmand  : 


SKIRMISH    BRILL    A!»   BAYONET    EXERCISS,  155 

Jially  hy  sections. 

132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will  more 
rapidly  on  the  centre  group  of  their  respective  sections, 
or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose  position  might  offer 
a  shelter,  or  other  paiticul.ir  advantage;  the  skirmishers 
will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run  on  this  group,  and  without 
distinction  of  numbers.  The  men  composing  the  group  on 
which  the  formation  is  made,  will  immediatel}'  form  square, 
as  heretofore  explained,  and  elevate  their  pieces,  the  bayo- 
nets uppermost,  in  order  to  indicate  the  point  on  which 
the  rally  is  to  be  made.  The  other  skirmishers,  as  they  ar- 
rive, will  occupy  and  fill  the  open  angular  spaces  between 
these  four  men,  .and  successiTcly  rally  around  this  first 
nucleus,  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  complete 
circle.  The  skirmishers  will  tjrke,  as  they  arrive,  the  po- 
sition of  charge  bayonet,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  more 
elevated,  and  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  position.  The 
movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior  ranks  will  fire  as 
occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving  their  feet. 

133.  The  captain  wifl  move  rapidly  with  his  guard, 
wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to  ob- 
serve that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence,  and  with  prompti- 
tude and  order ;  that  some  pieces  in  each  of  their  subdi- 
visions be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the  fire  is  directed 
on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be  most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will  form  in- 
to a  circle  around  its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmish- 
ers formed  ofmanv  platoon?,  should  judge  that  the  rally 


156  tKlRUlSe   DRILL  ANP  BAYONET  EXBaCISi;. 

by  sections  does  not  offer  sufficient  resistance,  he  will 
cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed,  and  for  this 
purpose,  will  command  :  ^ 

Rally  by  platoons^ 

137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  the  same  means,  as  the  rally  by 
sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoons  will  conform  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  sections. 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers  on  the 
reserve,  will  command  : 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

139.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will,  move  briskly  on 
the  reserve  ;  the  officer  who  commands  it  will  take  imme- 
diate steps  to  form  square  ;  for  this  purpose,  he  will  cause 
the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to  be  thrown  perpendicular- 
ly to  the  rear  ;  he  will  order  the  men  to  come  to  a  ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the  run, 
will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon  that  man  of  each 
group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the  section.  These 
groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally  toward  each  oth- 
er, and  in  such  manner  as  to  form  into  sections  with  the 
greatest  possible  rapidity  while  moving  to  the  rear  ;  the 
officers  and  sergeants  will  see  that  this  formation  is  made 
in  proper  order,  and  the  chiefs  will  direct  their  sections 
upon  the  reserve,  taking  care  to  unmask  it  to  the  right 
and  left.  As  the  skirmishers  arrive,  they  will  continue 
and  complete  the  formation  of  the  square  begun  by  the  re- 
serve, closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without  regard 
i«  their  place?  in  line  t  thoV  will  come  to  a  ready  without 


KIRVISB    DRir.I.   ANB   BATONEI   SIEF.CI8S.  IdT 

eommand,  and  fire  upon  the  enemy ;  which  will  also  be 
done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked  by  the  skir- 
mishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by  cavaly 
while  retreating,  its  chief  wiU  command  halt ;  at  this  com- 
mand,J,he  men  will  form  rapidly  into  a  compact  circle 
around  the  otficer,  who  will  re-form  his  section  and  resume 
the  march,  the  moment  be  can  do  so  with  safety. 

14'2.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and  effi- 
cient manner,  requires  coolness  and  activity  on  the  part 
of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment  of 
respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him  ;  as  soon 
as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself  beyond  the 
reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining  a  position  where 
he  may  defend  himsef  with  advantage,  or  by  returning  to 
the  corps  to  which  he  belongs.  For  this  purpose,  being  in 
square,  he  will  cause  the  company  to  break  into  column 
by  platoons  at  half-distanee  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Foi'ni  column.     2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  march,  each  platoon  will  dress  on 
its  centre,  and  the  platoon  which  was  facing  to  the  rear 
will  face  about  without  command.  The  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  theirj  respective  pla- 
toons, those  of  the  second  platoon  will  place  themselves  at 
half  distance  from  those  of  the  first,  counting  from  the 
rear  rank.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  captain  can 
move  the  column  in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge 
proppr. 


158  SKlEiHSH   DRILL   iJST)   BAYONET   EXERCISE. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand :  ' 

1.  In  retreat.     2.  March  (or  douhle  .^jucA;— March.  ) 

146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  immedi- 
ately face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the  opposite 
direction.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  in  motion,  the  captain 
will  command : 

3.  Guide  right  (or  left.) 

147.  He  wiU  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading  guide, 
the  guides  will  march  at  their  proper  distances,  and  the 
men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cavaly,  the  captain  will 
command : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt ;  the 
first  plotoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer  half  sec- 
tions of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown  perpendicularly  to 
the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and  third  fronts  of  the 
square.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  promptly  rectify 
any^irregularities  which  may  be  committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in  advancGj 
the  captain  will  command  : 

],  Form  column.     2.  March. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  174. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand ; 


^fMBMlSU    OTHtt    ANI>   BATUNEt    ElKRtTSE,  153 

1,  Forward.     2.  Mahgh    (or   doable   fjJtlck — March. ) 
Guide  left  (or   right.) 

lo3.  At  the  second  command,  the  calunui  will  move  for- 
ward, and  at  the  third  command,  the  nicii  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

lot.  Iftlic  captain  should  wish  the  column  to  gain 
;:;round  to  the  right  or  left,  ho  will  do  so  by  rapid  wheels 
to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and  for  tlii?  purpose,  will 
change  the  guide  whenever  it  maj  be  neces5ary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platnnn,  at  half  dis- 
tance, right  in  front,  the  captain  can  dci)lc)y  the  first  pla- 
toon as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already  ?xplained  ;  but 
if  it  should  be  the  wish  to  deploy  the  second  platoon  for- 
ward on  the  centre  file,  leaving  the  fir^t  platoon  in  reserve, 
he  will  command  : 

1.   Second  platoon — as  tikinnixhcrH.     '1.    On  the  centre  file — 
tftlce  intervals.     3.  March  (or  fZoi(6?c  quick — MAUcn.) 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
will  caution  his  platoon  ,  to  stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  sec- 
tions of  the  second  platoon  will  place  them.sclvcs  before 
the  centre  of  their  sections ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  placo 
himself  one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second  pla- 
toon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  right  sec- 
tion, ::ccond  platoon,  will  command  :  Section,  right  face  ; 
the  chief  of  the  left  secticn  :  Section,  left  face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  the-so  sections  will  move 
ott"  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having  unmasked  the 
the  fir'-'t  platoop,  the  chief  ff  fcct-ions  will  respectively 


160  »S.1KMISH    KDILL    ANB    B.VTOiiET   EXERCISK. 

command:  Jiy  the  left  flank — March,  and  By  the  right 
Jlank — March;  and  as  soon  as  the  sections  arrire  on  the 
alignment  of  the  first  platoon,  they  will  command  :  Jin 
«kirmisher8 — MAucn.  The  group  will  then  deploy  accord- 
ing to  prescribed  principles,  on  the  right  group  of  the  left 
section,  whicli  will  be  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the 
point  indicated. 

159.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment  made  by 
the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved  to  the  front  by 
the  means  above  stated,  and  haltea  after  passing  some  steps 
beyon  the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon  ;  the  deployment 
will  then  be  made  by  the  flank  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed. 

160.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, and  the  captain  should  wish  to  rally  them  on  the 
battalion,  he  will  command  : 

Rally  on  the,  battalion. 

IGl.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve 
no  matter  what  position  the  company  to  which  they  belong 
may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will  rapidly  unmask  the 
front  of  the  battalion,  directing   themselves  in  a  run  to- 
ward its  nearest  flank,  and  then  form  in  its  rear. 

162.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  beyond  the 
line  of  file  closers,  the  men  will  take  the  quick  step,  and 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section  will  re-form  his  sub- 
division, and  place  it  in  column  behind  the  wing  on  which 
it  is  rallied,  and  at  ten  paces  from  the  rank  of  file  closers. 
These  subdivisions  will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  of 
the  commander  of  the  battalion,   who  may,  if  he  thinks 


•)  ^^opcT,  throw  tliem  into  line  of  battl-  at  the  extremities  of 
the  line,  or  in  the  intervals  between  the  battalions. 

163.  If  man}'  platoons  shonid  be  united  behind  the  same 
^inp;  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter  whatsoever, 
they  shouW  be  fornaod  ahray«  into  cloce  column,  or  into 
ct>lamn  at  half  distancf. 

104.  V.'hen  a  battalion,  covcrod  by  a  company  of  skir- 
wiii-hers,  .«hall  be  formed  into  square,  the  platoooaand  sec- 
tions of  the  covering  company  will  be  directed  bj  their 
chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square,  which  will  be  opened  at 
the  angles  to  receive  the  skirmishers,  who  will  be  then 
formed  into  close  column  by  platoona  in  rear  of  the  first 
front  of  the  square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles  of  the 
square  from  being  opened,  the  pkirmi.'licri?  will  throw 
themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank  men,  the  right, 
knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the  piece  testing  on  the 
thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threatening  position.  A  part  may 
also  place  themselves  about  the  angles,  where  they  can 
render  good  service  by  defending  the  ?cctiuos  without  fire. 

166.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are  ral- 
lied be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the  skirmisher-- 
will  be  formed  into  cloee  column  by  platoon,  in  rear  of  the 
centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the  command.  Form 
«quarc — Mabch,  they  will  move  forward  and  close  on  thy 
buglers. 

107.  When  skirmishers  have  been  r.illicd  by  platoon  (»i 
section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be  wished 
to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will  be  marched 
by  the  flank  toward  the  intervals  on  the  wings,  and  be 
then  deplovod  so  at*  to  cover  the  front  of  the  battalion. 
6  '  ' 


I(t3  SKIKUISH   DRILL   A}M>    BATOMEX   SXHRCISK. 

168.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the  interior 
©f  squares  and  columns,  are  to  be  depToyed,  tkey  will  be 
inarched  oat  by  the  flanks,  and  then  thrown  forward,  as  is 
prescribed,  No.  157  ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  have  unmasked 
the  column  or  square,  they  will  be  deployed,  the  one  od 
the  right,  the  other  on  the  left  file. 

The  assmhly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  a3  skirmishers  will  bd  assem- 
bled when  there  is  no  longer  danger  of  being  disturbed  } 
the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  in  quick  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmishers  oa 
the  reserve,  will  command  ; 

Jiaaemhle  on  the  reterve. 

171.  At  this  eommand,  the  skirmishers  will  assemble  by 
groups  of  fours ;  the  front  rank  men  will  place  themselves 
behind  their  rear  rank  men  ;  and  caeh  groap  cf  foars  wiU 
direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where  each  will  take  its  proper 
place  in  the  ranks.  When  the  company  is  re-formed,  it 
will  rejoin  the  battalion  to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skismishers 
«n  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line,  either 
inarching  or  at  a  halt. 

175.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them  on  the 
centre  whilie  marching,  he  will  command : 

Asetmhle  ©u  the  centre, 

174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  continu© 
to  march  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  indicated ;  the 
front  rank  nxaa  of  the  directing  file  vnW  follow  the  guide, 


and  be  corered  by  hia  rear  rank  man ;  the  oth»r  two  com- 
radec  of  this  irroup.  and  likewise  thope  on  their  left,  will 
march  diagonally,  advancing  tlie  \-eft  shoulder  and  accele- 
rating the  gait,  so  as  to  re-form  the  groups  while  drawing 
nearer  and  nearer  the  directing  file;  the  men  of  the  right 
section  will  unite  in  (he  same  manner  into  groups,  and 
then  upon  the  directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  righ^ 
shoulder.  As  they  succesi'ivcly  unite  on  th«  centre,  tho 
men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  samo  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  io  retreat  will  alsa 
be  ejcecuted  a<vording  to  the  came  principles,  the  front 
rank  men  inarching  behind  their  rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  nklrraishers  at  a  halt,  and 
on  the  line  they  occupy,  the  captain  will  gire  the  same 
commands  ;  the  pkirmisherg  will  face  to  the  right  or  left, 
aopording  as  they  should  inarch  by  the  right  or  left  flank, 
re-form  the  groups  w  bile  marching,  and  thus  arrive  on  the 
file  which  ecrvcd  as  the  point  of  formation.  As  they  sue- 
ceesiTely  Ririre,  the  skirmiflhers  will  support  arm«. 


Article  Fii-TJf. 

T<'>  deploi/  a  battalion  a$  ihirmtHherft,  and  Io  rally  this  bat- 
talion. 

To  deploy  iha  battalion  ns  ekirmiihert. 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  ot  battle,  if  the  comman- 
irt<T  ?bou!d  wish  to  depley  it  on  tJie  right  of  the  eixth  com- 


pany,  holding  tbe  three  right  companies  in  reserve,  will  sig- 
nify hiri  intention  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  adjutant, 
and  also  to  the  major,  wlio  will  be  directed  to  take  charge 
of  the  reserve.  He  will  point  out  to  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel the  direction  he  wishes  to  give  the  line,  as  well  aa  the 
point  where  he  wishes  the  right  of  the  siztb  company  to 
rest,  and  to  the  commander  of  the  reserve  tbo  place  he 
may  wish  it  established. 

179.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  move  rapidly  in  front 
of  the  right  of  the  8ixth  company,  and  the  adjutant  in 
front  of  the  left  of  the  same  compacy.  The  commander 
of  tbe  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the  mat>nf»r  to  be  herc- 
ioafer  indicated. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  i^latoons — c?  skirmiihetf^, 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — tala:  intcrvah, 

3.  Map.CK  (or  double  quicJc) — Mabch. 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  fifth 
and  sixth  companies  v/ill  prepare  to  deploy  the  first  pla- 
toons of  their  respective  companies,  the  sixth  on  its  right, 
the  fifth  on  its  left  file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face  it  to 
the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh  and  eight  com- 
panies will  face  ihcir  respective  companies  to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  com- 
mence. The  platoons  of  the  tifth  and  sixth  companies 
will  deploy  forward ;  the  right  guide  of  the  sixth  will 
march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated  to  him  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel. 

]8i.  The  company   which   ha?  faci>d   ^o   the  rig-bt.  and 


aUo  the  companies  uhich  bare  faced  to  the  left  will  march 
straight  forward.  The  fourth  company  will  take  an  in- 
terval of  one  hundred  paces  counting  from  the  left  cf  the 
fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its  first  platoon  on  its  left 
file.  The  seventh  and  eighth  companies  will  each  take  au 
Interval  of  one  hundred  paces,  counting  from  the  first  file 
of  the  company,  which  is  immediately  on  its  right ;  and  the 
chiefs  of  these  comjianies  will  afterward  deploy  their  first 
platoons  on  the  right  file. 

186.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  filee  on  which  the  de- 
ployment is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  themselves 
toward  the  outer  man  of  the  neighboring  company,  al- 
ready deployed  as  tkirmishers  ;  or  if  the  company  has  not 
finished  its  deployment,  they  will  judge  carefullv  the  dis- 
tance which  ma3-^till  be  required  to  place  all  these  filesin 
line,  and  will  then  march  on  the  i)oint  thus  marked  out. 
The  companies,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  thcni- 
aelvcs  on  those  already  deployed.  , 

186.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  adjutant  will  follow  the 
deployment,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on  the  left; 
the  movement  concluded,  they  will  place  themselves  near 
the  colonel. 

1S7.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  he  established 
in  echellon  in  the  following  manner  :  the  reserve  of  tlj<» 
sixth  company  will  be  placed  one  liundred  and  fifty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  right  of  this  company  ;  the  reserves  of  the 
fourth  and  fiflli  companies,  unined,  opposite  the  centre  of 
their  line  of  skirmi.-iherp,  and  thirty  paces  in  advance  of 
the  reserve  of  the  sixth  company  ;  the  reserves  of  tlie 
seventh  and  eighth  companies,  also  united,  opposite  the 
<rntrc  of  their  line  of  .'lji;j!ii?h."r?,  and    thittv    paofp  far- 


ther   to  the  rear  than  the  reserve  of  the  eixth  compaay. 

188.  The  major  comniandir.g  the  companies  compoeiug 
the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the  colonel  to  that 
effect,  will  march  these  companiee  thirty  paces  to  the 
rear,  and  will  then  deploy  them  into  column  by  company, 
at  half  distance  ;  after  which,  he  will  conduct  the  column 
to  the  point  which  shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

189.  The  colonel  will  have  a  pjeneral  superintendence  of 
the  movement ;  and  when  it  it  finished,  will  move  to  a 
point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his  view  may  best  em- 
brace all  the  parts,  in  order  to  diiect  their  movements. 

190.  If,  instead  cf  deploying  forward,  it  be  desired  to 
deploy  by  the;  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth  companies  will  be 
moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve  paces,  halttd,  and  deploy- 
ed by  the  flank,  the  one  on  the  right  the  other  on  the  left 
file,  by  the  means  already  indicated.  Each  of  the  other 
companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank;  and  as  soon  as - 
the  last  file  of  the  .company;  next  toward  the  direction, 
phall  have  taken  its  interval,  it  will  be  moved  upon  the  line 
established  by  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies,  halted  and 
deployed. 

191.  In  the  proceeding  example,  it  has  been  eupposcd 
that  the  battalion  was  in  order  of  battle  ;  but  if  in  column, 
it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  by  the  same  command* 
and  according  to  the  same  principles. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  ma.de  fortcard,  the  di- 
rectino"  company,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be  moved 
ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head  of  the  column, 
and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of 
the  other  companies  will  take  its  interval  to  the  right  or 
Irft.  and  detploy  aff  °^oob  9^  it  is  tak«T». 


ffivtn?Mas  vtAL  Jijct  9k  f  SMI  E:siR«nT.  16V 

193.  If  the  deployment  in  to  be  made  by  the  flank,  the 
directing  company  Tvill  be  moved  in  the  same  manner  to 
the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and  will  then  be  halted 
and  deploy«!d  by  the  flank  on  the  file  indicated.  Each  of 
the  other  companies  will  be  marched  by  the  flank,  and  when 
its  interval  is  taken,  will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted,  and 
deployed  as  foon  as  the  company  next  towards  the  direction 
shall  have  finij-hed  its  dt-ployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribe!  to  place  the  reserves  in 
echellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a  rally, 
be  able  to  protect  themselves  without  injuring  each  other; 
and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  companies  have  been 
united,  in  order  to  diminish  the  number  of  the  ecbellons, 
and  to  increase  their  capacity  for  resisting  cavalrr. 

195.  Theechellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend  from 
right  to  left,  but  they  may,  oh  an  indication  from  the  colo- 
nel to  the  effect,  be  posted  on  the  same  principle,  so  as  to 
descend  from  left  to  right. 

196.  When  the  color-company  is  to  be  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers,  the  color,  without  its  guard,  will  be  detached,  and 
remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  movements 
prescribed  for  a  company,  to  be  executed  by  the  battalion, 
and  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  signals.  When 
he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion,  he  will  cause  the  rally  on 
the  battalion  to  be  sounded,  and  will  so  dispose  his  reserve 
as  to  protect  this  movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be  ral- 
lied ia  pqutrts  ©n  their  resper live  rwerres :  each  rsfervf 


168  SXJPvMtSH    DRILL   A^D    BATUNET    BXBRCI68, 

of  tw"0  contipfuous  companies  will  form  the  first  front  of 
the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the  sections  on  the  flanks ; 
the  skirmishers  who  arrive  first  will  complete  the  lateral 
fronts,  and  the  last  the  fourth  front.  The  officers  and  ser- 
geants will  superintend  the  rally  ;  as  fast  as  the  men  ar- 
rive, they  will  form  them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard 
to  height,  and  cause  them  to  face  outward. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of  square 
will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalry  may  allow 
for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by  marching  upon  the 
battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing  an  advantageous  position ; 
to  this  end  each  of  the  squares  will  be  formed  into  column, 
and  march  in  this  order  ;  and  if  threatened  anew,  it  will 
halt,  and  again  form  itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  captains  successively  arrive  near  the  battal- 
ion-reserve, each  will  re-form  as  promptly  as  possible,  and 
without  regard  to  designation  or  number,  take  place  in 
the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  companies  already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if  it- 
self threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  companies  in 
marching  toward  it  will  place  themselves  promptly  in  the 
sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  jiiarch  on  the  squares. 


BAYONET  EXEltriSR. 


1.  lu  teaching  the  men  these  exercises,  the  instructor 
fihould  cause  them  to  form  in  one  rank,  with  an  interval 
of  four  paces  between  each  man,  so  that  in  the  execution 
of  the  movements,  they  may  not  come  in  conflict  with  each 
other. 

2.  The  instructor  seeing  the  recruits  in  the  proper  po- 
sition, and  at  alight  infantry  shoulder,  will  command: 

Take- Gvxnx).     {Fig.  1.) 

One  time  and  txco  motions. 

3.  (First  motion. )  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  keep- 
ing the  heela  together  ;  turn  the  left  toe  square  to  the 
front,  the  feet  forming  a  right  angle,  and  at  the  same  time 
raise  a  little  the  piece  with  the  right  hand. 

4.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  about  eigh- 
teen inches  backward,  the  right  heel  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  left,  the  body  erect  and  perpenriicular  on  both  legs, 
no  that  the  weight  of  the  body  is  divided  equally  between 
them,  the  knees  bent,  and  take  the  position  of  charge 
bayonet. 

5.  The  instructor  wishing  to  allow  the  recruits  a  rest 
when  on  guard,  will  first  command  : 

Shoulder— \u-H9. 
Ci.  At  this  command,  spring  the  muekct  up  smartly  into 
the  h'.lloiv  of  the  ri|jlit    ^llOulf^»^.  and    ret.;'r.e  (he  poHitioH 


7,  The  instructor  will  then  command  Rrst,  at  which 
command  the  piece  will  be  brought  to  the  position  oi'order 
arms,  and  the  men  are  no  longer  required  to  remain  im- 
movable or  to  preserve  silence. 
Fig.  1. 


fOdiiion  of  the  (Juard. 

8.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  position  of 
guard,  will  first  bring  the  squad  to  ativntlon,  and  com- 
mand, Shott^cfvr  — Akm»,  wUioU  boing  done,  ha  will  com- 
isand  : 


Take — Gtaru. 

9.  At  this  command,  raise  the  piece  quicklj  with  the 
right  hand,  seizing  it  with  the  left,  at  the  height  of  the 
right  breast,  and  at  the  same  time  grasp  the  small  of  tho 
etock  with  the  right  hand,  taking  the  guard,  a?  before  ex- 
plained. 

DEVELOP  AN'D  VOLTS. 

10.  The  recruit  being  in  the  pof^ition  of  guard,  the  in- 
structor will  command: 

Z)crc7o/»— March.     (Fij.  2.) 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

11.  At  the  command  mrrrcA,  advance  quicklv  the  left 
foot  about  twelve  inch(.'s,  the  left  leg  vertical  and  the  knee 
perpendicular  with  the  ankle  ;  the  right  foot  flat  on  the 
ground,  the  right  kg  extended  and  straight,  the  body  re- 
maining erect. 

12.  At  the  command  Guahd,  re-take  the  position  of 
guard  by  bringing  back  the  left  foot  to  its  former  position. 

13.  The  instructor  will  then  command: 

Advance — Makch. 
On*  time  and  tico  mottom. 

14.  (First  motion. )  At  the  commaad  marcA,  carry  the 
right  foot  against  the  left  heel. 

15.  (Second  motion. )  Advance  the  left  foot  nbnut  eigh- 
teen inches,  preserving  the  po&ition  of  the  piece  and  the 
body. 

/?e^rca«— Makoh. 

9r«  ''*n*  mnm  '»^«  m9''.»f>t. 


172 


SRfKMIsin    »RjLl>    AM»    i<ATO.N.Sr    HXSKVISU. 


16.  (First  motion. )  Bring  back  the  left  foot  agaicst  iha 
rij^ht. 

17.  (Second  motion.)    Carry   the   right  foot  eighteen 
inches  to  the  lea.". 

/V^.  2. 


Dcveloj). 
One  pace  to  right — March. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

18.  ( First  motion. )  Carry  th(5,ri^hfc  foot  about  eighteen 
inches  t©  tfee  ri«rht  in  thp  same  directiea. 


lilHUttH    DRILL    aJSP  BaTOXET    CX£hil€S.  K-i 

10,  (Second  motion,)  Bring  Immediately  the  leftfoo: 
the  game  (listfloce,  and  to  the  ««*me  reiative  position  to  ib' 
rijflit,  that  it  before  occupied. 

One  pace  to  (he  /c//— Mauck. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

20.  (First  motion.)  Carry  the  left  foot  about  cigTitocn 
inches  to  the  left. 

21.  (Second  motion. )  Bring- back  immediately  the  rigKt 
foot  to  it/*  distance,  and  in  its  position- 

Jiight—V  uLT. 

Oi'C  titnc  and  one  nioiin-.u 

I'l.  Turn  to  the  right  on  the  toe  of  the  left  foot,  (tl.«, 
ripht  f(»ot  dcscribinjj  the  quarter  of  an  arc  of  a  circle  ; 
plant  the  right  foot  in  its  proper  place  and  distance,  kceii- 
u\%  tlio  piece  in  the  position  of  guard. 

Left — Volt. 

23.  Turn  to  the  left  on  the  toe  of  the  left  foot,  (tt- 
right  foot  describing  the  quarter  of  an  arc  of  a  circle)  , 
plant  the  rigfht  foot  in  its  proper  place  and  distance,  kee;i- 
ing  the  piece  in  the  position  of  gnrird. 

'ii.  The  instructor  should  explain  to  the  men  that  ther o 
movements  are  the  same  as  right  or  left  face  in  squad  dnll, 
except  that  the  position  of  guard  is  always  maintained. 

R'ght  rear — Vor.T. 

2j.  At  thif  command,  turn  on  the  toe  of  the  left  fo€f, 
(the  right  foot  dccfcribiug  the  half  on  an  arc  of  a  circle- 


prant  the  foot  in  its  proper  place  and  distance;  keeping  the 
pice©  in  the  position  of  guard. 

Left  rear— YoLT, 

26.  Tnrn  on  the  too  of  the  left  foot,  (the  right  foot  de- 
acriblng  the  half  of  an  arc  of  a  circle,)  plant  the  foot  in  its 
proper  place  and  distance,  keeping  the  piece  in  the  posi- 
tion h{  guard. 

27.  In  all  the  volts,  the  instructor  shall  be  careful  to  ex- 
plain to  the  men,  that  when  the  word  right,  is  used,  they 
must  carry  the  right  foot,  in  turnins:,  in  the  directien  of 
their  rear,  and  when  Uft  is  used,  in  the  direction  of  their 
front.  In  the  right  or  left  rear  volt,  the  recruit  faces  qoicft- 
ly  to  tho  full  rear,  as  in  ahoutface. 

1.  Pasaade — 2.   March. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

26.  (First  motion.)  Throw  the  right  foot  eighteen  incb^ 
es  in  fVont  of  the  left,  the  inside  of  it  kept  to  the  front. 

20.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  quickly  the  left  foot  eigh- 
teen inches  in  front  of  the  right,  preserving  the  guard. 

1.  Leap  to  the  rear — 2.  March. 

0/jft  time  and  twa  nioiiofis, 

30.  Threw  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  left  Tog,  an^ 
spring  backward  as  far  as  possible,  lighting  on  the  toes 
and  preserving  the  guard. 

COMBINATION  OF  THE  MOVEMENTS, 
ai.  "When  the  men  are  perfectly  acquainted  with  th-e 
above  movements,  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to  exe* 
t'uie  the  various  movements  put  together,  at  the  com- 
suiaQ    March,      Example : 


SKIRMISH    DMLL    A.SD   BATOSBT  BXBB6ISS.  17» 

I.  Hight  Tear  voJt  and  develop— 2^  Mi.ECa. 

32.  At  this  command  the  men  will  execute  what  hai 
been  prescribed  in  right  rear— Volt  No.  25,  and  after  fao 
ing  to  the  rear  they  will  extend  the  left  foot  as  haa  been 
prescribed  in  Dbvblop  No.  11. 

1.  Left  rear  voU  and  develop — 2.  Marck« 

33.  At  tho  command  march,  first  execute  aa  has  beea 
prescribed  in  No.  26,  then  execute  what  is  prescribed  in 
No.  11,  preBcrring  the  guard  ia  both  cases. 

1.  Paimde  audd€velop^2.    MinCH. 

34.  At  the  command  march,  first  execute  what  has  beea 
prescribed  in  Passabb  No.  28,  and  then  what  is  prescribed 
in  No  11. 

1.-  Right  rear  volt,  paaaaJe,  and  develop — 2.  Marcb. 

One  time  and  three  motio»f, 

35.  (First  motion.)  Execute  what  has  been  prescribel 
for  right  rear  voltj  No.  27. 

3G.  Second  motion. )  Execute  what  has  been  prescribed 
for  Passadk  No.  28. 

37.  (Third  motion.)  Execute  what  has  b-jen  prescribed 
for  Develop  No.  11. 

38.  The  instructor  may  vary  these  movements  as  he 
sees  proper,  but  should  see  that  the  men  understand  them 
and  can  execute  them  promptly  at  tho  word  of  command. 

39.  When  the  men  understand  these  movements  tibor- 
oughly  they  will  be  taught  the  «ee  of  their  weapon  for  at- 
tack an(i  d<^fen<^e. 


ITG         s&rKuisu  bXitLh  an»  BAyoNEr  exkroisb. 


PARRIES  AND  THRUSTS. 

'     40.  Them^u  being  well-established  in  the  principles  and 
-mechanism  of  the  guard,  and  being  in  that  position,  the 
instructor  ■will  command ; 

1.  Ill  curie  jHiVrtf.     2,  Akms. 

.  41.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  muzzle  of  the 
piece  twelve  inches  with  the  left  hand,  without  moving 
the  right;  at  the  aame  time  move  the  piece  about  six 
inches  to  the  left,  and  remain  in  that  position. 
f-  42.  The  men  will,  after  the  execution  of  each  of  the  fol- 
lowing; in  -ivementS;,  resume  the  position  of  guard  /  to  effect 
this  the  instructor  will,  after  each  motion,  command  i 

Take. — GuAiip. 

43.  At  which  Ihc^men  will  resume  quickly  the  position 
of  the  guard. 

1.  In  iierce 2iart y.     2.  Aums. 

44.  Raise)  quickly  the  muzzle  of  the  piece  twelve  incUca 
■  with  the  left  hand,  without  moving;  the  right ;  at  the  same 

time  move  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  six  inches  to  the 
'right,  and  remain  In  that  position  until  the  command re- 
'  iutna  (jv.ard : 

I.  In  prime  parry.     2.  Arms. 

Kh.  \\i'\?<i  th»»  pifc?  with  hMh  hand-^,  th?  arnja  fullr  ftt. 


«  >»i*«     t'K  I  t. 


tt-ndfd,  ibe  piece  cororing  the  head,  the  lock  plate  turufd 
to'A'ard^  the  body,  the  barrel  grasped  by  the  thumb  and 
fore-fingor  ofthe  left  hand,  the  bayonet  menacing,  although 
slightly  inclined  to  the  lef*.,  the  tail  band  at  the  top  of  the 
hat. 

1.    hi  prime  right    ot  left)  parri/^     2.   AnMS. 

Hi.  Advance  the  left  shoulder  for  the  ripht  abo«lUer) 
and  parry  I'as  explained  in  45)  to  the  right  or  the  left. 

].  Li  rnric  thrust.     3.   Arvs. 

<7.  At  the  second  command,  throw  the  '.veight  of  tUe 
hody  forward  ;  bend  the  left  knee  and  etraighten  the 
right;  extend  the  left  arm  in  full,  the  fin£r:'r3  of  the  Ifft 
handjjeing  open  and  maintaining  the  piece  ;  bringing  the 
butt  before  the  left  breast,  the  lock-plate  turned  down- 
ward ;  and  reiiiain  in  that  posltidn  until  tlio  ei>nimand.  tnhe 
fftiard  . 

I.    In  tieic  thrufif.     2.   Ahm-;. 

48.  Bring  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  ;  straight- 
en the  right  knee  and  bend  the  left;  fully  extend  the  loft 
arm,  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  being  open  and  maintain- 
ing the  piece,  the  lock-plato  turned  i;pwnrd,  the  butt  be- 
lure  tho  right  b»ca?t : 

1.   In  prime  thrust.     -.   Aum5. 

■t;>.  Elerat?  the  pleee  with  holh  listed?,  the  ormi  b«it)!» 
jKle'ndcd.   lk«  trijfjtiv   guard  un\v;):d,  tk«  l.arr-.'l  hotwecra 


the  thumb  and  fingers  of  the  left  hand ;  bepd  the  left  knee 
and  straighten  the  right,  thurst  at  the  same  time  the  piece 
at  the  adrersary,  directing  the  blow  at  the  height  of  a  man 
on  horseback. 

1.  In  prime  to  the  right  (or  left)  thrust.     2.  Arms. 

50.  Advance  the  left  shoulder  (or  the  right  shoulder,) 
advance  to  the  right  (or  left)  as  explained  in  No.  49. 

1.  Lunge.     2.  Arms. 

51.  At  the  second  comnaand,  throw  the  upper  part  of  the 
body  forward,  by  bending  the  left  knee  and  straightening 
the  right ;  thrust  rapidly  the  piece  at  the  adversary,  fully 
extending  the  right  arm,  leaving  off  with  the  left  hand 
when  thrusting,  which  is  kept  extended  to  receive  th« 
piece,  and  resume  guard. 

62.  When  the  men  are  on  guard  against  infantry,  they 
will  thrust  at  the  height  of  the  breast  of  a  man  ;  when  on 
guard  against  cavalry,  they  will  aim  the  blow  at  the 
height  of  the  horses  head,  or  of  the  sides  of  the  horse- 
man. 

63.  When  tJie  instructor  shall  wish  to  bring  the  men  to 
the  position  of  guard  against  infantry,  or  cavalry,  from 
fihoulder  arms,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Guard  against  Infantry — 2.  Guard.     {Fig.  ^.) 

One  time  and  two  motions. 
54.   (First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
both  heels,  ths^  feet  square  ;  rai.se  at  the  same  time  the 
piece  a  little,  and  seize  it  with  the  left  band  below  MXJ 
»i»ar  tlio  middle  )tini. 


rmiRMrsK  ikul  a!t»  batoxit  bxcrciik. 


17> 


l»5.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  the  right  l<gto  the  rear 
p'^rpondicularLy,  about  eighteen  inches,  th?  right  heel  ou 
the  same  line  with  the  left ;  the  knees  a  little  bent,  the 
weight  of  the  body  bearing  equally  on  both  legs ;  lower 
the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  upward,  the  left  el- 

rirj.  3. 

m 


bow  pressing  against  the  body  ;  sicze  at  the  same  time  the 
piece  below  the  trigger  guard  with  the  right  band;  the 
arms  hauj^iny  natarally,  th*  fff>lBt  of  th*  bayonet  sliy'h't- 
It  elpvat^H. 


IbQ 


Ki!;^U^a     Ur-n.!,    A\»    BATO.NKr    UXttCtfl*?. 


One  time  ami  ons  motion. 
50.  Raise  the  piece  with   the  left  haud  ;  l)iiug  at  the 
«amc  time  the  right  heel  on  the  alignmyiii  of  tho  U-ft,  and 
face  to  the  front. 

1.   Guard  ngain^t  C'lcahi/ — 2.   GuARO.     {Fi<j.  ■{.) 
One  time  and  tico  mo'ions. 

57.  Tho  lirst  and  second  motions  as  in  guard  ai,'aiu«t  ia- 
fantry,  with  the'exceptien  that  the  right  hand  will  be  fit- 
(Ficj.L)         . 


Guard  against  Qavolri;. 
od  at  thf  hip.  and  the  bavonet  aa  higli  a.?  ihe  r_x  p   a?  Ih  tk** 
)w.>,silion  oi'  (iMv^?  havn((f»t- 


KKUiMISB    Vnil.L    \^}i    BATUMI    EXEr.c;**.  181 

jt<.  When  tlie  men  arc  perfectly  acquainted  with  thcdi- 
veri  paces,  parries  and  thrusts,  the  instructor  will  causo 
them  to  execute  these  motions  put  together,  at  the  com- 
mand jnarck.      Example  : 

1.  Paanade  forward,  in  prime  pdrry  and  thrii*t.  —  2 
MAHcn. 

55.  At  the  second  command  the  men  will  ticcuto  \v1i«i 
Has  been  prciciibed  for  paseade,  parry  in  prime,  and  thruit 
in  prime. 

60.  These  morcmcnta  and  combinations  maj  be  varied 
as  the  instructor  may  think  proper,  but  he  ehould  always 
execute  some  movement  that  will  be  useful  to  the  nicn  in 
either  attack  or  dcfonfic,  and  should  explain  to  th»m  iti 
object. 


1|2  |1T;t!lt>   91A.MSir/;   STt. 


i 


MANUAL  OF  THE    SWORD  OR    SABRE,  FOR 
OFFICERS. 

POSITION  or  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  UNDER  ARMS. 

The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which  will 
be  supported  against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of  the  blafde 
against  the  shoulder. 

TO  SALUTE  WITH  THE   SWORD  OR  SABRE. 

Threetimei  (or pautei.) 

One.  At  the  distance  ot  six  paces  from  th»  persen  to  bt 
saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly,  th« 
point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the  right  eye, 
the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  sup* 
ported  on  the  body. 

Ttco.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  extending 
the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be  brought  to  the 
side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in  that  position  until 
the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is  rendered  shall  be  passed 
or  shall  hare  passed,  six  paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place  th« 
back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 

COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt  sr  ia 
TMarcTi,  will  iRlw»;Tg  ^ari't  tVe  h«?«1  ff  tlie  «^lcfr-!aB'<J»  *o>- 


poitdd  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand  generally  placed 
on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  to  hold  it  stead j. 
When  the  color  has  to  render  honors,  the  color-bearer  will 
salute  as  follows : 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand  along  the 
lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye ;  lower  the  lance  by  straight- 
ening the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the  heel  of  the  lance  re- 
maining at  the  hip,  and  bring  back  the  lance  to  the  ha- 
bitual position  when  the  person  saluted  shall  be  passed,  or 
flhall  have  passed,  six  paces. 


MANUAL 
FOR    RELIEVING    SENTISELS. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  lockt» 
the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant  with  both 
hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at  the  lower  band, 
the  two  thumbs  pointing  toward  the  muzzle,  the  barrel 
sloping  uoward  and  crossing  opposite  the  point  of  the  left 
shoulder,  the  butt  propoitionally  lowered.  The  palm  of 
the  right  hand  will  be  above,  and  that  of  the  left  under 
the  piece,  the  naila  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to 
which  the  elbows  will  be  closed. 

Shot  IJcr — Abms. 
^    .  One  time  anl  tno  motions. 

( /Tnrf  >w.»fa oil. )  Brinj  {\9  pieces  enntrttr  t«  t>«  m^bt 


184 


HKUKYl-Ntf    .«iKNTJ.N.K}.S.    Kit. 


shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  aa  in  the  position  of 
shoulder  arma,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoul- 
der, the  fingers  extended. 

{Second  motion. )  Drop  the  left  had  smartly  by  the  side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished  to 
give  the  men  reat,  the  command  will  be  : 

Parade — Rest. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of  the 
butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front  of  the  cen- 
tre of  the  body  ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time  >vith  the  left 
hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at  the  upper  band  ; 
carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to  the  rear,  the  left  knee 
elightly  bent.  .; 


INSTRUCTION 

FOR   THE   CHIEF  BUGLER   AND  DRUM-MAJOR. 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  have  been  given, 
Title  I,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column  in  manauvre,  the  field  music  and  band  will 
march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  company,  and  on  the 
fide  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  passage  of  defiles,  to 
the  front  or  in  retreat,  they  will  march  at  the  head  of  their 
respective  battalions. 


!Ss'fntCilt»>    FOR    tHIEF    BCGl/ER,    R1».  lib 


GENERAL  CALLS. 

1.  Attention. 

2.  The  general. 

3.  The  atscmbli/. 

4.  To  the  color. 

5.  The  recall. 
f>.  Quick  time. 

7.  Double  quick  time. 

8.  The  charge. 

9.  The  reveille. 

10.  Retreat. 

11.  Tattoo. 

12.  To  extinguishliyhtu, 

13.  A^f^enihly  of  the  buglent. 
It.  ^^Hficmhly  of  the  guard. 

15.    Orders  for  orderly  sergeanta. 
IG.  For  ojjicers  to  take  their  placet 
in  li7ie  after  firing. 

17.  r/ic  dixjierse. 

18.  Officers'  call. 

19.  Breakfast  call. 

20.  Dinner  call. 

21.  ^icfc  ca?/. 

22.  Fatigue  call. 

23.  C^«rc^  ca«. 

24.  Drill  call. 
2-5.  School  tall. 


1^^  XNftTAV«T>MJ?   DfJt   aklZr   nVtlkKSi,    BTC> 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  Fix  bayonet. 

'1.   Uiijlx  bayonet. 

3.    Quick  time.  ^ 

■4.  Double  quick  time. 

6.    The  run. 

6.  Deploy  a,a  tkirmishert. 

7.  Forward. 

8.  In  retrtat. 

9.  Halt, 

10.  ^y  <A«  right  Jlanh. 

11.  J?y  «/»«  leftfianh. 
)fi.    Commence  firing  f 

13.  Cease  firing. 

14.  Change  direction  to  (he  right. 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left. 

16.  Xitf  down. 

17.  iZtse  «p. 

18.  Rally  by  fonrt. 

19.  Rally  by  sections. 

20.  Rally  by  platoons. 

21.  Rally  on  the  reserve. 

22.  i?a?Zy  on  ^Ae  battalion. 

23.  Assemhlt  on  the  batalion. 

Note. — When  the  whole  of  the  troops,  in  the  same 
camp  or  garrison,  are  to  depart,  the  general,  the  asvtmbly 
and  to  the  color,  will  be  beaten  or  sounded,  at  the  proper 
intervals,  in  the  order  herein  mentioned.  At  the  first,  the 
troops  will  prepare  for  the  movement ;  at  the  second,  they 
vrill  ftrm  >»v  fOBparr,  ^^A  ti  ttie  thir^  tiBU»lrr  IniHtIi*!': 


FIELD  FORTIFICATION, 

PART  FIFTH. 

I.  Field  "WonKS  arc  any  constructions  which  h«ve  for 
Ihoir  object  to  impedo  the  advance  of  an  enemy,  or  to  en- 
ible  an  inferior  force  to  maintain  their  position  agaioit 
ihc  attack  of  a  superior  number. 

3.  The  name  of  Field  Forfificnfion  is  applied  to  a  work 
which  is  composed  of  an  embankment  of  earth  called  a 
'parapet,"  and  an  cxcavati(tn  called  a  "ditch,"  on  the 
exterior  side,  which  last  furnishes  the  earth  for  the  em- 
jankment.  / 

3.  The  general  appellation  of  IntreuchmemU  it  applied  ^ 
o  all  fit'ld  works,  and  a  position  strengthened  by  them,  ia 
laid  to  be  Intrenched. 

i.  The  outline  or  form  of  the  work  varies  with  tho  char- 

cter  of  the  ground,  ths  circumstances  under  which  it  \% 

soBstructed,   the  stiength  of  the  force,   and  particular 

character  of  the  defence.     The  profile  or  shape  of  the  ©m- 

sankment  or  parapet  is  usually  the  same  in  all  cases. 

6.  When  the  ground  about  a  work  within  eflective 
•ango  of  the  firearms  of  the  attacking  party  is  quite  flat, 
he  height  called  tho  "command"  of  the  work,  must  be 
It  least  7  I'eet,  6  inches,  in  order  that  the  defenders  may 
)e  covered  from  the  fire  of  men  on  horseback— that  class 
)f  men  being  able  to  dipeharge  tJiwlr  arme  at  7  fi?»?*  %  Jw*- 


0.  Uniaiportrtiit  works,  or  such  as  arc  situated  on  }iigfe- 
cr  ground  than  that  within  effective  artillery  range,  m»/ 
have  their  parapets  as  low  as  C  feet  or  even  5  feet. 

7.  Sometimes  the  parapet  is  tornied  of  earth  taken  from 
an  excavation  or  trench  inside  of  it ;  in  this  case  the  par. 
apct  may  bo  as  low  as  3  feet,  because  then,  the  defenders 
standing  in  the  trench  of  equal  depth,  and  close  behind 
the  parapet,  are  sufficiently  covered  by  it. 

[Remarks.]  In  this  manner  cover  for  troops  may  be  very 
fiuickl}'  obtain^id,  with  the  advantage  of  having  the  pow- 
er to  advance  over  tho  parapet  in  order  of  battle  when  cc- 
casion  offers. 

8.  The  general  form  of  a  parapet  and  ditch  may  be  un- 
derstood by  the  followihg  explanations  :     {Fig.  1.) 

A  B  C  D  E  F  IS  the  profile  of  the  Parapet. 

G  H  I  K  the  profile  of  the  Ditch. 

L  M  X  the  profile  of  the  Glacis. 

A  B  the  Banquette  Slopes. 

B  C  Tread  of  the  Banquette. 

C  D  the  Interior  Slope. 

D  E  the  Superior  Slope. 

E  F  the  Exterior  Slope. 

F  G  the  Berm.  . 

G  n  the  Scarp. 

H  I  the  Bottom  of  tho  Ditch. 

I  K  the  Counterscarp. 

A  the  Foot  of  the  Banquette  Slope, 

B  the  Crest  of  the  Banquette. 

C  the  Foot  of  the  Interior  Slope. 

D  the  Interior  Crest. 


nA\.»     hmr.  MMV.A  IION. 


JFi« 


*?«  ,  rtSL*    StRTIJICAtlON. 

E  the  Extorior  Crest. 

F  the  Foot  of  the  Exterior  Slope. 

G  the  Crest  of  the  Scarp. 

n  the  Foot  of  the  Scarp. 

I  the  Foot  of  the  Counterscarp. 

K  the  Crest  of  the  Counterscrp. 

M  the  Crest  of  the  Glacis, 

N  Foot  of  the  Glacis.  , 

9.  The  inferior  slope  is  the  part  of  the  parapet  towards 
the  enemy;  it  is  usually  made  with  thp  same  slope  that 
the  earth,  when  first  thrown  up,  naturally  takes. 

10.  The  top  of  the  parapet,  denominated  the  superior 
tlope,  is  the  line  along  which  the  assailed  fire  on  the  eae- 
my. 

11.  The  intsrior  slope,  sometimes  denominated  the  breast 
height,  is  the  part  against  which  the  assailed  naturally 
lean  in  the  act  of  firing. 

12.  The  banquette  is  a  small  terrace  on  which  the  8ol« 
dier  stands  to  deliver  his  fire  ;  the  top  of  it  is  denominated 
the  tread,  and  the  inclined  plane  by  which  it  is  ascended, 
the  slope. 

13.  The  tersn  creai  is  applied  to  those  points  of  the  profile, 
where  a  salient  angle  is  formed;  and  when  a  re-entering 
angle  h  formed  by  two  lines,  the  term  foot  is  applied  to 
the  point,  in  connexion  with  the  name  of  the  superior 
line  ;  thus,  foot  of  the  exterior  slope  ;  foot  of  the  iTUericf 
»Iope,  &c. 

14.  Theberm  is  a  horizontal  space  left  between  the  par- 
apet and  ditch,  to  prevent  the  earth  from  yielding. 

15.  The  slope  of  the  ditch  next  to  the  parapet  is   the 


16.  The  glacis  is  a  small  mound  of  earth  raised  in  front 
of  the  ditch;  it  is  seldom  used  in  field  \rork?.  therefore  is 
not  a  constituent  part  of  their  profile. 

17.  Should  there  be  ground  near  the  position  to  be  for- 
tiied,  higher  than  that  on  which  the  parapet  stands, 
the  latter  must  have  a  greater  command  than  7  feet  6 
inches,  but  in  the  more  simple  kind  of  field  works  the 
command  does  not  exceed  12  feet ;  for  as  soldiers  cannot 
taxily  throw  dirt  with  a  shorel  to  a  greater  height  thau 
6  feet,  and  as  other  means  are  generally  wanting  in  the 
field,  it  is  evident  that  the  height  of  a  paiapet  for  such  a 
work,  must  be  limited  by  the  capability  of  executing  it 
with  shovels  and  pick  axes  by  two  parties  of  men,  one 
standing  on  a  level  6  feet  above  the  other.  The  same 
reason  determines  the  greatest  depth  of  ditch  to  We  12 
feet,  a  scaffolding  being  necessary  at  6  fet-t  above  the  bot- 
tom of  the  ditch  to  receive  the  earth  which  is  thrown  from 
thence;  the  earth  is  then  thrown  up  to  the  level  of  the 
ground,  by  other  laborers  placed  on  the  scailblding. 

18.  In  the  construction  of  field  works  it  should  always 
be  recollected  that  a  great  command  of  parapet  not  only 
requires  additional  means,  trouble,  and  time  to  throw  up 
the  earth,  but  also  renders  necessary  an  increased  mass  of 
earth  for  the  banquette,  which  may  thus  encumber  the 
interior  of  the  work. 

19.  To  obviate  as  much  as  possible,  the  latter  evil,  it  is 
usual  to  mount  the  banquette,  by  step?,  whjn  the  parapet 
has  a  greater  command  than  8  feet. 

20  The  thickness  of  the  parapets  of  field  works  must  be 
regulated  by  the  description  of  arms  likely  to  be  employ- 
ed against  th«ni ;  in  ord»r,  therefore,  that  they  aa-y  af- 


1811  TiBI.U     rORllFX'oATIuy. 

ford  a  reasonable  degree  of  resistance  to  repeated  firiu^. 
the  thickness  of  parapets  must  somewhat  exceed  the  pen- 
etration of  the  hhot  which  may  be  used  against  tbcm  in 
the  attack. 

Penctralloi  of  shot.  Thickness  of  jjonipeU 

Musket  ball,  10  to  18  inches,  3  feet. 

G-pounder,  3^^  to  4  feet,  6  feet. 

9-pounder,  63-^  to  7  feet,  8  or  9  feet^ 

12-pounder,  8>^  to  10  feet,  10  or  12  feet. 

31.  It  is  found  by  experiment  that  loose  earth  resists 
the  penetration  of  shot  just  as  well  as  that  which  has  becH 
rammed  together. 

22.  Although  a  musket  ball  penetrates,  at  most,  only  18 
inches  into  earth,  musketry  parapets  require  to  be  made 
3  feet  thick,  in  order  that  they  may  be  sufficiently  sub- 
stantial to  preserve  the  requisite  hei.S(ht,  notwithstanding 
the  action  of  the  weather. 

23.  Heavier  g'uns  than  12-pcunders  are  rarely  brought 
into  the  field,  consequently  12  feet  may  be  considered  uo 
the  greatest  thickness  of  a  parapet  5  and  it  has  been  shown 
that,  for  the  simpler  works,  12  feet  is  the  greatest  com- 
mand of  a  parapet,  and  likewise  the  greatest  depth  of  a 
ditch. 

24.  The  exterior  side  of  a  parapet  is  formed  with  a 
slope  which  has  a  base  equal  to  its  height,  that  being  the 
inclination  which  ordinary  earth  assunies  when  thrown 
up  loosely  ;  and,  therefore,  it  is  the  most  advantageous 
form  for  a  mass  of  earth  whose  sides  are  supported. 

25.  The  interior  slope  of  a  parapet  has  a  base  not  great- 
er than  one-third  or  one-fourth  of  its  height,  in  order  to 
allow  the  men  to  approach  near  the  crest,  and  fire  ovor 
the  parapet  with  ease. 


VIELB     KOKllKiCAliUN.  183 

MANNER  OF  THROWING  UP  A  WORK. 

26.  The  following  wKl  describe  the  manner  of  laying 
the  work  out  on  the  field,  which  is  called  profiling  ;  tho 
distribution  of  the  workmen  to  excavate  the  ditch,  and 
form  the  parapet ;  and  the  precautions  to  be  observed  in 
the  construction. 

27.  Poles  having  been  planted  at  the  angles  of  the  work, 
and  the  height  of  Ihe  interior  crest  marked  on  them,  a 
line  is  traced  on  the  ground  with  a  picks,  showing  fifae  di- 
rection of  the  interior  crests.  At  suitable  distances,  say 
from  twenty  to  thirty  yards  apart,  cords  are  stretched  be- 
tween two  stout  pickc  ts,  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to 
the  line  marked  out  by  the  pick ;  these  cords  should  be 
exactly  horizontal.  The  thickness  of  the  parapet  is  meas- 
ured on  the  cord,  and  a  picket  driven  into  the  ground  to 
mark  the  point.  The  base  of  the  interior  slope,  and  the 
tread  of  the  banquette,  are  set  off  in  a  similar  manner  • 
and  a  slip  of  deal  is  nailed  to  each  of  the  pickets. 

28.  The  height  of  the  interior  crest,  and  the  tread  of  the 
banquette,  are  easily  ascertained,  from  the  position  of  tho 
cord,  and  the  interior  crest ;  these  points  having  been 
marked  on  their  respective  slips,  the  outline  of  the  para- 
pet is  shown  by  connecting  them  by  other  slips,  which  are 
nailed  to  the  uprights ;  the  banquette  slope  and  the  exte- 
rior slop  •,  V,  :!l  be  determined  by  a  similar  process. 

29.  From  the  profiles  thus  formed  perpendicular  to  the 
interior  crests,  the  oblique  profiles  at  the  angles  can  be 
readily  set  up,  by  a  process  which  will  suggest  itself  uitli . 
out  oxplauation. 

7 


IH  FIELD    FCKTrFrCATms. 

30.  Having  compl^ied  t&e  profiling,  the  foot  of  the  ban- 
qnette,  and  that  of  the  exterior  slope,  are  marked  out 
with  a  pick,  and  also  the  crests  of  the  scarp  and  coianter- 
scarp.  All  the  arrangements  preparatory  to  commencing 
the  excayatfon  are  now  complete. 

DISTRIBUT1®'N  OF  TBS  WORKING  PARTY. 

31.  DiTide  the  men  into  6  equal  parts,  3  of  which  are  to  be 
provided  with  pick  axes  and  shovels,  2  are  to  have  shovels- 
©nly,  and  the  remainder  are  to  be  furnished  with  ram- 
mers only. 

32.  The  party  is  then  marched  to  the  ground,  and  the 
men,  having  both  pick-axes  and&hovels  (viz :  the  diggers,) 
are  to  be  stationed  from  43^  to  6  feet  apart,  (so  as  to  not 
foe  in  each  others  way,)  on  the  ground  when  the  ditch  is 
to  be  dug  along  the  berme  line,  and  facing  the  work. 

33.  The  excavation  of  the  (iitch  is  now  begun,  the  men 
Srst  loosening  the  earth  with  their  pick-ases,  and  thea 
shoveling  it  to  the  place  where  the  parapet  is  to  stand ; 
here  the  rest  of  the  party  are  posted,  and  as  the  earth  is 
thrown  up  to  them,  the  men  with  shovelfi  spread  it  in  lay- 
ers, while  the  remainder,  with  their  rammers,  beat  ife 
down  to  a  firm  mass ;  and  ais  the  work  is  raised,  they  give 
it  the  form  indicated  by  the  profiles. 

34.  In  making  the  parapet,  eare  should  be  taken  to 
form  a  drain^  at  some  suitable  point,  to  carry  off  the  water 
from  the  interior  ixito  the  ditch.  It  can  be  done  by  dig- 
ging a  trench  across  the  ground  where  the  parapet  is  to , 
he  raised,  and  plank  the  sides  so  as  to  form  a  gutter.  A 
gutter  of  boards  should  also  be  made  to  prevent  the  water 
from  running  down  the  scarp,  as  it  would  soon  destroy  it. 


FIKLB    FORTiriCATIOX.  195 

35,  For  tbs  facility  of  entering  the  ditch,  whilst  work- 
ing, the  offset  at  the  scarp  and  counterscarp,  maj  be  form- 
ed into  Ht^ps,  with  a  rise  of  eighteen  inches  each  ;  and  if 
the  ditch  is  deeper  than  sii  feet,  an  offset  about  four  feet 
broad  should  be  left  at  the  scarp,  about  mid-depth  of  the 
<litch,  to  place  a  relay  of  shovels  to  throw  the  earth  on 
the  berme.  In  some  cases,  a  scaffold  of  plank  is  raised  in 
the  ditch  for  the  same  purpose. 

36.  When  the  ditch  has  been  excavated  to  the  bottom, 
the  offsets  are  cut  way,  and  the  proper  slopes  given  to  the 
sides.  The  earth  furnished  by  the  offsets,  if  not  required 
to  complete  the  parapet,  may  be  formed  into  a  small  glacis. 

37  When  near  the  surface,  in  soil  requiring  but  little 
use  of  the  pick-axe,  an  excavation  of  sir  cubic  yards  in  a 
day  of  eight  hours,  would  be  a  fair  task  for  a  soldier,  who, 
in  general,  is  little  accustomed  to  the  use  of  the  pick-are 
and  shoTcl. 

38.  In  calculating  the  time  required  to  throw  up  a  field 
work,  the  following  data  may  be  assumed  ;  in  light,  dry, 
sandy  soil,  that  can  be  easily  dug  without  the  aid  of  a  pick- 
axe, a  man  can,  in  a  day  of  eight  hours,  load  from  nineteen 
to  twenty  cubic  yards  of  earth  on  barrows.  If  a  pick-axo 
be  required,  two  men  can  do  the  same  quantity  of  work. 

3J>.  If  the  w  hole  ma«6  must  be  first  moved  with  the  pick* 
axe,  three  or  four  men  should  be  allowed. 

40.  A  man  can  wheel  20  cubic  yards  of  earth  per  day  to 
a  distance  of  30  yards  on  level  ground,  or  20  yards  on  a 
ramp. 

41.  Twenty  cubic  yards  of  earth  will  Gil  500  wheelbar- 
rows. 

42.  A  lior.ss  ran  do  as  much  work  as  7  men  ;  he  can  c^r- 


196  VlKLh    FOHTfKie.VTIOX. 

ry  300  lbs.  20  miles  per  day,  or  200  lbs.  30  miles  ;  he  csn 
draw  1,600  lbs.  on  a  plain,  and  from  1,200,  to  1,300  lbs.  on 
irregular  ground,  when  the  roads  are  in  good  (Jrder. 

43.  Newly  moved  earth  will  not  remain  very  well  at 
such  a  steep  slope  as  the  "interior  slope"  of  the  parapet 
assumosj  consequently  artificial  means  have  to  be  rcsortsd 
to,  to  retain  it  in  that  state ;  these  are  called  revetments. 

REVETMENTS. 

44.  A  J'et'c/rue/if  consists  ^of  a  facing  of  stone,  wood,  sods 
of  turf,^  or  any  other  material,  to  sustain  an  embankment; 
•when  it  receives  a  slope  steeper  than  the  natural  slope. 

45.  In  field  vvoi'ks  revetments  are  used  only  for  the  inte- 
rior slope  of  the  parapet  and  for  the  scarp  ;  for  the  first, 
sods,  hurdles,  fascines,  gabions,  and  plank  are  used  j  and 
for  the  last,  timber. 

46-  Jlevctment  of  sods.  Sod  work  forms  a  strong  and 
durable  revetment,  and  as  they  are  generally  procurable 
on  the  spot,  they  are  much  used  in  field  works.  The  sods 
should  be  cut  from  a  well  clothed  sward,  with  the  grass  of 
a  fine,  short  blade,  and  thickly  matted  roots.  If  the  grass 
be  long,  it  should  be  mowed  before  the  sod  is  cut. 

47.  Sods  are  of  two  siiics,  one  termed  stretchers,  ai*e 
twelve  inches  square  and  four  and  a  half  inches  thick  :  the 
pthc.r  termed  headers,  are  eighteen  inches  long,  twelV'e 
inches  broad,  and  four  and  a-half  inches  thick. 

48.  The  sod  revetment  is  commenced  as  soon  as  the  para- 
pet is  raised  to  the  level  of  the  head  of  the  banquette  ;  the 
course  consists  of  two  stretchers  and  one  header  altsrnating, 
the  end  of  the  header  laid  to  the  front.  The  grass  side  is 
l2.id  downward;  and  tho,«od?  should  protrude  .*^  )ij[ tie  be vontj 


TrF-i.D    FoaTiriOATrov.  197 

the  line  of  the  interior  slope,  for  the  purpose  of  trimming 
thfc  course  even  at  the  top,  before  laying  another,  and  to 
make  the  interior  slope  regular.  The  course  is  firmly  set- 
tled, by  tapping  each  sod  as  it  is  laid  with  a  spade  or  a 
wooden  mallet ;  and  the  earth  of  the  parapet  is  packed 
closely  behind  the  course. 

49.  A  second  course  is  laid  on  the  first,  so  as  to  cover 
the  joints,  or,  as  it  is  termed,  to  break  joints  with  it,  using 
otherwise  the  same  precautions  as  with  the  firr,t.  The  top 
course  is  laid  with  the  grass  up;  and  in  some  cases  pegs 
are  driven  through  the  sods  of  two  courses,  to  connect  the 
whole  more  firmly,  which  i.«,  however,  by  no  means  nee- 
cessary  to  form  a  strong  sodding. 

50.  When  cut  from  a  wet  soil,  the  sods  should  not  be 
lain  until  they  are  partially  dried,  otherwise  they  will 
shrink,  and  the  revetment  will  crack  in  drying.  In  hot 
weather  the  revetment  should  bo  watered  frequently,  until 
the  grass  puts  forth.  The  sods  are  cut  rather  larger  than 
required  for  use  ;  and  arc  trimmed  to  a  proper  size  from  a 
model  sod. 

51.  Fascine  revetment.  A  Fascine,  is  a  bundle  of  twigs 
closely  bound  up.  There  are  two  sizes  of  fascines  ;  one 
size  nine  inehes  in  diameter,  and  about  ten  feet  lon^  ;  the 
other  which  is  generally  termed  a  soucisson,  is  twelve 
inches  in  diameter  and  twenty  foot  long  ;  it  is  chiefly  used 
for  the  revetments  of  battel  ies. 

52.  To  make  a  fascine,  straight  twigs  are  selected,  be- 
tween the  thickness  of  the  little  finger  and  thumb,  the  lon- 
ger the  btter  ;  they  should  be  stripped  of  the  smaller 
twigs.  A  machine,  termed  &/asciue  horse,  is  put  up,  by 
tirivino-    two  ttaut   pole*    intri  the  o-rnund  obliquely,  .^hout 


lUS  vmiu   FORI  irij  irrox. 

two  feet,  30  as  to  cross  each  other  about  two  feet  above  the 
ground,  where  thej  are  firmly  tied  together;  as  many  of 
these  supports  as  may  Le  required,  are  put  up  in  a  straight 
line,  about  eighteen  inches  apart;  this  forms  the  horse, 
on  which  the  twigs  are  laid  to  be  bound  together. 

53.  Another  machine  termed  a.  fascine  choker,  is  formed 
of  two  stout  levers,  about  five  feet  long,  connected  near 
their  extremities  b}'-  a  chain  or  strong  cord,  which  would 
b3  long  enough  to  past;  once  around  the  fascine,  and  be 
drawn  tight  by  means  of  the  levers. 

54  The  twigs  are  laid  on  the  horse,  with  their  large  and 
small  ends  alternating ;  "the  choker  is  applied  to  bring  them 
to""ether  ;  and  they  are  bound  by  loiths  or  gads,  made  of 
tough  twigs,  properly  prepared  by  untwisting  the  fibres 
over  a  blaze,  so  as  to  render  them  pliant,  or  else  stout  rope 
varn  may  be  substituted  for  them.  The  gads  are  placed 
twelve  inches  apart,  and  every  third  or  fourth  one  should 
be  made  with  an  end  three  or  four  feet  long,  having  a  loop 
at  the  extremity  to  receive  a  picket  through  it;  this  pick- 
et is  termed  an  anchorinc/  2n(-'kct,  its  object  being  to  secure 
the  fascine  firmly  to  the  parapet. 

55,  To  form  the  revetment,  the  first  row  of  fascines  is 
imbedded  about  half  its  thickness  below  the  tread  of  the 
Jbanquette,  and  is  secured  by  means  of  the  anchoring  pick- 
ets, and  also  by  several  pickets  driven  through  the  fascine 
itself  about  twelve  inches  into  the  earth.  The  knots  of  the 
wythes  are  laid  inside,  and  the  earth  of  the  parapet  is  well 
packed  behind  the  fascine.  A  second  row  is  laid  on  the 
first,  so  as  to  give  the  requisite  interior  slope;  it  should 
break  joints  with  the  first  row,   and  be  connected  with  it 


FIELD   roiiiirieAiioJ.'.  139 

by  several  pickets  driven  through  them  both.  The  other 
rows  arc  laid  with  similar  precautions  ;  and  the  parapet 
is  usually  finished  at  the  top  by  a  course  of  sods. 

56.  Hurdle  revetment.  This  revetment  is  made  by  driv- 
ing poles  in  the  same  direction  as  the  interior  slope,  into 
the  banquette,  about  eighteen  inches  below  the  tread,  and 
then  forming  a  wicker-work,  by  interlacing  the  twigs  be- 
tween them  in  a  similar  manner  to  basket  work. 

57.  The  poles  should  be  nine  inches  apart,  their  diameter 
al)ont  one  and  a  half  inches.  They  should  be  secured  to 
tlui  ])arapet  by  long  withes  and  anchoring  pickets.  The 
tojt  twigs  should  bo  bound  together  by  withes. 

58.  Gabion  revetment.  Gabions  are  strong  cylindrical 
baskets  without  top  or  bottom,  two  feet  in  diameter,  and 
two  feet  nine  inches  high.  These  are  placed  in  rows  along 
the  line  of  work  at  an  inclination  corresponding  to  the 
required  slope,  and  then  filled  with  earth.  To  make  a  ga- 
bion, from  eight  to  fourteen  pickets,  three  feet  six  inches 
long,  are  fixed  upright  in  the  ground,  at  equal  distances, 
in  the  circumference  of  a  circle,  one  foot  eleven  inches  in 
diameter  ;  flexible  twigs  (or  rods)  arc  then  interwoven 
with  the  upright  pickets,  commencing  with  three  rods  at 
the  bottom,  and  weaving  each  in  succession  outside  of  two 
pickets  and  inside  of  one;  as  the  twigs  (or  rods)  are  ex- 
pended, others  are  added,  and  the  basket  work  continued 
to  the  height  of  two  feet  nine  inches  ;  this  work,  which  is 
called  the  web,  is  sewn  in  three  or  four  parts,  from  top  to 
bottom;  withes,  (called  gads,)  or  spun  yarn  being  used 
for  that  purpose,  in  order  to  keep  it  from  coming  off  the 
pickets ;  the  ends  of  these  are  then  cut  off  about  an  inch 
from  the   web.     A  gabion,   thus  made,  stands  three  feet 


200  riKLD    FORTIIiei-lION. 

high  in  the  reretment,  and  weighs  from  thlrtr-six  to  forty 
pounds.  The  best  wood  for  the  web,  and  particularly  fov 
the  gads,  is  willow  and  hazel. 

59.  The  gabion  revetment  is  seldom  used  except  for  the 
trenches  in  the  attack  of  permanent  works,  where  it  i?  de- 
sirable to  place  troops  speedily  under  cover  from  the  ene- 
my's case  shot  and  musketry. 

60.  Plank  revetment.  This  revetment  may  be  made  by 
driving  pieces  of  four-inch  scantling  about  three  feet  apart, 
two  feet  below  the  tread  ©f  the  banquette,  giving  them  the 
same  slope  as  the  interior  slope.  Behind  these  pieces, 
boards  are  nailed  to  sustain  the  earth. 

61.  Sand-hags  are  bags  of  coarse  canvass,  measuring, 
when  laid  flat,  two  feet  eight  inches  by  one  foot  four  inch- 
es; they  contain,  when  quite  full,  a  bushel  of  earth  :  but 
when  tied  and  placed  in  revetment,  only  three-quarters  of 
a  bushel.  In  building  a  revetment  with  them,  they  are 
arranged  with  their  ends  and  sides  presented  alternately  to 
the  front  in  each  course,  and  with  the  joints  in  the  succes- 
sive courses  broken,  like  brick-work.  Sixteen  sand-bags 
buiffl  ten  square  feet  of  revetment ;  they  ought  to  be  tar- 
red, if  the  revetments  are  to  laat  a  considerable  time ;  if 
not  tarred,  they  rot  in  two  months.  An  empty  sand-bag 
weighs  1  lb.  2  oz.,  and  when  tarred,  1  lb.  12  oz. 

62.  Filled  sand-bags  are  musket-shot  proof,  and  are  fre- 
quently .  placed  on  a  parapet  one  across  two  others,  the 
latter  being  a  short  distance  asunder,  in  order  that  the 
intervals  may  serve  as  loop-holes. 

63.  When  sand-bags  or  gabions  are  made  use  of  to  revet 
the  cheeks  of  embrasures,  they  should  be  covered  with  raw 
hides,  to  prevent  them  f»©m  being  damaged  by  the  flash 
aad  th§  eoneussion  caused  bj  tbs  dicchargc  of  the  gun. 


i\f.nt   iCianiicxnQs.  201 


OBSTACLES. 


64.  The  means  employed  ns  acccsssry,  usually  consists 
of  artificial  obstacles,  s.o  arranged  as  to  detain  the  enemy 
in  a  position  where  he  will  be  greatly  cut  up  by  the  fire  of 
the  work.  The  proper  disposition,  therefore,  of  obstacles, 
is  in  advance  of  the  ditch  within  short  musket  range. 

65.  In  placing  the  ground  around  a  work  in  a  defeusire 
attitude,  every  means  should  be  taken  to  reduce  to  the  smal- 
lest possible  number,  the  points  by  which  the  enemy  may 
approach  ;  so  that  by  accumulating  the  troops  on  the  weak 
points,  a  more  rigorous  defense  may  be  made.  In  making 
this  arrangement,  equal  care  should  be  given  to  avery  thing 
that,  affording  a  shelter  to  the  enemy,  would  enable  him 
to  approach  the  work  unexposed  to  its  fires.  To  prevent 
this,  all  hollow  roads,  or  dry  ditches,  which  are  not  enfi- 
laded by  the  principal  works,  should  be  filled  up  or  else  be 
watched  by  a  detachment,  covered  by  advanced  work. 
All  trees,  underwood,  hedges,  enclosures,  and  houses  with- 
in cannon  range,  should  be  cut  down  and  leveled,  and  no 
stumps  be  allowed  higher  than  two  feet,.  Trees  beyond 
cannon  range  should  not  be  felled  ;  or,  if  felled  they  should 
be  burnt  to  prevent  the  enemy's  movements  being  con- 
cealed. 

65.  If  there  are  approaches,  such  as  permanent  bridges, 
fords  and  roads,  which  may  bo  equally  serviceable  to  the 
assailed  and  to  the  enemy,  they  should  be  gurded  with  pe- 
culiar care  ;  and  be  exposed  to  the  enfilading  fire  of  a  work 
ospocially  erected  for  their  defence. 

67.  The  principal  aviificial  obstacles  ara  Tr9iie-(hIou2), 


202  viEin   rouTiiicAxiux. 

or  military  2^^^^  j  ahattis  ;  palisades  ; /raises  ;  stockades; 
ckevaux-de-frise  ;  small  pickets  ;  entanglements',  crows 
feet  ;  inundations  ;  and  mines. 

68.  Trous-de-lovp.  These  are  pits  in  the  form  of  an  in- 
verted truncated  cone,  or  quadrilateral  pyramid,  and  are 
generall}'-  made  about  6  feet  wide  and  6  feet  deep  ;  a  point- 
ed stake  is  phmted  firmly  in  the  bottom  to  prevent  the 
enemy  from  using  them  as  rifle  pits.  In  order  to  form  an 
effectire  obstacle,  they  should  be  disposed  checkerwise  in 
three  rows,  a  few  yards  in  front  of  the  ditch  with  inter- 
vals of  about  10  feet  between  them  ;  the  earth  taken  from 
them  is  spread  over  the  ground  between  them,  and  is  form- 
ed into  hillocks  to  render  the  passage  between  them  as  dif- 
ficult as  possible.  If  bru.h-wood,  or  light  hurdles,  can  be 
procured,  the  ditch  may  be  made  narrower,  and  covered 
with  hurdle,  over  which  a  layer  of  earth  is  spread.  Trous- 
de-loup  are  sometimes  placed  in  the  ditch  ;  in  this  case, 
their  upper  circles  touch. 

09.  This  obstacle  is  principally  serviceable  against  cav- 
alry. 

70.  Jibatti^.  The  large  limbs  of  trees  are  selected  for  an 
nbattis.  The  smaller  branches  are  chopped  ofi",  and  the 
ends,  pointed  and  interlaced  with  some  care,  are  presented 
towards  the  enemy.  The  large  end  of  the  lirjib  is  secured 
to  the  ground  by  a  crotchet-picket,  and  should  be  covered 
with  earth,  well  rammed,  to  prevent  its  being  torn  up. 

71.  One  of  the  best  methods  of  forming  an  abattis,  and 
which  is  peculiarly  adapted  to  strengthen  the  skirt  of  a 
wood,  occupied  b}^  light  troops,  is  to  fell  the  trees  so  that 
their  branches  will  interlace,  cutting  the  trunk  in  such  a 
way  that  the  tree  will  hang  to  the  stump  by  a  portion  un- 


FlilLU    iORIIFlCAriON.  203 

cut.    The  stumps  may  be  left  high  enough  to  corer  a  man 
in  the  act  of  firing. 

72.  Abattis  are  placed  in  front  of  the  ditch  ;  in  this  po- 
sition, they  must  be  covered  from  the  enemy's  fire  by  a 
small  glacis,  so  that  they  may  not  bo  seen  and  destroyed 
at  a  distance  by  artillery. 

73.  Abattis  is  an  excellent  obstacle  in  a  wooded  country, 
and  admits  of  a  good  defence,  if  a  slight  parapet  is  thrown 
up  behind  it.  The  parapet  may  be  made  of  trunks  of  trees 
laid  on  each  other,  with  a  s  hallow  ditch  or  trench  behind 
them  ;  the  earth  from  which  is  thrown  against  the  trunks. 
In  an  open  position  it  may  be  relied  on  as  a  security  against 
surprise,  particularly  of  cavalry. 

74.  A  detachment  of  90  men  can  make  750  feet  of  abattis 
in  a  day. 

75.  Palisades.  A  palisade  is  a  stake  about  10  feet  long, 
and  of  a  triangular  form,  each  side  of  the  triangle  being  8 
inches.  The  trunks  of  straight  trees  should  be  selected  for 
palisades.  The  diameter  of  th(?  trunk  should  be  from  six- 
teen to  twenty  inches.  The  trunk  is  sawed  into  lenghts 
often  and  a-half  feet,  and  is  split  up  into  rails,  each  length 
furnishing  from  5  to  7  rails.  The  palisade  is  pointed  at 
the  top,  the  other  extremity  may  be  charred  if  the  wood 
is  seasoned  ;  otherwise  the  charring  will  be  of  no  service. 
A  ijaUsading  is  a  row  of  palisades  set  in  the  ground  either 
vertically,  or  slightly  inclined  towards  the  enemy.  Each 
palisade  is  nailed  to  a  strip  of  thick  plank,  termed  a  riband, 
placed  horizontally  about  one  foot  below  the  ground; 
another  riband  is  placed  eighteen  inches  below  the  top. — 
To  plant  the  palisade,  a  trench  is  dug  3  feet  deep  ;  they 

are  th^'n  placed  about  3  inches  aeunder,  with  an  edge  to- 
nart^s  the  eRemv. 


204  FIBL»     FORXJFICATIO?;. 

76.  Palis&des  are  only  used  in  ths  ditches,  and  to  close 
the  gorges  of  field  works,  and  are  not  as  in  permanent 
works,  placed  on  'he  banquettes  ;  when  in  the  ditch,  their 
best  position  is  at  the  foot  of  the  counterscarp,  and  slightly 
inclined  towards  it ;  for  thus  placed,  they  are  more  secure 
from  a  direct  fire  of  artillery,  and  they  detain  the  enemy 
at  the  caunterscarp  under  the  deadly  aim  of  the  garrison  ; 
also  it  makes  it  difficult  for  the  assailants  to  cut  them 
down,  there  being  no  room  between  them  and  the  counter- 
scarp to  stand  and  wield  an  axe. 

77.  Fraise.  This  obstacle  is  formed  of  palisades  placed 
in  juxtaposition,  either  horizontally  or  slightly  inclined. 
The  best  position  for  a  fraise  is  on  the  berme,  or  a  little  be- 
low it,  so  as  to  be  coTered  by  the  counterscarp  crest.  The 
part  of  the  fraise  under  the  parapet  is  termed  the  tail, 
and  is  about  5  feet  long.  To  make  a  fraise,  a  horizontal 
piece  of  four  inch  scantling,  termed  a  cushion,  is  first  laid 
parallel  to  the  berme  ;  each  palisade  is  nailed  to  this,  and 
a  thick  riband  is  nailed  on  the  top  of  the  fraise  near  the 
end . 

78.  The  point  of  fraise  sho^ild  be  at  least  7  feet  above 
the  bottom  of  the  ditch,  and  should  not  project  beyond 
the  foot  of  the  scarp,  so  as  not  to  shelter  the  enemy  from 
logs,  stones,  &c.,  rolled  from  the  parapet  into   the  ditch. 

79.  Stockade.  Trunks  of  small  trees  from  9  to  12  inches 
in  diameter  and  12  feet  long,  are  selected  to  form  a  stock- 
ade. They  are  planted  in  juxtaposition,  in  a  similar  man- 
ner to  a  palisading,  and  are  used  for  the  same  purposes. 

SO.  Chevaiix-de-frise,  are  beams  of  wood  from  6  to  10 
feet  long,  which  are  cut  in  a  square  or  hexagonal  form, 
and  havs  pointed  *t-akes  or  sword  blades  inserted  in   th« 


HELD      tOHX/Fli'A'l'lON.  '  U05 

ijices  ;  when  several  arc  used,  in  one.length,  they  are  chain- 
ed together  to  provcnt  the  enemy  from  removing  them  ; 
and  they  are  made  of  the  lengths  just  mentioned  in  ovd^v 
that  they  may  be  portable. 

81.  They  are  employed  as  t^mporiiry. barriers  to  impeda 
the  passage  of  a  breach,  the  entrance  into  a  work,  to  block 
up  a  street,  &c.  ;  they  are  occasionally  placed  at  the  foot? 
of  the  counterscarp  of  the  ditch,  and,  also  on  the  berme  ; 
in  the  latter  situation,  they  must  be  covered  fr«m  the  view 
and  fire  of  the  enemy  by  a  small  glacis. 

82.  Pointed  Stctlccs  are  frequently  fixed  in  the  ground, 
at  any  place  at  which  the  enemy  might  occupy  at  tlnj 
time  of  an  assault ;  as  on  the  bermes  of  works,  the  edges 
of  trous-de-loup,  and  in  the  spaces  between  them.  They 
must  be  firmly  planted  in  the  ground,  and  if  they  arc 
pointed  before  insertion,  two  mallets  must  be  u?ed,  one  oC 
which  is  provided  with  a  conical  hole  to  receive  the  point 
«f  the  stake,  while  the  blQ'.vs  are  struck  with  the  other; 
thcBC  pickets  may  be  conveniently  formed  of  the  small 
branches  cut  from  the  trees  intended  \'qi'  abattis. 

INUNDATI02xS. 

83.  It  frequently  occurs  in  the  field  that  small  streams 
or  rivulets  are  met  with,  which  of  themselves  offer  no 
impediment  to  the  advance  of  an  enemy,  but  which,  by- 
judicious  management,  may  bo  made  effectually  to  check 
his  attack  on  certain  points  where  the  water  may  be  col- 
lected- 

84.  It  is  done  by  damming  back  a  shallow  water  course 
so  as  to  make  it  overflow  its  valley.  To  be  effective,  an 
inuudaliou  should  be  six  feet  deep.     When  this  depth  cau- 


206  MBLD    lORTinCATluX. 

Bot  be  procured,  trous-de-loap,  or  else  short  ditches,  placed 
in  quincunx  order,  are  dug,  and  the  whoi'e  is  covered 
with  a  sheet  of  water,  which,  at  the  ditches,  must  be  at 
least  six  feet  in  depth. 

85.  A  dam  may  be  formed  in  the  following  manner  : 
after  constructing  an  embankment  of  earth  on  each  side  of 
th«  stream,  perpendicular  to  its  leiigth,  as  far  as  the  hanfc^ 
atones  and  gravel  should  be  thrown  into  the  water  to-  di- 
minish its  depth  :  then  two  heaps  of  earth  are  prepared, 
one  on  each  bank,  aud  as  many  workmen  being  set  on  as 
can  be  employed  without  impeding  each  other  ;  the  earth 
from  those  heap^s  is  thi'owninto  the  stream,  over  the  stones 
and  grave),  as  rapidly  as  possible,  until  the  embankments 
previously  formed,  arc  connected  together  across  the 
stream. 

86.  It  rarely  occurs  that  sufTicient  means  ai  e  to  be 
found  in  the  field  to  allow  of  a  dam  being  made  more  than 
ten  feet  high;  and  suppaeing  tbas  heisght  to  be  given,  the 
difference  o-f  level  between  any  two  dams  should  be  five 
feet,  in  order  that  the  shallowest  part  of  the  inundation 
may  be  five  feet  deep,  and  therefore  not  fordable. 

87.  The  distance  at  which  dams  shoiild  be  placed  from 
one  another,  will  depend  upon  tbe  faVl  of  t^e  bed  of  the 
stream.,  and  must  be  determined  by  leveling.  The  thick- 
aess  of  th.e  dam  at  the  top,  may  be  made  equal  to  the 
depth  of  water  intended  to  be  retained,  but  if  it  is  liable 
to  be  battered  by  artillery,  it  should  be  ten  feet  thick  at 
the  top.  The  exterior  slope  of  the  dam>  may  be  left  at  the- 
aatural  s-lopo,  of  the  earth,  while  to  that  opposed  to  the 

stream,  a  base  of  not  less  than  double  its  height  should  h& 
i^ifen. 


FIELD    FORTIFICAWOX.  «V4 

«8.  A  sluice  or  weste  weir  should  be  prorided  at  the 
height  to  which  it  is  desired  the  water  should  rise,  oth- 
erwise, the  water  being  allowed  to  flow  over  every  part,* 
the  dam  would  be  destroyed.  These  openings,  or  waste 
weirs  must  be  rivetted  with  fascines  or  timber,  and  ought 
to  be  completed  before  the  dam  w  carried  up  to  Ub  full 

height. 

€9.  Artificial  inundations  seldom  admit  of  being  turned 
to  an  efiective  use,  owing  to  the  difficulties  in  forming 
them,  and  the  ease  by  which  tiiey  can  be  drained  by  tho 
enemy.  But  when  it  is  practicable  to  procure  only  a 
shallow  sheet  of  water,  it  it  should  not  be  neglected,  as  it 
will  cjtuse  some  apprehension  to  the  enemy.  In  some 
-cases  by  damming  back  a  brook,  the  water  may  be  raised 
■to  a  level  sufficient  to  be  conducted  into  the  ditches  of  the 
work,  and  render  some  parts  unassailable.  The  ditches  in 
5Uoh  cases  should  be  made  very  wide,  and  to  hold  about 
the  depth  of  sIk  feet.  During  freezing  weather  the  ice 
should  be  broken  in  the  middle  of  the  ditch,  and  a  chan- 
nel of  at  least  twelve  feet  be  kept  open,  if  practicable.— 
The  ice  taken  out  should  be  piled  up  irregularly  on  eadL 
side  of  the  channel;  and,  as  a  farther  precaution  against 
«  surprise,  water  should  be  thrown  ob  the  parnpet  t« 
freeze. 

MIXES. 

90.  Attempts  at  applying  mines  to  field  works  have 
seldom  proved  successful,  owing  to  the  rapid  character 
of  the  assault,  from  which  the  mines  are  usually  sprung 
too  soon  or  too  late ;  so  that  the  only  eficct  that  can  be 
counted  upon  for  their  use,  is  the  panic  they  may  create. 


20$  FiET.»     FQP.TIFICATieS. 

91.  There  is  one  species  of  ciine  denominated  a  '»tons 
fougasse,  which  it  is  thought  might  be  snceessfv^ly  applied 

*to  the  defence  of  the  ditches  and  the  salients-^f  the  field 
■vvorks.  To  make  this  mine,  an  inclined  funnel-shaped 
excayation  is  made  to  the  depth  of  five  or  six  feet,  at  the 
bottom  of  the  funnel,  a  bor  containing  55}bs.  ofpowdar  ia 
jdaced  Avith  which  !i  powder-hose  communicates. 'A  strong 
.''hield  of  wood,  formed  of  battens  well  nailed  together,  is 
placed  in  front  of  the  box  ;  and  three  or  four  cubic  yards 
of  pebbles,  or  an  equal  wsight  of  brick-bats,  or  other  ma- 
terials, are  filled  in  against  the  shield.  Earth  is  then 
well  rammed  around  the  shield  on  top  and  behind,  to  pre- 
vent the  explosion  from  taking  place  in  the  wrong  direc- 
tion. A  fougasse  of  this  size,  when  sprung,  will  scatter 
the  pebbles  oyer  a  surface  of  sixty  yards  in  length  and 
seventy  yards  in  breadth. 

92.  A  good  method  of  discharging  fougasses  at  th$  mo- 
ment required,  is  to  place  a  loaded  musket  with  the  muz- 
xle  in  the  priming  of  the  fougasse,  and  a  wire  attached  to 
the  trigger;  the  Vv'ire  can  be  led  in  any  direction,  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  hose,  and  being  pulled  at  the  proper 
moment,  the  explosion  will  take  place. 

THE  OUTLINES  OF  FIELD  WORKS. 

93.  Tlic  direction  which  a  parapet  is  made  to  assume  in 
order  to  enclose  or  partiall}'-  enclose  the  ground  to  be  for- 
tified, is  called  the  outline  of  a  work. 

94.  The  following  are  general  principles  to  be  observed 
in  determining  the  outlines  of  field  works  : 

1st.  There  should  be  a  reciprocal  defense  between  all  the 
parts  of  works,  so  that    the   ground   over  whirh  an  ene- 


FIBL»    ro.RTTFTfATION*.  209 

tnj  must  pass  to  the  attack,  should,  if  possible,  be  seen 
b©th  in  front  and  in  flank. 

2dly.  The  "  lines  of  defence"  must  not  exceed  th«  eftec- 
tire  range  of  muskets,  viz :  about  160  yards. 

3dly.  Re-entering  angles,  (via  :  flanking  angles,)  ought 
never  to  be  less  than  90°  and  seldom  more  than  100°  ;  for 
if  less  than  90°,  the  men  on  the  flanking  parts  would  fire 
against  each  other  ;  and  if  more  than  100°,  the  fire  of  the 
flanking  parts  would  diverge  too  far  from  the  salient  to  be 
flanked. 

4tlilj.  The  salient  angles  of  works  should  be  as  obtuse 
as  possible,  and  never  lest  than  G0°,  otherwise  the  interior 
space  might  become  too  contracted  ;  the  angle  would  be 
so  sharp  as  to  be  quickly  worn  away  by  the  weather,  and 
would  be  easily  battered  down  ;  also  the  undefended*  sec- 
toral space  in  front  of  the  salient  angles  (which  is  tko  sup- 
plement of  the  angle)  would  become  very  great ;  and 

5thly.  The  outline  of  a  field  work  should  bo  proportion- 
ed in  length  to  the  number  of  men  and  guns  intended  for 
its  defence.     One  man  occupies  a  space  of  three  feet. 

95.  The  names  of  the  works  most  commonly  employed 
infield  fortification,  are  Redans;  Lunettes;  Redouts; 
Star-Forts  ;  Bastion-Forts,  <&c,,  and  works  used  mostly 
for  lines  of  intrenchment,  such  asTKNAfLLES  and  Cuemaii- 

LEKKS. 

*NoTE. — Undefended  by  direct  fire.  To  prevent  the 
enemy  from  approaching  the  work  on  these  undefended 
sectors  the  salients  should  be  directed  towards  gome  natu- 
ral obstacle,  such  as  a  marsh,  &c.  ;  or  if  this  cannot  be 
done,  then  artificialobst^rles  should  be  fti.^poRPd  in  their 
front. 


210 


FIELD    FORTIFICATION. 


•96.  The  Redabt,  {Fig.  2.)  is  a  work  consisting  of  two 
faces,  wliicii  form  witli  each  otiier  a  salient  angle,  the 
rear  being  open.  When  the  faces  are  not  more  than  20 
jards  in  length,  the  work  is  sometimes  called  a  fleche. 

97.  The  redan  is  in  the   m<?5t  advantageous  position, 

when  the  ground  before  the  salient  angles  and  approaches 

to   the  gorge  are  inaccessible,  or  when  the  work  can  bo 

saipported  by  troops ;  for   example,   when  with  obstacles 

Fig.  2. 


Itedan^ 
In  its  front,  it  is  employed  as  an  advanced  work  to  defend 
lioUow  grpund    which  cannot  be  seen  from  the  principal 
work— to  protect  a  bridge,  a  dam,  a  road,  a  defile,  or  to 
■cover  a  guard,  an  advanced  post,  <fec. 

98.  The  weak  points  of  this  work  are  :  that  it  has  an 
open  gorge,  and  that  its  ditch,  and  the  ground  in  front  of 
the  salient  angle,  are  undefended  either  by  direct  or  flank- 
in^  fir©. 


PlELli     FORTiriCATlON'.  211 

99.  On  account  of  its  having  an  open  gorge,  it  is  seldom 
advisable  to  co"nstruct  a  redan  as  an  isolated  work  ;  its 
rear  should  be  exposed  to  the  fire  of  some  collateral  work, 
or  have  free  communication  with  a  body  of  troops  in  its 
rear,  to  whom  it  may  form  an  advanced  post,  or  outvrork  ; 
o-r  otherwise  the  faces  should  terminate  on  a  river,  a  marsh 
or  any  inaccessible  ground,  which  would  prevent  it  from 
being  turned. 

100.  The  hrst  defect,  viz  :  that  of  having  an  open  gorge, 
may  be  remedied  in  a  slight  degree  bv  placing  along 
the  gorge,  abatti?,  trous-de-loup,  Ac,  (or  palisades,  if 
time  and  material  abound);  as  for  the  second  defect,  a 
direct  fire  may  be  bi'ought  iu  front  of  the  salient  angle  by 
rounding  the  latter,  or  cutting  off  the  angle  by  a  short 
face  not  less  than  G  yards  long.  A  [flanking  fire  may  be 
procured  for  the  ditch  and  salients,  by  forming  auxilliary 
flanks,  which  may  be  placvd  either  towards  the  middle  or 
at  the  extremities  of  the  faces  ;  such  a  flank  5Ught  not  to 
he  less  than  12  yards  long,  that  there  may  bo  at  least  12 
iiien  firing  from  it. 

101.  Double  Redans  consists  of  two  redans  joined  to- 
gether, their  exterior  faces  being  generally  longer  than 
the  others ;  the  French  call  a  work  of  this  kind  a  queue 
d'hyronde. 

102.  A  Triplh  Redak  consists  of  three  redans  joined 
together,  the  exterior  faces  of  these  are  .<ilso,  in  general, 
longer  than  the  others. 

103.  A  Lunette  {Fifj.  3.)  is  a  large  redan    with  flanks 
•parallel  or*  nearly  parallel  to   the  capital  ;  as  a  general 

rule,,  the  flanks  are  traced  perpendicularly  t^?  th?  intended 


•212 


TiZLV    rosTiriTAfior;. 


line  of  fire,  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  on  certain  spots  a 
more  direct  fire  than  could  be  made  from  the  faces  of  the 
work. 

104.  It  is  often  desirable  to  secure  gorges  of  these  works 

against  surprise  ;  this  maj  be   done  by  disposing  across 

the  gorges  a  single  or  double  row  of  palisades,  or  a  stock- 

-ads  work,  in  the  form  of  a  front  fortification  or  of  a  ten- 

Fig.  3. 


Lunette. 
aille  j  there  sliould  be  a  banquette  to  it,  that  the  defend- 
ers may  have  comm&nd  over  the  assailants,  and  a  ditch  to 
prevent  the  enemy  from  getting  close,  and  cutting,  burn- 
iog,  or  blowing  down  the  obstacle.  Troua-de-loup,  abat- 
tis,  and  chevaus-de-frize  are  DOiretimes  disposed  acros3 
iJae  gor^?  for  the  saias  purpose. 


FIBL»    r9RlirX01TIt>'.  213 

105.  A  Redout  is  a  closed  work,  the  parapet  of  which 
does  not  form  re-entering  angles  ;  it  maj  be  quadrilateral, 
polygonal,  or  circular. 
106.  Circular  redoubts,  although  ther  have  no  undefend- 
ed sectors,  and  enclose  a  greater  space  than  any  other  re- 
dout with  an  equal  lentrth  of  perapet,  are  seldom  formed 
cn  accouut  of  the  diffiulty  of  their  construction,  and  also 
because  their  ditches  are  incapable  of  any  flanking  defense: 
the  lines  of  fire  diverging  from  the  parapet,  any  one  spot 
on  the  ground  is  very  imperfectly  defended. 

107.  A  four  sided  figure  is  the  best  and  most  usual  form 
for  a  redout,  because  it  is  of  simple  construction;  th3 
ditches  are  more  easily  flanked,  and  there  are  not  so  many 
points  of  attack  as  in  a  redoubt  of  a  greater  number  of  an- 
gles. Redouts  being  closed  works,  are  better  able  to 
stand  detached  than  redans  or  lunettes,  and  are,  therefore, 
constructed  when  a  small  work  is  required  without  aay 
immediate  protection  from  the  gorge- the  armed  party 
being  strong  enough  to  complete  and  man  a  four-sided 
redout,  each  side  of  which  is  not  less  tha^  15  yards  long] 

103.  The  size  depends  on  the  number  of  men  who  are  to 
garrison  it,  and  upon  the  number  of  guns  which  it  is  to 
contain  ;  also  upon  the  length  of  time  during  which  it  is 
to  be  oocupied;  this  may  t^e  for  a  few  hours  only,  (as  on  a 
field  of  battle)  or  for  a  period  of  weeks  or  months. 

109.  If  wanted  only  for  a  few  hours,  it  will  be  suflicieut 
to  allow  3  feet  in  length  of  parapet  lor  every  man  of  tho 
detachment ;  or  for  every  two  men,  if  they  are  to  be 
formed  in  double  rank.  If  guns  are  to  be  placed  in  the 
work,  16  fe^t  of  parapet  must  h%  jfiven  to  each,   in  order 


214  IIKLK     FoKtlKICAllON, 

that  the  gunners  may  hare  sufficient  room  on  each  side  to 
work  it. 

110.  But  when  the  redout  is  dc-?tined  to  contain  a  body 
of  men  for  a  considerable  length  of  time,  it  becomes  nec- 
cessary  for  them  to  have  room  to  lie  down  within  the  ban- 
quette with  their  arms  and  packs;  supposing  one-third  to 
be  on  guard,  patrolling,  Ac,  two  square  yards  in  addition 
to  the  slope  of  the  banquette,  are  sufficient  for  each  man, 
and  36  square  yards  for  each  gun  and  its  appointments. 

111.  The  rule,  consequently,  far  a  square  redoubt  is  :  to 
multiply  the  given  number  of  men  by  2,  and  number  of  guns 
by  36,  for  the  number  of  square  yards  which  the  work 
ought  to  contain  within  the  foot  of  its  banquette,  the 
squarft  root  of  the  product  will  be  the  length  in  yards  of 
the  side  of  the  square  forming  that  area  ;  adding  to  this 
result  the  breadth  of  two  interior  slopes,  and  of  two  ban- 
quettes with  their  slopes,  (about  7  yards  altogether,)  we 
shall  have  the  side  of  the  square  formed  by  the  crest  of  the 
parapet. 

112.  A  square  redout  ought  not  to  be  traced  with  less 
extent  of  sides  than  15  yards  ;  for,  by  employing  the  cal- 
culation explained  above,  it  will  be  found  that  such  a 
work  is  only  just  sufficient  to  contain  the  number  of  men 
necessary  for  its  defense  ;  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  usual  to 
make  a  square  redout  with  a  longer  side  than  40  yards, 
because  it  would  require  a  garrison  more  suitable  to  a 
work  of  a  stronger  outline. 

113.  The  imperfections  of  redoubts  are,  that  they  are 
entirely  without  a  Hanking  Gre  for  the  defense  of  the 
ground  in  front  of  their  faces,  also  that  their  ditches  and 


Mtl.S     l«KriKH'ATfON.  2lf> 

the  sectoral  spaces  before  the  angles,  are  without  any  fire 
whatcvei"  for  their  defense. 

114.  A  flanking^  defense  for  the  ditches  may  be  obtain- 
ed b}' placing  palisade  or  stockade  caponnieres  in  thera, 
either  at  the  angles  or  in  the  middle  of  the  faces ;  by 
tambours  in  a  like  position,  or  by  loopholed  galleries  un- 
der the  counterscarp  at  the  salients  of  the  work. 

115.  A  ditch  caponniere  is  an  oblong  structure  formed 
with  palisades,  or  with  structure  work,  loop-holed,  and 
roofed  over  with  planks  and  earth  to  secure  the  men  from 
the  effects  of  shell,  and  a  plunging  fire  from  the  counter- 
scarp. It  ought,  if  possible,  to  be  flanked  with  musketry, 
to  prevent  an  enemy  from  closing  on  it,  and  getting  un- 
der cover. 

116.  The  best  position  for  a  caponniere  in  the  ditch  of 
a  redoubt,  is  at  the  salient  angle,  as  then  one  caponniere 
flanks  two  branches  of  the  ditch.  It  should  be  separated 
from  the  counterscarp  by  an  enlargement  of  the  ditch,  to 
prevent  the  enemy  from  using  it  as  a  bridge  to  cross  the 
ditch,  and  it  ought  to  have  a  wicket  to  allow  of  sallies  into 
the  ditch. 

117.  To  lessen  the  destructive  effect  of  shell,  traverses 
should  be  placed  in  all  closed  works  when  those  missiles 
are  likely  to  be  employed  against  them. 

118.  the  countei'scarp  <7oZiery  consists  of  a  frame  work, 
covered  at  the  top  with  a  sheeting,  which  is  placed  within 
the  counterscarp  at  the  salients.  The  front  of  the  gallery 
is  made  of  9  or  10  inch  scantl'ng,  placed  upright,  and  ar- 
ranged with  loop-hole  defences  ;  these  pieces  are  connect- 
ed at  the  top  by  a  cap  sill.  Cross  pieces  are  notched  on 
the  cap  sill  about  three  feet  apart ;  they  are  supported  by 


2!K  yinLt  r«)iTWi9AViO.\. 

ahalves  placed  four  feet  from  the  front  piece.  The  cross 
pieces  may  project  three  feet  beyond  the  shaWcs,  and,  if 
necessary,  be  braced  from  the  shalves.  The  gallery  is  cov- 
ered on  top  by  one  and  a-half  inch  shoeting  and  behind  in 
a  similar  manner,  but  only  to  the  height  of  5  feet  abore 
the  bottom.  This  arrangement  gives  a  free  space  be- 
hind the  back  sheeting  for  the  play  of  the  rammer  in 
loading.  The  height  of  the  gallery  may  be  only  7  feet,  its 
•width,  accorning  to  the  foregoing  arrangements,  is  4  feet. 
It  should  be  covered  on  top  by  at  least  3  feet  of  earth.  The 
level  of  the  gallery  should  be  the  same  as  the  ditch;  and 
there  should  be  a  small  ditch  in  front  of  it,  to  prevent 
the  enemy  from  closing  on  the  loop-holes,  or  obstructing 
their  fire  by  filling  the  ditch  in  front  of  them  by  means  of 
sand  bags,  fascines,  &c.  '  The  entrance  to  the  gallery  is 
by  a  narrow  door. 

POWDER  MAGAZINES. 

119.  The  main  objects  to  be  attended  to  iu  a  powder 
magazine  are,  to  place  it  in  a  position  least  exposed  to  the 
enemy's  fire;  to  make  it  shot  proof;  and  to  secure  the 
powder  from  moisture. 

120.  If  there  are  traverses,  such  for  example,  as  are  used 
in  defilemrjnt,  the  magazines  may  bo  made  in  them  ;  or 
they  may  be  placed  at  the  foot  of  a  barbette ;  or,  in  dry 
soil  they  may  be  made  partly  under  ground. 

121.  The  magazine  should  be  at  least  G  feet  high,-and 
about  the  same  width  within  ;  its  length  will  depend  on  the 
quantity  of  aiiimuiiilion.  It  may  be  contitructed  of  fas- 
cines, gabions,  or  coff <■■)•■  work,  or  any  means  found  at  hand 
may  be  used    which  will  afloet  tk»  end  In  view. 


FJELB    f  01  Tiri«Ari©N.  217 

122.  If  fascines  are  used,  the  sides  should  dope  out  to 
resist  the  pressure  of  the  earth  ;  the  fascines  should  be  per- 
fectly secured  bj  pickets  ani  anchoring  withes.  The  top 
may  be  formed  by  a  row  of  joists,  of  6  inch  scantling,  placed 
about  two  and  a-half  feet  apart;  these  should  be  covered, 
by  two  layers  of  fascines  laid  side  by  side,  and  the  whole 
covered  in  by  at  least  3  feet  thickness"  of  earth.  The 
bottom  should  be  covered  by  a  flooring  of  joists  and  boards; 
a  shallow  ditch  being  left  under  the  flooring,  with  a  pitch 
towards  the  door  of  the  magazine,  to  allow  any  water  that 
might  leak  through  to  be  taken  out.  A  thatch  of  straw 
might  be  used  on  the  inside,  but  it  is  somewhat  dangerous, 
owing  to  its  combustibility;  hides  or  tarpaulins  arc  better 
and  will  keep  out  the  moisture  more  effectually. 

123.  A  coffcr-xcorh  is  formed  by  making  frames  of  6  inch 
scantling;  each  frame  is  composed  of  two  uprights,  termed 
stanchions,  and  a  cap  and  ground  sill,  well  nailed  together. 
It  is  6  feet  wide,  and  6  feet  high  in  the  clear.  These 
frames  are  placed  upright,  and  parallel  to  each  other, 
about  two  and  a-half  feet  apart ;  they  are  covered  on  the 
top  and  sides  by  one  and  a-half  inch  plank,  which  is  termed 
a  sheeting.  The  magazine  otherwise  is  constructed  as  in 
the  last  case. 

124.  When  gabions  are  used,  a  hole  is  usually  dug  in 
the  ground  to  form  part  of  the  magazine;  the  gabions  are 
placed  in  two  rows,  side  by  side  around  the  hole,  and  are 
filled  with  earth.  The  top  is  formed  as  in  the  case  of  fas- 
cines. 

125.  The  mouth  of  the  magazine  is  covered  by  a  splinter 
proof  shelter .  This  is  constructed  by  taking  scantling  8 
by  10  inche?,  cut  into  suitable  lengths,  and  placing'  it  iu 


218  FIEtD    FOUIIFICATION. 

an  inclined  position,  so  as  to  cover  the  mouth,  and  leare 
an  easy  access  to  it.  The  pieces,  usually,  ai'c  inclined  45° 
and  are  placed  side  by  side  ;  they  are  covered  by  at  least 
two  feet  of  earth  or  sods;  and  hides  or  tarpaulins  are 
thrown  over  the  whole. 

126.  Splinter  proof  blinds  are  mainly  intended  to  afford 
a  shelter  against  the  fragments  of  hollow  projectiles  that 
explode  in  the  work.  They  may  bo  used  as  a  kind  of  bar- 
rack for  the  troops ;  and  to  store  provisions,  &c. 

BATTERIES. 

127.  The  term  battery  is  usually  applied  to  a  collection 
of  several  guns  ;  it  is  also  used  in  speaking  of  the  arrange- 
ments made  of  a  parapet  to  enable  the  guns  to  fire  over  it, 
or  through  openings  in  ic ;  as  a  harhitte  battery,  an  embra- 
sure battery,  &c.  Two  kinds  of  batteries  are  used  in  the 
defense  of  intrenchments,  the  barbette  battery  and  the  em- 
brasure battery. 

128.  The  Barbette  is  a  construction  by  means  of  which  a 
piece  can  be  fired  over  a  parapet.  It  consists  of  a  mound 
of  earth,  thrown  up  against  the  interior  slope ;  the  upper 
surface  of  which  is  level,  and  two  feet  nine  inches  below 
the  interior  crest  for  guns  of  small  calibre,  and  four  feet 
for  heavy  guns.  If  the  barbette  is  raised  behind  a  face,  its 
length  should  be  sufficient  to  allow  sixteen  and  a  half  to 
18  feet  long  the  interior  crest  for  each  gun  ;  and  its  depth, 
or  the  perpendicular  distance  from  the  foot  of  the  interior 
slope  to  the  rear,  should  be  twenty  four  feet,  for  the  service 
of  the  guns.  The  earth  of  the  barbette  at  the  rear  and 
sides  receive  the  natural  slope.    To  assend  the  barbette,  a 


t  iKiji    I'ui'M  11- u'Ji  rn"».\-  2Ly 

constrHCtion,  termed  a  ramp,  is  made  :  this  is  an  inclined 
plane  of  earth,  which  connects  thetopof  the  barbette  with 
the  terre-plein.  The  ramp  is  ten  feet  wide  at  the  top,  and 
its  slope  is  six  base  to  one  perpendicular.  The  earth  at  the 
sides  receives  the  natural  slope.  The  ramp  should  be  at 
some  convenient  point  in  the  rear,  and  take  up  as  little 
room  as  possible. 

129.  The  advantajjes  of  the  barbette,  consist  in  the  com- 
manding position  of  the  guns,  and  in  a  very  wide  field  of 
fire;  on  these  accounts  the  salients  are  the  best  positions 
for  them.  Their  defects  are,  that  they  expose  the  guns 
and  men  to  the  enemy's  artillery  and  sharpshooters. 

130.  Light  guns,  particularly  howitzers,  are  the  best  for 
arming  barbettes ;  because  the  hollow  projectile  of  the  lat- 
ter is  very  formidable,  both  to  the  enemy's  columns  and  to 
his  cavalry  ;  and  when  he  opens  his  fire  against  the  salients, 
the  light  pieces  can  be  readily  withdrawn. 

131.  The  Emhrnsnre  is  an  opening  made  in  the  parapet 
for  a  gun  to  fire  through.  The  bottom  of  the  embrasure, 
termed  the  «o?e,  is  two  feet  nine  inches,  or  four  feet  above 
the  ground,  on  which  the  wheels  of  the  carriage  rest,  ac- 
cording to  the  size  of  the  gun  ;  it  the  interior  crest.  These 
four  lines  form  the  boundaries  of  the  two  cheeks  on  the  su- 
perior and  exterior  slopes. 

132.  When  the  directrix  is  perpendicular  to  the  direc- 
tion of  the  parapet,  the  embrasure-is  termed  direct.  When 
the  directrix  makes  an  acute  angle  with  it,  the  embrasure 
is  termed  oblique. 

133.  The  manner  of  laying  out  an  objique  embrasure  is 
similar  to  the  direct ;  the  mouth  is  of  a  rectangular  form, 
but  is  made  wider  in  proportion  to  the   obliquity,  ia  order 


22ft  iiRLi  tei; TfricATTOx. 

that  the  part  of  the  embrasure,  which  corresponds  to  the 
muzzle  of  the  gun,  is  nearly  of  the  same  width  in  both  the  di- 
rect and  oblique  embrasures.  The  exterior  width  of  the 
sole  is  made  equal  to  one-half  the  length  of  the  directrix, 
measured  on  the  &ole.  The  cheeks  are  laid  out  as  in  the 
last  case. 

134.  The  muzzle  of  a  gun  should  enter  at  least  six  inches 
into  the  embrasure,  to  prevent  the  blast  from  injuring  the 
cheeks ;  <this  limits  the  obliquity  of  the  directrix  to  about 
60^  for  long  guns. 

135.  The  height  of  the  cheeks  must  not  be  more  than 
four  feet,  for  the  same  reason  ;  it  will,  therefore,  in  some 
cases,  be  necessary  to  raise  the  ground  on  which  the 
wheels  rest. 

136.  The  parapet  of  a  battery  is  usually  termed  the 
epaulment.  The  interior  face  of  the  cpaulment,  and  the 
cheeks  of  the  slopes  outward  to  allow  the  gun  to  be  fired 
under  an  inclination,  the  base  of  this  slope  should  never  fee 
less  than  six  times  the  altitude  ;  the  interior[open5ng, 
termed  the  mouthy  is  from  eighteen  inches  to  two  feet  wide, 
according  to  the  calibre  of  the  gun,  and  is  of  a  rectangu- 
lar form  ;  the  embrasure  wddens  towards  the  exterior, 
which  widening  is  termed  the  splay  ;  the  manner  in  which 
the  play  is  regulated,  is  by  producing  the  sole  to  the  exte- 
rior slope  of  the  parapet,  and  makiag  this  exterior  line 
measured  on  the  sole,  equal  to  half  the  distance  between 
the  inner  and  outer  lines  of  the  sole.  This  construction 
makes  the  sole  a  trapezoidal  figure,  the  side  of  the  trape- 
zoid, on  the  interior,  being  eighteen  inches,  or  two  feet ; 
the  ©pposite  side  being  equal  to  half  the  perpendicular  dis- 
tance betw«en  the  tw^  Bido*.     The  line  which  bisects  thi? 


sole  13  termed  the  directrix  of  the  embrasure  :  the  sides  of 
the  embrasure,  termed  the  cheeks,  are  laid  out  by  setting 
offtxo  points  on  the  exterior  crest  of  the  parapet,  one  on 
the  right,  the  other  on  the  left  of  the  sole,  so  that  the  hori- 
zontal distance  of  these  points  from  the  sole  shall  be  equal 
to  one-third  their  height  above  it.  Lines  are  then  drawn 
on  the  exterior  slope,  froin  these  points  to  the  exterior 
points  of  the  fole  ;  lines  are  in  like  mnnner  drawn  from  the 
same  points,  on  the  superior  slope  to  the  upper  points  of 
the  mouth,  on  embrasures,  are  riveted  in  the  us^ual  manner. 
That  part  of  the  interior  face  which  lies  below  the  chase  of 
the  gun  is  termed  the  (/cHoxiV^erc.  The  mass  of  earth  be« 
tweent  two  cnbrasures  is  termed  a  merlon. 

137.  The  embrasures  are  generally  cut  out  after  the 
ftpaulment  is  thrown  up.  If  their  position  is  decided  upon 
beforehand,  ihej  must  be  roughly  formed  at  first,  and  be 
finished  after  the  epaulment  is  made- 

138.  The  advantages  of  embrasures  are,  that  the  men 
and  guns  are  less  exposed  than  in  a  barbette  battery, — 
Their  principal  defects  are,  that  they  have  a  very  limited 
field  ol  five ;  they  weaken  the  parapet,  and  present  open- 
ings through  which  an  enemy  may  penetrate  in  an  assault. 
Owing  to  their  limited  field  of  fire,  they  are  chiefly  used 
for  the  protection  of  particular  points;  as  to  flank  a  ditch, 
protect  a  salient,  enfilade  a  road,  &c.  The  most  suitable 
position  for  tlj^em  in  a  work  is  on  tiie  flanks. 

139.  Platforms.  "When  a  gun  is  fired  often  in  the  same 
direction,  the  ground  under  the  wheels  is  £oon  worn  into 
ruts;  it  is  to  prevent  Ihir,  that  platforms  of  timber  are 
wsed  in  sxich  cases. 

140.  The  shape  of  th;»  plaffrrrrn  ]•>.  H?waHy  a   rertangrl*  ; 


2T1  nKLn   FonriFiCATiox, 

in  some  cases  v^liere  a  wide  field  of  fire  is  to  be  obtained^ 
the  form  is  a  trapezoid.  The  rectangular  platform  is  10 
feet  wide,  and  17  feci  long,  for  seigc  pieces;  and  9  fee^ 
wide  and  15  feet  long,  for  the  field  guns.  It  consists  of 
three  sleepers  of  6  inch  scantling,  either  16  or  17  feet  long, 
which  are  laid  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  theepaul- 
ment,  and  are  covered  with  two-inch  plank,  twelve  inches 
wide,  and  cat  into  lengths  (»f  9  or  10  feet.  Between  the 
ends  of  the  sleepers,  and  thefootof  the  genouillerc,  apiece 
of  8  inch  scantling,  9  feet  long,  termed  a  heurter,  is  laid  ; 
it  should  project  about  six  inches  above  the  platform,  and 
be  bisected  hy  the  directrix.  The  object  of  the  heurter  is 
to  prevent  the  wheels  from  being  run  against  the  revet- 
ment, and  also  to  give  the  gun  its  proper  direction,  par- 
ticularly in  night  firing. 

141.  To  lay  a  platform,  the  earth  on  which  it  is  to  rest, 
should  be  well  rammed  and  levelled ;  three  trenches  are 
then  made  for  the  sleepers,  two  of  which  should  be  placed 
ender  the  wheels,  and  the  middle  one  under  the  trail.  The 
sleepers  are  laid  flush  with  the  ground,  and  firmily  secuj'ed 
by  pickets  driven  at  their  sides  and  ends,  and  the  earth  is 
solidly  packed  ifl  the  trench  around  them  ;  the  plank  is 
then  laid  and  secured  by  nails  or  some  other  Aistenings. 

142.  If  the  platform  is  for  direct  firing,  with  full  chargep, 
the  ^ai7  may  be  made  six  inches  higer  than  the  front  to 
break  the  recoil ;  in  all  other  cases  itshould  be  horizontal. 

143.  A  platform  may  be  constructed  fimply  of  three 
pieces  of  timber,  one  under  each  wheel,  and  one  under  the 
trail,  firmly  secured  by  pickets,  and  connected  by  cross 
pieces,  into  which  they  are  halved. 

Mi.  For  barbetts,  the  platform  may  be  dippGng?d  with. 


riBLD     FORTinCAlIOA.  225 

or  if  used,  the  whole  surface  nearly  of  the  barbette,  should 
be  covered. 

H5.  If  the  platform  is  made  of  a  trapezoidal  from  it  will 
require  five  sleepers. 

LINES. 

14(?.  Lines  are  a  series  of  works  and  trcnflieisor  of  inde- 
pendent works,  arrraged  so  as  to  defend  cacli  other,  and 
the  ground  in  front  of  and  between  them. 

147.  Lines  are  used  to  cover  the  front  of  a  position,  or 
to  connect  important  redoubts  or  forts  together. 

148.  Lines  are  of  two  kinds,  such  as  aire  continuous,  and 
such  as  have  intervals  between  the  wor"ks. 

149.  The  former  are  principally  applicable  to  situations 
where  it  is  proposed  to  act  on  the  defensive  only,  and 
when  they  are  of  such  limited  extent  that  the  whole  line 
of  parapet  can  be  occupied  by  troops  sexclusive  of  reserves  ;. 
as  for  instance,  to  close  a  pass  between  scarped  inountaine, 
or  on  the  aea  shore,  or  on  the  banks  of  large  rivers  ;  thus 
resting  on  natural  obstacles  which  will  prevent  their  flank 
being  turned.  They  are  often  introduced  as  portions  of 
an  extended  line  with  intervals. 

150.  Extensive  continued  lines  can  make  but  slight  re- 
sistance, while  the  labour  necessarily  expended  in  executing 
them  is  considerable  ;  and  as  the  enemy  mny  menace  sev- 
eral points  at  once,  it  follows  that  as  many  troops  would  be- 
required  for  the  defense  as  for  the  attack,  in  which  case 
the  first  principal  of  fortification  is  violated.  Even  if  the 
defenders  have  a  sufficient  number  of  disposable  troops^, 
tbcj  act  when  within  lines,  under  adieadvantagc,  for  they 


224  riKLt)     }UEJIFI€AT10N. 

must  watch  and  follow  every  movement  of  the  eneiu j,  so 
as  to  be  equally  prepared  to  resist  a  false  and  a  real  at- 
tack. It  has  often  happened  that  while  the  defenders 
within  the  lines  were  concentrating  their  forces  to  oppose 
a  false  attack,  the  eneniy  has  penetrated  at  a  point  where 
he  was  not  expected;  and  a  continued  line  once  entered 
may  generally  be  deemed  lost. 

151.  Continuous  lines  of  redans  connected  by  curtains 
are  constructed  in  three  ways  :  in  the  first,  (which  is  the 
one  puincipalljf  used,)  as  described  by  Vauban,  the  salients 
of  the  redans  are  240  yards  asunder,  consequently  the 
musketry  fire  of  one  redan  does  not,  effectively,  defend  the 
Balient  of  the  next.  .  To  remedy  this  defect,  it  was  subse- 
quently recommended  that  the  salients  of  the  redans  should 
be  brought  within  musket  range  of  each  other,  or  withia 
160  yards. 

152.  In  both  of  these  constructions,  the  flanking  angles 
formed  by  the  faces  of  the  redans  and  the  curtains  joining 
them  must  exceed  160°,  and  consequently  the  flanking  de- 
fence is  very  impeifect. 

163.  Lines  o^  lenailles,  consists  of  parapets  forming  a  se- 
ries Df  salient  and  re-entering  angles,  and  are  in  fact,  like 
the  improved  redan  lines,  except  that  in  this  tracing,  the 
redans  are  all  of  the  same  size,  and  have  obtuse  angles. 

154.  They  are  traced  by  setting  off  distances  of  about 
200  yards  along  the  front  of  the  intended  lines,  to  marke 
the  position  of  the  salient  angles  ;  these  intervals  are  then 
bisected,  and  perpendiculars  drawn  towards  the  interior 
to  give  the  places  of  the  re-entering  angles.  The  perpen- 
diculars should  not  exceed  half  the  distance  between  the 
salients,  otherwise  the  re-entering  angles  would  be  less 
then  right  angles. 


rirts  roRTiFiCATiox.  225 

155.  CremailUre  lines  are  composed  of  alternate  short 
and  long  faces  at  right  angles  (or  nearly  so)  to  each  other  ; 
the  short  faces,  called  croffJiets,  are  made  about  30  yards 
long,  and  the  long  faces,  called  br<tnvhes,  about  100  yeads 
long. 

156.  These  lines  possess  the  following  advantages : 

Ipt.  The  branches  are  little  exposed  tc  bo  enfiladed, 
owing  to  the  small  projection  of  the  salients. 

2diy.  Each  branch  is  defended  not  only  by  the  fire  of 
th«  adjoining  crotchet,  but  by  several  others. 

3dlys  mioir  outline  is  very  easily  adapted  to  all  varieties 
<of  the  ground  ;  and  on  slopci-',  in  particular,  they  are  very 
advantageous,  because  a  stnall  additional  height  given  to 
the  e)otchets  will  defilade  a  long  extent  of  earth  from  the 
tire  of  an  ancmy  on  the  height. 

1.57.  Their  defects  are  : 

1st.  The  crotchets  being  short,  very  little  of  the  ditch 
of  each  is  defended  by  the  adjacent  branch; 

2dly.  A  battery  which  can  enHlade  one  branch  is  equally 
able  to  enfilade  several. 

158.  Cremalllore  lines  may  be  much  strengthened  by 
placing  along  their  front,  bastions  or  double  redans,  at  in- 
torvals  varying  from  690  to  800  yards,  in  order  that  a  cross 
tire  of  artillery  may  be  brought  from  them  in  front  of  the 
other  parts  of  the  line. 

f  yS9.  The  crotchets  sbould  face  towards  the  bastions^ 
or  redans,  in  order  that  the  firt^  fioni  the  crotchets  mar 
defenfl  the  salients  of  tb'.''9  woiks.  aud  that  the  branchce 
may  t).e  defiladed  by  bc»ng  diicctcd  on  the  bastion?  or 
double  ro'^ans. 


S'JS  FIKLB    FORTIKICATION. 

lilNES  WITH  INTERVALS  OR  BROKEN  LINES. 

160.  Broken  lines  should  always,  v>-hen  practicable,  be 
«r?po9ed  in  a  double  row,  and  in  puch  a  manner  that  the 
inner  works  may  flank  theontlinp;  the  advantages  pos- 
sessed by  broken  lines,  arc  : 

1st.  With  the  same  extent  as  continuous  lines,  they  ro- 
*|uire  less  labor  in  the  construction,  and  fewer  troOjDS  to 
jjccupy  them,  consequently  large  reserves  may  be  formed, 

2dly.  The  defenders  may  advance  in  force  and  in  a  regu- 
lar formation  through  the  intervals,  and  attack  tho  enemy 
should  he  have  been  thrown  into  confiision. 

3dly.  They  oblige  the  enemy  to  overpower  each  separate 
work  before  he  can  become  possessed  of  the  whole;  where- 
as if  a  continuous  line  be  forced  in  one  part,  it  is  general- 
ly lost  to  the  defenders. 

4thly.  If  the  enemy  has  gained  one  work,  he  will  then 
be  exposed  to  the  flanking  fire  of  the  adjacent  works,  and 
to  a  fire  from  the  works  in  the  second  line. 

IGl.  To  profit  fully  b}'  this  advantage,  when  the  front 
line  consists  of  closed  works,  their  rear  faces  ought  to  be 
of  slight  construction,  that  the  artillery  of  the  second 
line  may  easily  demolish  those  faces,  if  the  enemy  should 
gain  pc  ssession  of  the  works. 

162.  When  there  are  two  lines  of  works,  the  heaviest 
artillery  should  bo  placed  in  the  interior  line,  or  else  the 
enemy,  obtaining  possession  of  the  exterior  line,  would 
turn  the  guns  against  the  other,  and  have  a  superiority 
over  the  dofeniers. 

163.  When  lines  are  on  sloping  ground  descending  to- 
wards the  front,  the  slope  Sshould,  if  possible,  be  very  t^toep, 
so  as  to  form  an  escapement  befur  the  woj  k\-, 


MKLu   lonriFK'Ano*,  2"'.' 

164.  A  eiugle  row  of  redans  or  redouts  is  comparativi- 
iy  weak,  for  the  fire  from  tli cm  crosses  at  a  distance  iu 
front  of  the  intervals,  and  but  feebly  defends  tlie  salients. 
Lunettes  are  better  in  such  a  situation  on  account  of  tlic 
lire  of  the  flanks,  which  may  be  broug-ht  to  cross  the  capi- 
tals close  to  the  salient  angles. 

165.  The  intervals  between  the  works  which  form  a  bro- 
ken line,  should  not  exceed  l^O  yards,  in  order  that  they 
may  be  defended  by  an  effective  cross  fire  from  those  works- 

166.  The  different  works  should  occupy  the  most  promi- 
nent and  the  highest  ground  :  also  the  flanking  parts  ought 
to  be  perpendicular  to  their  lines  of  defense. 

167.  The  intervals  between  the  works  may  be  strength- 
ened by  artificial  obstacles,  or  by  a  trench,  for  troops, 
with  a  rough  parapet,  (like  the  first  parallel  in  a  seige) 
Laving  abroad  interior  slope  to  enable  the  men  to  advance 
over  it  when  occasion  requires. 

DEFENCE  OF  FIELD  WORKS, 

168.  A  spot  selected  for  a  military  post  should  not  be 
commanded,  especially  on  the  flank  or  in  the  rear,  within 
the  ordinary  range  of  a  field  piece.  There  should  be  plen- 
ty of  materials  on  the  spot  to  aid  in  strengthening  the 
works,  or  in  forming  obstructions  in  frontof  them,  the  soil 
should  be  of  a  nature  to  be  easily  worked,  and  the  position 
ehould  be  difficult  of  access  ;  it  should,  however,  offer  the 
means  of  retreating  in  security,  and  with  facility. 

169.  There  is  no  talent  more  essential  to  an  officer  than 
that  of  seizing  at  a  glance  the  strong  and  weak  points  of  a 
position.  This  talent,  known  by  the  name  of  '"JlUitar,'/ 
toi'p  d'  aciV  can  be  atquiicdaloncby  practice  and  stud  t  ■ 


228  FIELD    ««RTIFI«AriON. 

for  whatever  may  be  said  of  natural  gifts,  apprehension, 
however  quick  it  may  be,  can  supply  the  places  of  those 
indispensable  requisitions  in  every  art,  and  in  no  one  arc 
they  more  so  than  in  the  Militwry  Art. 

170.  The  highest  ground  of  a  position  should  be  occupied 
by  the  salients  of  works,  for  then  the  adjoining  faces  will 
be,  in  some  measure,  secured  from  enfilade  fire  j  it  follows 
that  the  re-entering  angles  should  be  placed  in  the  lowest 
spots. 

171.  It  is  very  essential  to  create  obstructions  within 
short  range  of  musketi'y  in  front  of  all  works  of  a  tempo- 
rary nature,  with  a  view  of  breaking  the  order  of  the  as- 
sailants, and  detaining  them  under  a  close  a«d  severe  fire, 
if  they  persist  in  forcing  their  way  through. 

172.  In  fact,  all  the  movements  of  an  enemy,  whether  to 
the  front,  to  the  right  or  left,  should  be  as  much  cramped 
and  impeded  as  possible  ;  it  is  important  to  break  his  or- 
der and  put  him  int©  confusion  when  under  fire,  for  he 
can  seldom  reform  under  such  circumstances ;  and  if  he 
attacks  in  disorder,  the  chances  are  against  his  success. 

173.  To  save  time  in  making  palisades  or  stockade  work, 
the  whole  quantity  ought  to  be  divided  into  distinct  por- 
tions, say  10  or  12  feet  in  length,  to  one  carpenter  and  two 
laborers  ;  and  to  prevent  confusion  in  obtaining  materials 
for  constructing  obstacles,  it  is  well  to  divide  the  men  into 
parties  of  8  or  10  each,  prescribing  to  each  party  the  na- 
ture of  the  materials  required,  the  place  where  they  are 
to  be  obtained,  and  the  spot  at  which  they  are  to  be  de- 
posited. 

174.  The  materials  are  obtained  by  felling  trees,  unroof- 
ing houses,  taking  up  floora  and  the  like. 


FIELD    IfdRTjrifATION.  229 

175.  The  guns  of  a  work  should  not,  gcnerallj,  reply  to 
the  cannonade  which  preceds  an  assault,  but  should  be 
placed  behind  traverses,  or  other  places  of  shelter  previ- 
ously prepared  by  them  ;  they  should  only  fire  at  the  ene- 
my's artillery,  while  the  latter  is  changing  its  position. 

176.  Hound  shot  or  shells  arc  fired  against  guns ;  grape, 
canister,  spherical  case,  and  rockets  against  troops. 

177.  As  soon  as  the  enemy's  light  troops  advance,  the 
parapets  are  to  be  manned  ;  sand  bags,  previously  filled, 
are  placed  along  the  parapet,  leaving  loop  holes  between 
them ;  they  are  musket  shot  proof,  and  give  the  men  the 
necessary  confidence  to  enable  them  to  take  a  steady  aim. 
One  rank  of  men  is  sufficient  on  the  banquette,  others  be- 
ing placed  behind  them  to  load.  A  reserve  is  to  b«  station- 
ed under  cover,  who  fall  upon  the  assailants  with  the  bayo- 
net, should  they  sueced  in  getting  into  the  work.  For  a 
goad  defence,  there  ought  to  be  a  fils  per  yard  to  man  the 
parapet,  with  a  reserve  of  one-fourth  or  one-sixth  of  the 
whole,  in  addition. 

178.  As  soon  as  the  assaulting  columns  begin  to  mask 
the  fire  of  their  own  artillery,  the  guns  of  the  work  will  bo 
brought  up  and  open  their  fire  on  them. 

179.  A  sortie  (very  rarely)  may  be  made,  should  the 
enemy  be  thrown  into  disorder ;  but  this  step  requires 
great  caution,  for  should  the  sortie  be  repelled,  the  enemy 
may  enter  the  works  with  the  retiring  troops. 

180.  FouGAssBS,  previously  prepared,  will  be  fired  the 
instant  the  enemy  is  above  them,  by  means  of  a  piece  of 
safety  fuse,  or  a  musket  with  its  muzzle  in  the  powder,  and 
a  wire  to  the  trigger. 

181.  If  the  assailen(«  at  length  descend  into  the  ditch, 


230  i:leld   lOftiificAin^.N. 

ebells,  grenades,  and  every  sort  of  missile  are  to  be  tbrowii 
upon  them.  The  shells  are  rolled  down  b}'  being  placed 
in  troughs  laid  on  the  superior  slope  of  the  parapet. 

182.  If  the  enemy  has  to  cross  a  river  before  he  arrives 
at  the  work,  the  fords  maj^  be  rendered  impassible  for  ar- 
tillery and  cavalry,  by  digging  pits,  planting  stakes, 
throwing  in  felled  trees  and  harrows,  or  by  driving  wag- 
Otes  or  oarts  full  of  stones  into  the  middle,  and  taking  off 
the  wheels. 

183.  Should  the  ford  be  beyond  musket  range  from  the 
■work,  a  narapet  may  be  raised  opposite  to  it,  at  such  a  dis- 
tance from  it  as  tojpermit  the  aefenders  to  issue  forth  and 
charge  the  party  crossing  it,  at  the  moment  they  land  in 
disorder  on  the  bank. 

184.  To  prevent  suprise,  outposts  arc  stationed  around 
the  work  at  night,  and  heaps  of  dried  brushwood,  or  tarred 
fascines,  should  be  placed  along  the  post  at  intervals  ;  at 
the  approach  of  the  enemy  the  outposts  retire  into  the 
work,  having  set  fire  to  the  piles  of  brushwood  ;  this  will, 
in  a  great  measure,  prevent  an  enemy  from  concealing 
himself  near  the  work. 

LOOPHOLING  WALLS. 

185.  Walls  are  made  available  for  the  purpose  of  de- 
fense Dy  loopholing  them,  if  a  ditch  cannot,  for  want  of 
time,  be  dug  at  the  foot  of  the  wall  outside.  The  loopholes 
ought  to  be  at  least  7  feet  above  the  ground  to  prevent  the 
assailants  from  making  use  of  them  ;  in  the  former  case  a 
temporary  stage  might  be  made  of  casks,  ladders,  &c., 
■within  i  feet  or  4  feet  6  inches  of  the  loopholes,  to  enable 
tlie  men  to  fne  thFOUfth  them. 


1  Itl.O     rOKTiyiriiH 


JS<i...Tl)o  (Quickest  way  of  loopholing  a  wall  is  to  break  it 
down  fcom  the  U)p  in  "the  form  of  narrow  fissures  abont  3 
feet  asunder  ;  but  if  the  wall  is  very  low,  or  there  is  not 
time  to  make  loopholes,  a  piece  of  timber  or  the  trunk  of  a 
tree,  supported  on  the  top  of  it  by  a  couple  of  stones,  wou!d 
be  a  ready  expedient,  and  the  men  could  fire  from  the  open- 
ing-under  it  or  sand  bagfs,  or  larp^  stones  or  sods,  might 
be-placed  on  the  wall  at  intervals.  ..  The  roopholes  made  in 
walls  or  buildings  can  seldom  bo  n)ade  of  any  rcjrular  form; 
The  width  outside  should  not  exceed  3  inches,  but  inside 
it  may  be  equal  to  the  thickness  of  .the  wall.  The  best 
tools  (of  such  as  are  usually  found  about  a  building-)  .to 
break  loopholes  throagh  a  wall,  arc  crow-bars,  pick-axes, 
and  large  hammers. 

187.  Barricades  for  roads  and  streets,"  are  made,  if  time 
permits,  by  sinking. a  ditch  7  or  8  fiet  deep, "and  forming 
the  earth  into  a  breastwork,  adding  palisades,  &c.,  but  if 
time  presses,  casks,  bo;ces,  or  cart  bodies  lilled  with  oarth^ 
stones,  manure,  or  cinders,  sacks  of  four,  bale*  of  mex- 
chandise,  and 'the;  like,  must  be  arranged  across  j  jpavino- 
stones  may  be  taken  iip  and  disposed  in  a  similar  manner, 

188.  The  mass  should  be  raised  6  or  7  feet  high,  and  a 
banquette  formed  fuj  firing  over  it;  the  neighboring 
houses  should  also  be  l.oopholed  so  as  to  give  a  good  flank- 
ing fire  over  tli^e  ground  in  front  of  the  barricade,,  s;ind 
stones  may  be  collected  to  tlwow  down  on  the  assailants 
from  the  contigious  houaofe. 

FOUTIFYIXCr  EOUSES. 

IvSfA  The  gveat  art  of  convciting  buildings,  and  the  out- 
liii   •  ;iiid  wall  that  in:n?llv  surround  them,  into  defensible 


232  VIELB    FeUTIFIOATION. 

posts,  consists  in  selecting  from  the  mass  of  objects  at  hand, 
such  as  will  answer  the  purpose,  and  in  sacrificing  eyery- 
thing  else,  making  use  of  the  materials  to  strengthen  the 
part  which  is  to  be  fortified. 

190.  The  building  chosen  should  possess  some  of  all  tho 
following  requisites : 

Ist.  It  sTiould  command  all  that  surrounds  it* 

2dly.  It  should  be  substantial,  (not  thatched,)  and  of  a 
nature  to  furnish  materials  useful  for  , placing  it  in  a  state 
of  defense. 

3dly.  It  should  be  of  an  extent  not  too  great  for  the 
number  of  defenders,  and  should  only  require  for  the  com- 
pletion of  the  proposed  object  the  time*  and  means  which 
can  be  spared. 

4thly.  It  should  hare  projections  flanking  the  walls  and 
angles. 

5thly.  It  should  be  difficult  of  access  on  the  side  exposed 
to  attack,  and  yet  have  a  safe  retreat  for  the  defenders  ; 
and,  of  course,  it  must  be  in  such  a  position  as  to  answer 
the  purpose  for  which  the  detachment  is  posted. 

191.  As  a  rough  guide  to  judge  of  the  third  requisite, 
there  ought  to  be  a  man  for  every  4  feet  of  wall  round  the 
interior  of  the  lower  story,  one  to  every  6  feet  for  the  se- 
cond story,  and  one  to  every  8  feet  for  an  attic,  with  a  re- 
Berve  about  one-sixth  of  the  whole. 

192.  Should  there  exist  any  doubt  about  having  suffi- 
cient time  to  execute  all  that  might  be  wished,  it  would 
be  necessary  to  decide  on  the  best  points  to  be  secured  in 
order  to  repel  an  immediate  attack  ;  in  such  a  case  it  might 
be  well  to  employ  as  many  men  as  could  work  without  hin- 
<lerir»""  e8*"h  other  by  being  too  crowded,  to  collect  materi- 


FIKL»     FORTlFI«ATI«N.  233 

a^  aod  ban-icado  the  doors  and  windowe  on  the  grouflli 
floor,  to  make  loopholes  in  them,  and  to  level  any  obstruc- 
tion outside  that  would  give  cover  to  the  enemy,  or  facili- 
tate the  attack;  to  sink  ditches  opposite  the  doors  on  the 
outside,  and  arrange  loopholes  in  the  windows  of  the  upper 
story  ;  to  make  loopholes  through  the  walls  generally,  at- 
tending first  to  the  most  exposed  parts,  and  to  break  com- 
munications through  all  the  party  walls  and  partitions;  to 
place  abattis  or  any  feasible  obstruction  on  the  outside,  and 
to  improve  the  defense  of  the  post  by  the  construction  of 
tambours ;  to  place  outbuildings  and  garden  walls  in  a  state 
of  defense,  and  establish  communication  between  them  ; 
to  make  arrangements  (in  the  lower  story  particularly) 
for  defending  one  room  after  another,  so  that  a  partial 
possession  only,  could  be  obtained  on  a  sudden  attack 
being  made. 

193.  These  different  works  should  be  undertaken  in  the 
order  of  their  relative  importance,  according  to  circum- 
stances ;  and  after  securing  the  immediate  object  for  which 
they  arc  designed,  they  mi^ht  remain  to  be  improved  on, 
If  an  opportunity  should  offer. 

194.  Houses  are  fortified  by  piercing  loopholes  through 
the  walls,  and  if  the  walls  are  high,  two  or  even  three  rows 
of  loopholes  may  be  made,  and  a  temporary  scaffolding  of 
furniture,  casks,  Ac,  erected  for  firing  from  the  upper 
ones  ;  one  row  may  be  made  close  to  the  ground,  with  pits 
dug  In  the  rear,  &r  the  floor  may  be  cut  through,  if  there 
is  a  basement,  for  the  convenience  of  making  use  of  them. 
The  loopholes  may  have  the  dimensions  before  prescribed, 
and  they  ought  not  to  be  made  at  a  less  distance  than  three 
feet  from  each  other,  lest  the  wall  should  be  too  much 
Treakened,  ©r  the  defenders  inconve»ientlr  cao^^eled. 


2oi  fiKLU  leKriritAxioK. 

195.  The  staircases  are  to  be  cut  away,  the  eommuuica« 
lion  being  kept  up  by  ladders ;  and  the  floors,  as  well  as 
the  partition  walls,  should  be  loopholed. 

196.  Thatched  roofs  and  all  combustible  materials  a^-e  to 
be  removed,  and  barrels  of  water  should  be  placed  in  every 
room  in  readiness  to  extinguish  fire. 

197.  A  communication  ought  to  be  opened  on  the  side 
farthest  from  the  enem}'^,  through  which  ammunition 
and  reinforcements  may  enter. 

198.  The  door  or  barrier  closing  this  communication, 
may  be  made  musket  proof,  by  nailing  strong  planks  to  it, 
and  if  there  is  a  basement  to  the  house,  the  floor  should  be 
cut  away  within  the  door,  so  as  to  form  a  sort  of  a  ditch. 

199.  All  the  doors  and  window^are  to  be  barricaded  and 
loopholed.  The  best  barricade  for  a  door  is  made  by  strong 
palisades,  which  are  secured  to  a  thick  cross  beam  let  into 
the  wall  on  each  side ;  a  bank  of  earth  may  also  be  formed 
on  the  exterior. 

200.  All  the  enclosures  which  may  atford  the  enemy 
cover,  must  be  removed,  if  not  included  in  the  defense. 

201.  If  artillery  is  likely  to  be  employed  against  the 
h  ouse,  it  will  be  necessary,  unless  the  walls  are  very  strong, 
to  support  the  timbers  cf  the  roof  by  means  of  props. 

202.  If  there  is  time,  the  house  maybe  formed  into  a 
block  house  by  pulling  down  the  upper  stories,  and  laying 
the  materials  over  the  lower  rooms  to  make  the  covering 
shell  proof. 

203.  A  ditch  may  be  dug  on  the  outside  of  the  house, 
and  the  eaith  placed  against  the  walls;  some  protection 
may  be  obtained  for  the  doors,  by  placing  strong  beams 
on  the  wall  outside  in  an  inclined  position,  and  heaping' 
Varth  or  ruljbifh  ovcm-  Ihem. 


I   IKLl)      riinTllli.'ATfON.  loi} 

INTKEXCniXG  A  VILLAGE. 

204.  In  intrenching  a  village,  the  building?,  walls,  and 
hedges  on  its  circuit,  are  to  be  considered  as  part  of  its 
enclosure,  and  arc  to  be  made  fit  for  the  purpose  of  de- 
fense; all  the  intervals  between  them  are  to  be  occupied 
by  breastworks  or  palisades,  and  strengthened  bj  abattis. 

205.  The  streets  are  to  be  barricaded  at  intervals  with 
carts  or  wagons,  having  one  or  two  wheels  taken  off,  with 
barrels  of  earth,  bales  of  merchandize,  «tc.  ;  a  passage 
should  be  made  through  the  adjoining  houses,  which  should 
be  loopholed,  and  care  mu^t  be  taken  that  the  barricade 
be  not  turned  by  an  enomy  passing  down  the  neighboring 
etreots. 

20G.  Some  strong  building,  such  as  a  church,  court- 
house, or  jail,  should  be  selected,  and  fortified  with  par- 
ticular care,  to  serve  as  a  citadel  or  reduit,  to  which  the 
defenders  may  retire  when  driven  in  from  the  exterior 
part  of  the  village. 

207.  Advantage  must  be  taken  of  any  walls  or  outbuild- 
ings surrounding  whatever  has  been  selected  as  the  reduit 
or  keep  ;  and  they  should  be  converted  into  outworks  for 
strengthening  it  as  an  independent  post.  Should  the  vil- 
lage be  of  too  great  an  extent  for  the  force  thrown  into  Of, 
a  portion  of  it  only  might  be  strengthened,  and  the  re- 
mainder separated  or  destroyed  ;  or  the  defence  might  be 
confined  to  some  separate  building. 

208.  The  roads  by  which  an  enemy  would  advance  should 
be  cut  up,  and  obstructed  with  felled  trees,  ploughs,  har- 
rows, &c.  ;  bridges  should  ho  brokon,  and  the  passage  dis- 
puted under  cover  of  some  simple  field  wni'k  placed  favor- 
ably to  command  the  road. 


2^^  FIELD    FOBTIFreATrOX. 

209.  The  resolute  defence  of  villages  situated  on  the 
front  of  an  army  has  often  decided  the  fate  of  a  battle; 
in  this  position,  they  may  be  regarded  as  bastions  connect- 
ed by  movable  curtains. 

ATTACK  ON  FIELD  WORKS. 

210.  The  attack  on  field  works  may  be  executed  bysur- 
prise,  or  by  open  force ;  the  former  can  only  take  place 
when  the  advance  of  the  assailants  is  concealed  by  fog  or 
darkness,  or  by  the  nature  of  the  ground,  as  in  mountain- 
ous countries. 

211.  In  the  attack  of  field  works  by  open  force,  it  is  ad- 
visable to  advance  against  several  points  at  the  same  mo- 
ment, when  circumstances  permit ;  of  these  some  may  be 
false  attacks,  and  may  be  converted  into  real  ones  if  the 
enemy  appears  weak  or  hesitating  on  the  points  threaten- 
ed. One  attack  ought,  generally,  to  be  directed  upon  the 
rear  of  the  work,  (if  open  at  the  gorge,)  which  will  al- 
ways lessen  the  confidence  of  the  defenders. 

212.  As  many  assaulting  columns  should  be  formed  as 
there  are  points  to  be  attacked,  and  before  the  works  are 
stormed,  pits  and  trenches  should  (when  time  permits, 
and  there  is  no  natural  cover  for  skirmishers)  be  dug  to 
conceal  riflemen  :  these  pits  are  about  four  feet  wide,  and, 
with  the  excavated  earth  raised  before  them,  four  feet  in 
depth,  in  order  that  they  may  serve  to  cover  a  file  of  mon  to 
that  height. 

213.  The  artillery  should  be  posted  on  the  prolongations 
of  the  faces  to  enfilade  them,  weaken  the  parapets,  and 
ruin  the  interior  defences  of  the  works  and  its  ditch  ;  for 


FIELB    FORTIPieATION.  ,  237 

the  latter  purpose  howitzers  are  best  adapteii.  As  soon  as 
the  artillery  has  produced  some  effect,  the  signal  for  the 
assault  should  be  give  ;  light  troopswill  gradually  advance 
towards  the  counterscarp,  in  skirmishing  order,  firing  at 
the  gunners  through  the  embrasures  ;  they  will  conceal 
themselves  in  the  pits  and  trenches  prepared  for  thorn,  or 
seek  shelter  in  the  inequalities  of  the  ground.  They  should 
be  followed  by  storming  parties,  and  these  should  be  ac- 
companied by  adetachuicnt  of  sappers,  (or  ajsqu ad  of  sol- 
diers told  oft"  for  that  purpose,)  carrying  axes,  crowbars, 
bags  of  powder,  <fec.,  to  force  obstacles.  Lastly,  the  re- 
servo  will  follow,  at  some  distance,  to  act  as  circumstan- 
ces may  require  ;  it  may  repel  attempts  to  aid  the 
defenders,  reinforce  the  storming  parties  if  they  succeed 
in  entering  ;.the  work,  or  it  may  afford  them  a  rallying 
point,  and  cover  their  retreat  if  they  fail. 

214.  The  troops  descend  into  the  ditch  with  unfixed 
bayonets,  in  order  to  avoid  accidents ;  and  thej  fix  them 
when  on  the  berme. 

215.  Should  the  ditches  have  a  great  depth,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  lessen  it  by  means  of  bags  with  heather  or 
grass,  or  by  bundles  of  hay  or  straw,  or  fascines,  &o. 

21G.  A  bridge  formed  of  a  gun  limber  and  a  ladder  maj 
be  run  up  to  the  counterscarp  and  thrown  across. 

217.  To  avoid  mistakes  in  marching  by  night  to  attack, 
each  soldier  should  bear  some  visible  mark  by  which  he 
may  be  distinguished  form  an  enemy.  If  a  breach  or  any 
particular  point  is  to  be  attacked  by  night,  the  way  to  it 
should  be  marked  by  distinguishable  pickets  or  other  ob- 
jects, placed  or  re-marked  on  the  ground  at  the  time  of  the 
previous  reconnoissance. 


;:;;3  field  FOETiricAxroK. 

-18.  The  columns  naarch  to  the  ai;?ault  in  tha  direction 
iS  the  capitals ;-  but  after  passing  the  ditch,  the  troopg 
rhould  enter  the  worka  by  the  faces,  on  each  side  of  the 
■^alient  angle,  tkat  they  m&y  present  a  front  in  the  work 
i  uual  or  ?uperior  to  that  of  the  enemy.  When  it  may  be. 
iiiitvisable  to  force  an  estranco  at  the  gate  of  a  fortifiecJ 
poit,  that  gnie  may  be  destroyed  by  a  piece  of  artillery 
5,i()ught  close  ap  to  it,  or  by  a  bag  of  powder  attached  to 
the  wood  by  a  gimlet,  or  propped  against  it  by  a  forked 
^ '  iclc. 

■219.  In  assaulting  a  place  whose  scarps  and  counter- 
v<;irps  are  revetted  with  masonry,  scaling  ladders  must  be 
>!n).loyed.  The  first  division  of  each  column  of  assault 
riniesthe  longest  ladders  ;  they  descendiinto  the  ditcli 
R:.it.li  them,  and  aftferVi'ards  carry  the  ladders  across  and 
rniso  them  against  the  scarp. 

220.  The  next  division  carries  other  ladders,  ^Yhich  they 
plitpo  and  leave  against  the  counterscarp.  The  ladders  are 
finied  and  planted  with  arms  slung.  Ladders  planted 
aii'aiiist  aiwall  are  not  to  slope  above  one-foiirth  of  their 
h  ight,  lest  they  should  break  under  the  weight  of  the 
iii;'"n. 

22;1.  A  strong  firing  party  is  drawn  up  on  the  glacis  to- 
kiiep  down  the  fire  of  the  defenders,  if  the  latter  should  ap- 
pear oa  tb«  parapets  to  oppose  the  assault. 

ATTACKING  HOUSES. 

222.  In  the  attack  of  houses,  artillery  should  be  era- 
])l».r{ito  form  a  breach  before  giving  the  assault,  and  also- 
tu   iuow  hot  shot,  shells,  and  carcassos-. 


iihLi*   rom-iiiC-Miox. 


223.  If  the  detnelnncnt  is  unprovided  with  artillery,  ^.i- 
tampti  must  be  made  to  force  passages  through  door. 
^vindo^vs,  or  unflanked  parts  of  the  walls:  the  atta.k 
should  be  made  on  different  parte  of  the  building,  to  du- 
iractthe  attentien  of  the  defenders;  in  the  meantime, 
and  for  the  same  purpose,  parties  of  men  keep  up  a  fire  -ui 
anv  points  where  there  is  a  chance  of  disabling  them. - 
Attempts  may  also  be  made  to  effect  an  entrance  throu;:h 
the  roof  by  means  of  ladders. 

224.  If  the  assailants  have  neit4icr  iwwder  nor  crowbwi^s 
for  forcing  doors,  a  heavy  beam  or  tree  may,  if  at  b;-.i..i, 
be  used  as  a  battering  ram  ;  a  fire  of  straw  or  brush^vnod 
may  bo  made  near  the  walls  further  to  distract  and  p...r.u, 
the  defenders,  and  to  cover  the  operations  of  tto  aMaU:iiilr. 

ATTACKIXO  BARRICADES. 

225.  Artillery  will  soon  clear  a  passage  tiirough  ordiii*- 
ry^barricades  ;  "if  not,  the  assaulting  party  must  endeavor 
to  turn  the  barricade,  either  by  passing  down  some  <.i  h  r 
street,  or  by  forcing  a  passage  from  one^ouse  to  ancUin, 
until  they  arrive  in  rear  of  it :  a  few  loaded  musket,  ap- 
plied to  tlie  locks  and  bolts  of  the  strongciit  door  wiU  f-.M-ce 
it  open,  and  the  partition  walh:  may  be  destroyed  by  h^-i 
of  powder,  &c.  After  having  taken  possession  ot  a  ht-u.-, 
troops  must  be  left  in  it  for  the  purpose -of  firing  frcw  it 
upon  the  barricade. 


OUTPOST  AND  PICKET  DUTY. 


PART  SIXTH. 

ADrANCED-OUARDS    AND   ADVANCED-POSTS. 

1.  To  k,eep  an  enem}' in  ignorance  of  the  state  of  our 
forc»6  and  the  character  of  our  position,  is  one  of  the  most 
indispensablie  duties  in  war.  It  is  in  this  way  that  we 
oblige  him  to  take  every  possible  precaution  in  advancing; 
forcing  him  to  feel  his  way  step  by  step,  and  to  avoid  risk- 
ing his  own  safety  in  hazarding  those  bold  and  rapid  move- 
ments which,  when  made  against  a  feeble  or  an  unprepared 
enemy,  lead  to  the  most  brilliant  results. 

2.  This  object  is  eftectedby  placing  between  the  position 
occupied  by  the  main  force  and  the  presumed  direction  of 
the  enemy,  a  body  detached  from  the  main  force,  but  act- 
ing always  with  reference  to  it,  termed  an  Advancecl- 
Ouard. 

3.  Thia  term  is  used  for  any  body  of  troops  so  separated 
from  the  main  body,  whatever  its  strength  and  composi- 
tion, and  whether  the  troops  be  in  position  or  on  a 
march. 

i.  For  a  large  Jorce,  the  adrancsd'-gaard  is  necessarily 


o«f-POSf  AN*  ncKEi  Dwrr.  241 

composed  of  troop«  of  all  armg,  its  strength  being  propor- 
tioned to  that  of  the  main  force ;  the  more  or  less  re- 
sistance of  an  independent  character  it  may  be  required  to 
make;  and  the  greater  or  less  extent  it  may  be  found 
necessary  to  embrace  by  its  advanced-posts,  on  the  front 
and  flanks,  to  watch  and  anticipate  every  movement  of 
the  enemy. 

5.  The  proportion  of  the  advanced-guard  to  the  main- 
body  may  vary  from  a  third  to  a  fifth  of  the  total  force. 
In  armies  of  some  strength,  or  large  eorps-d'  armee,  par- 
ticularly where  the  nature  of  the  country  requires  a  wide 
development  of  advanced-posts,  the  larger  proportion  is  de- 
manded ;  as  at  least  one-third  or  even  one-half  of  its 
strength  will  be  required  for  the  advanced-post  service. 
In  a  small  force  of  two  or  three  thousand  men,  one-fifth 
will  usually  be  all  that  can  be  well  spared  for  the  same 
purposes. 

fi.  Our  purpose,  in  all  cases,  should  be  to  keep  the  ei>c- 
my  in  a  state  of  uncertainty  as  to  our  actual  force  and 
movements,  and  this  can  be  effected  only  by  keeping  con- 
stantly between  him  and  our  main-body  a  force  of  sufficient 
strength  to  offer  an  obstinate  resistance,  if  necessary,  to 
every  attempt  he  may  openly  make  to  gain  information, 
and  even  to  aot  offensively  against  him,  when  occasion  of- 
fers, so  as  to  keep  him  in  doubt  aa  to  the  actual  character 
and  number  of  troops  before  him  ;  the  old  military  axiom 
being  always  kept  in  mind,  that  "  a  sword  opportunely 
drnum  frequenthf  keepn  another  hack  m  itt  scabbard." 

7.  In  all  defensive  positions,  the  adv. meed-guard  audits 
advanced-posts  should  retire  slowly  but  circumspectly,  s(> 
that  the  main-body  may  have  time  to  take  all  its  defensive 


Tneasures.  In  the  ofTensWe,  the  attack  of  the  aclvauced- 
guard  should  be  decided  and  vigorous  ;  pressing  upon  the 
enemy  at  cvcrj  point,  and  leaving  nothing  undone  to  de- 
moralize  Lim,  bj  the  confusion  which  so  often  follows  from 
an  impetuous  onset. 

8.  Whilst  in  position,  the  advanced-guard  should  take 
advantage  of  the  natural,  or  other  obstacles  on  its  front 
and  flanks  which  are  within  supporting  distance,  to 
strengthen  itself,  and  again  strppurts  for  its  advanced- 
posts.  In  this  waA^,  its  means  of  resistance,  whether  act- 
ing oiiensively,  or  otherwise,  may  be  greatly  augmented. 
Ground  of  this  character,  taken  up  by  the  troops,  should 
not  be  abandoned  without  very  cogent  reasojis  for  it; 
eince,  should  circKrastauccs  bring  abo«t  a  forward  move- 
ment, it  might  cost  more  to  regain  what  was  given  up 
than  to  have  maintained  it  obstinately  at  tir.'>t. 

9.  The  ground  to  be  taken  by  an  advanced-guiud,  and 
embraced  within  its  advanced-posts,  should  be  carefully 
chosen.  To  take  position  where  the  movements  of  the 
enemy  can  be  well  watched,  whilst  our  own  troops  art 
kept  concealed,  and  not  liable  to  a  sudden  attack,  either 
in  front  or  flank,  are  the  dedder^.ta  in  such  cases.  If,  in 
following  this  guide,  it  should  lead  to  a  development -of 
advanced-posts  which  would  be  too  weak  at  any  point  for 
a  tolerable  resistance,  there  remains  but  the  alternative- 
to  retire  slowly  before  the  enemy,— taking  care  that  he 
do  not  slip  behind  the  out-posts  and  their  supports,— upoi; 
3ome  een-tral  point  to  the  rear  where  the  advanced-posts, 
united  to  tlio  troops  in  reserve,  may  make  a  good  stand, 
and  from  which,  if  the  chances  are  favorable,  they  may 
idvance  u]u>n  the  onemv,  and  makchioi  paj-  dearly  i'arblg 

SeUlCMUTV.. 


10.  In  all  affaire  of  advanced-s^uarda  great  circumspeo- 
tion  is  to  be  shown,  both  by  the  offictir  in  command  of  the 
advanced-guard,  in  throwing  forward  fresh  troops  to 
strengthen  a  point  assailed,  as  well  as  on  tho  part  of  the 
general-in-chief,  in  sustainins;^  th«  advanced-guard  br 
weakening  bis  main-body.  The«e  are  point.^  that  can  only 
be  decided  upon  the  spot.  The  .safer  rule,  in  all  cases,  is 
Bot  to  weaken  th-?  main  defen.^e,  or  main  attack,  by  detach- 
ing from  it  to  support  a  feeble  point.  If  the  force  engag- 
ed, under  such  circumstances,  does  not  suffice  for  its  own 
defence,  it  is  best  for  it  to  fall  back  in  time,  and,  taking 
jionition  with  the  main-bod j,  endeavor,  by  their  combined 
eirorts,  to  turn  the  scales  of  victory  in  their  favor. 

11.  The  duties  of  advanced-guards  being"  so  much  more 
frequently  to  feel  and  occupy  tho  enemy,  preparatoi-y  to 
some  decisive  blow  by  the  main  body,  than  to  engage  him 
with  a  view  to  follov/  up  any  advantage  gained,  it  follows, 
as  a  matter  of  course,  that  they  should  be  composed  of  the 
Moat  efficient  and  active  light  troops  at  tho  general's  dis- 
popal.  8uch  troopp,  in  the  hands  of  a  bold,  energetic,  but 
prudent  leader,  will  be  the  right  arm  of  any  army. — 
Prompt  on  all  occasions,  never  taken  at  fault,  they  keep 
the  enemy  constriiitly  occupied,  harass  him  with  fatiguing 
precautions  to  secure  his  Hanks  and  rear,  whilst  their  own- 
ikco  is  kept  relieved  from  these  annoyance?,  and  alvvay,'> 
fi'csh  for  aay  great  emergency. 

ADVANCED  POSTS. 

1 2.  The  duties  of  the  advanced  posts  ai'c  the  same  whetlr- 
er  the  troops  are  stationary,  or  in  movement :  the}'  arCjr 
\  To  keep  a  good  lookout  for  tb«  enemy,  and  when  i^^  hA^ 


244  orx-POST  akd  picket  duty, 

immediate  presence  to  take  all  means  to  bo  accvirately  in- 
formed of  his  strength,  position  and  movements ;  2.  Should 
the  enemy  advance,  to  hold  him  in  check  long  enough  to 
give  the  main  body  ample  time  to  be  prepared  for  his  at- 
tack. 

13.  By  a  faithful  discharge  of  these  duties,  the  n-hole 
army  can,  at  all  times,  and  under  all  circumstances,  b» 
kept  in  a  state  of  readiness  for  action,  without  subjecting 
the  soldier  to  any  fatigue  beyend  the  ordinary  physical 
•endurance  of  a  well-developed  manhood,  as  but  a  small 
portion,  comparatively,  of  the  forces  present  is  required 
to  watch  over  the  safety  of  the  rest,  and  can  therefore  be 
frequently  relieved,  so  that  every  one  may  have  time  suf- 
ficient for  the  repose  demanded  after  extraordinaiy  exer- 
tions. 

14.  The  object  being  to  secure  the  front  and  flanks  of  the 
■position  occupied  by  the  main  body,  from  any  attempt 
eiiher  to  reconnoitre  or  attack  it,  the  detachments  which 
-form  the  advance  posts  must  be  so  distributed  as  to  em- 
brace all  the  avenues  by  which  the  enemy  can  approach 
■the  position.  The  system  adoped,  in  most  services,  to  ef- 
fect this  object,  consists  of  two  or  three  concentric  lines  of 
posts,  disposed  in  a.  fan-shaped  order.  The  exterior  line, 
which  forms  the  Out-Posts,  embraces  a  wide  circumfer- 
ence, and  by  means  of  a  chain  of  Sentinels,  poeted  in  ad- 
'vance,  prevents  any  one  from  penetrating  to  the  rear  be- 
tween the  posts,  without  being  seen. 

15.  The  second  line,  which  is  one  of  Grand-Guards, 
embraces  a  narrower  circumference  than  the  line  of  out- 
posts, occupying  the  more  important  avenues  from  the  out- 
jiosts  to  the  interior,  go  as  to  be  in  position  to  support  the 


eXTT-POST  AyD  PICKET  BUTT.  24o 

out-posts  in  case  of  necegsity,  and  to  receive  them  if  driven 
in. 

16.  The  interior  line  consists  of  several  stronj?  detach- 
ments, termed  Pickets,  posted  upon  the  main  avenues  to 
the  position.  They  serve  as  supports  to  the  two  exterior 
lines,  upon  which  they  rally  if  forced  to  retire  before  the 
enemy. 

17.  Besides  ese  dispositions  for  security.  Patrols  are 
kept  up  betwt  n  the  line  of  posts,  to  keep  the  one  inform- 
ed of  the  state  of  the  other ;  and  also  between  the  out- 
posts and  chain  of  sentinels,  to  see  that  the  duties  of  the 
latter  are  well  performed,  and  to  search  any  ground  not 
brought  well  under  the  eyes  of  the  sentinels.  The  whole, 
in  this  way,  forms  a  connected  system,  for  observing  the 
enemy  and  for  mutual  support  in  case  of  attack. 

18.  The  duties  of  the  out-posts,  and  of  the  grand-guards 
which  form  their  supports,  are  strictly  those  of  observa- 
tion. If  attacked,  they  offer  no  resistance  farther  than  to 
enable  them  to  foci  the  enemy  perfectly,  and  never  lose 
sight  of  him.  The  task  of  holding  the  enemy  in  check  by 
a  vigorous  resistance,  so  as  to  procure  sufficient  time  for 
the  main  body  to  make  its  dispositions  foi:  battle,  is  con- 
signed to  the  pickets. 

19.  The  ground  taken  up  hy  the  advanced-posts  will 
depend  on  the  capabilities  which  its  natural  features  offer 
for  defence,  on  the  number  and  character  of  the  approach- 
es it  presents  to  an  enemy  for  attacking  the  front  or  flanks 
of  the  position  occupied  by  the  main  body,  and  upon  the 
facilities  it  may  afford  for  communication  between  the 
posts. 


Mb  lUT-POflT  AND  PICK  til    01   I  V, 


OUT-POSTS. 


20.  The  position  of  the  out-po?t3,  with  respect  to  the 
main  body,  will  be  regulated  by  the  more  or  less  broken 
character  of  the  country.  As  a  goijeral  rule,  the  mean 
distance  may  be  taken  at  about  two  miles.  The  line  occu- 
pied by  these  posts  should  take  in  all  the  approaches  to 
the  front  and  flanks  of  the  main  position.  When  a  posi- 
tion is  to  be  held  for  some  time,  or  is  taken  up  after  a  bat- 
tle, the  out-posts  may  be  thrown  farther  in  advance,  to 

^pprocui'e  greater  repose  and  security  for  the  main  body. 

21.  The  ground  on  which  the  line  of  out-posts  is  estab- 
lished, should  be  carefully  examined,  with  a  view  both  to 
observation  and  defence.  As  far  as  practicable,  those 
points  should  be  selected  for  posts  which  present  some  na- 
tural advantages  for  the  defence  ;  will  screen  the  troops 
from  the  enemy's  view,  and  enable  tbeni  to  watch  all  bis 
movements.  Whenever  the  features  of  the  ground  do  not 
offer  natural  obstacles  to  cover  the  posts,  artificial  means 
of  a  slight  character  should  be  resorted  to.  The  flanks  of 
the  line  should  rest  upon  strong  natural  obstacles  ;  when 
such  cannot  be  found,  withdvit  giving  the  line  too  great 
an  extent,  these  points  must  be  secured  by  strong  pickets 
of  cavalry  or  infantry,  thrown  back  to  form  crotchets, 
from  which  patrols  must  be  constantly  kept  up  on  the 
flanks,  in  the  presumed  direction  of  the  enemy. 

22.  The  strength  of  each  out-post,  and  the  distance  from 
one  to  the  other,  will  be  '"egulated  by  the  features  of  the 
ground,  and  the  number  of  sentinels  or  vedi^ttes  that  each 
post  must  throw  out.  The  posts  should,  as  far  as  practi- 
cable, be  within  si^ht  of  the  grand-guards  to  which  they 


0UT-P08T  AN»  riCKir  DUir.  2i1 

belonjj,  and  the  sentinels  of  their  respective  posts.  When 
the  ground  does  not  pertnit  this  arrangement,  sentinels 
should  be  placed  at  intermediate  points,  to  communicate 
promptly  whatever  may  happen  at  the  line  of  posts,  or  of 
sentinels,  to  the  rear.  Posts  of  infantry  should  not,  as  a 
general  rule,  be  placed  farther  ap;irt  than  600  paces,  nor 
their  sentinels  more  than  300  paces  in  advance  of  the  posts. 
Those  of  cavalry  may  b^sorae  1500  paces  apart,  and  their 
vedettes  from  600  to  800  paces  in  advance.  The  strength 
of  each  post  should  be  calculated  at  the  rate  of  four  men 
for  each  sentinel,  or  vedette. 

SENTINELS. 

23.  The  sentinels  and  vedettes  form  a  chain  in  advance, 
and  are  posted  on  points  from  which  they  can  best  watch 
the  enemy  without  being  seen  by,  or  exposed  to  him,  in 
any  way.  As  one  of  their  main  duties  is  to  preveat  any 
one  from  passing  their  chain,  they  should  be  so  placed, 
with  respect  to  each  other,  that  they  can  see  all  the  ground 
between  their  respective  posts,  and  be  able  to  stop  any  one 
who  may  attempt  to  pass  between  them.  At  night  and  in 
misty  weather,  the  sentiuelg  should  be  doubled  and  be 
drawn  in  nearer  to  the  out-posts. 

24.  Whenever  it  may  be  deemed  neeessasy  to  post  senti- 
nels on  points  beyond  the  line  of  out-posts,  they  should  be 
furnished  by  posts  detached  in  advance  of  the  line. 

ORAXD-GUARDS. 

25.  As  thegrand  guards  furnish  the  out-posts,  and  serve 
as  their  supports,  not  more  than  one-third  of  their  force 


248  wBi-Poax  AS»  rivKiiT  ifir. 

should  be  taken  for  the  out-posts.  The  graud-guarjds  ai'e 
posted  on  the  principal  arenues  leading  to  the  detachments 
on  which  they  are  to  fall  back,  if  driven  in;  and  when  of 
infantry,  about  200  pace's,  and  of  cavalry,  600  to  800  paces, 
in  the  rear  of  the  out-posts.  The  points  which  they  occu- 
py should  be  selected,  both  to  secure  them  from  the  enemy's 
view,  and  to  give  a  ready  communication  between  them 
and  their  respective  out-posts.  No  difficult  or  broken 
ground  should  lie  between  the  grand-guards  and  their 
out-poste  ;  if  any  such  occur,  particularly  if  it  be  of  a  na- 
ture to  offer  TaTCititjes  to  an  enemy  to  penetrate  to  the  rear, 
the  whole  should  be  posted  on  the  farther,  or  either  side 
of  it,  and  in  preference  in  the  latter  position,  if  by  it  the 
chain  of  post  can  be  preserved  unbroken. 

PICKETS. 

26.  The  main  detachments  or  pickets,  which  form  t  he 
supports  to  the  grand-guards  and  out-posts,  occupy  the 
principal  avenues  to  the  position  of  the  main  body.  As 
their  duty  is  to  hold  the  enemy  in  check,  the  points  which 
they  take  up  should  be  susceptible  of  a  good  defence ;  such, 
for  example,  as  villages,  defiles,  &c.  Whenever  these  ad- 
vantages are  not  found  at  hand,  resort  should  he  kad  to 
any  temporary  obstacles,  as  abattis,  &c.,  which  can  be 
readily  procured,  to  place  the  troops  under  shelter.  The 
points  thus  occupied  should,  as  a  general  rule,  be  about 
midway  between  the  line  of  out-posts  and  the  position  of 
the  main  body. 

27.  Small  posts  should  be  thrown  forward  by  the  pick- 
ets, between  their  position  and  the  line  of  grand-guards  ; 


evT-POsr  i.N»  rieKBT  bhtt.  2t- 

both  for  the  greater  security  of  the  detachments,  and  as 
supports  to  the  grand-guards.  In  like  manner,  when  the 
line  of  pickets  is  of  considerable  extent,  intermediate  poata 
must  be  established,  to  keep  open  a  communication  between 
them. 

28.  No  pains  should  be  spared  to  obstruct  the  approach- 
es of  the  enemy  to  the  points  occupied  by  the  pickets,  par- 
ticularly those  which  lead  to  the  flanks,  leaving  open  such 
only  as  will  oblige  the  enemy  to  attack  under  the  most 
unfavorable  circumstances,  and  if,  between  the  advanced' 
posts  and  the  main  body,  a  defile,  or  other  unfavorable 
pass  should  occur,  which  the.  enemy,  by  turning  the  line 
of  the  advanced  posts,  might  seize  upon,  and  thus  cut  off 
their  retreat,  it  should  be  occupied  by  a  strong  detach- 
ment, both  to  prevent  such  a  raanccuvre,  and  to  favor  the 
retreat  on  the  main  body. 

STREXGTU  OF  THE  ADVANCED-POSTS. 

29.  The  entire  strength  of  the  advanced  posts,  as  well  as 
the  relative  strength  of  tha  pickets,  grand-guards,  and 
out-posts,  will  depend  upon  the  character  of  the  ground 
covered  by  them,  as  being  more  or  less  open,  and  present- 
ing more  or  less  facilities  for  circumscribing  the  approach- 
es of  the  enemy  to  the  main  position.  It  rarely  occurs 
that  sufficient  troops  can  be  detached  to  cover  all  the  ac- 
cessible ground;  and  perform  the  duties  in  a  thorough 
manner. 

30.  The  strength  of  each  picket,  and  the  kind  of  troops 
of  which  it  is  composed,  will  depend  on  the  degree  of  re- 
sistance to  be  offered  to  the  enemy's  attack,  and  the  char- 
acter of'the  position  occupied.    In  most  cases  where  a  vig- 


-•>''  iiUT-.POST  A.\l)    I'TCKET  Bl.^T.I  . 

oroiis  defence?  is  callecl  for,  they  will  -consist-  of  troops  of 
all  arms,  and  an  aggregate  of  sevef  al  hundred  men.  The,  • 
grand-guards,  ou't-posts,  and  pafr'ols,  should  not  exceed 
one-third  the  strength  of  the  pickets  to  which  thej.belong. 
They  will  be  composed  of  car  air v,  or  infantry,  according 
to  the  more  or  less  broken  features  ©f  the  ground/ 

SI.  It  rarely  ocQura  that  artillery  is  placed  at  the  out- 
posts. Whenever  it  happens  that  a  piece  or  two  may  be 
deemed  necessary,  to  sweep  some  passage,  oi;  defile,  in  ad- 
vance of  the  line  of  out-posts,  the  guns  must  be  prot^icted 
by  a  strong  post,  to  insure  their  safety  in  a  retreat.         ,  '" 

32.  If,  from  the  character  of  the  ground,  the  out-posts 
are  mainly  of  infantry>  some  cavahT  should  alwa3'&be  at- 
tached to  them,  to  patrol  in  advance  of  the  position,  and 
to  convey  intelligence  to  the  rear*,  of  what  may  be  passing 
in  the  jieighborho?)d  of  the  out-posts. 

33.  When  the  advanced  posts  cover  an  advanced-guard, 
the  commanding  officer  of  the  "whole  should  take  a  posi- 
tion, with  his  artillery  andthe  main  body  of  his  command, 
at  some  central  point,  in  the  rear  of  the  pickets, .in  order 
to  be  read}^  to  support  them  if  hard  pressed  by-the  ene- 
my.. The  choice  of  this  position  is  an  object  of  the  great- 
est importance,  as  the  safety  of  the  advanced-posts,  as  well 
as  that  of  the  main  body,  may  depend  upon  the  degree  of 
judgment  shown  in  this  selection.  .  - 

34.  So  soo»  as  the  advanced-posts  have  taken  up  thoir 
stations,  instructions  shpuld  be  given  to  the  officers  of  the 
different. posts,  with  respect  to  the  points  upon  which  they 
are  to  fall  back,  in  case  of  bpi-ng  forced  in,  the.Unes  of 
communication  they  must  retire  by,  and  the  position  they 
must  take  up,  in  joining  thj  .supports  to  which  they  re- 
spertiv^Ir  belnn£'. 


,  oc!»F(.i^r  AN»  FicKBT  OL  rr.  ?5l 

DUTIES  OF  OFFICER  COMMANDIXG  AN  OUT-POST. 

35.  An  officer  in  coinniand  of  any  of  the  out-poat3  must 
be  capable  of  untirinu;  vip^ilance  aud  activity,  to  perform 
the  various  duties  which  devolve  upon  him.  lie  should  bo 
provided  with  a  ifood  map  of  the  country,  a  telescope,  and 
writing  niatoiialf. 

36.  lie  will  thoroucjhly  .reconnoitre  th*  ground  upon 
which  be  is  to  dispose  his  command,  and  also  as  far  in  ad- 
vance as  circumstances  will  admit,  questioning  closely 
any  inhabitant  he  may  lind.  After  taking  up  his  position, 
he  should  go  forward,  with  the  half  of  his  command,  and 
post  each  sentinel  himself.  If,  however,  he  relieves  an- 
other in  the  command,  awd  deems  it  advi>;able  to  make  any 
changes  in  the  d  spositions  of  his  predecessors,  he  should 
promptly  report  the  facts  to  the  commanding  officer  in  his 
roar. 

37.  When  the  officer  finds  that  the  enemy  is  not  III  his 
immediate  neighborhood,  he  should  endeavor  to  feel  his 
way  cautiously  towards  him  by  patrols  ;  and  when  in  im- 
mediate presence,  he  should  omit  no  means  to  watch  the 
cnemj^'s  movements,  and  from  the  occurrences  of  the  mo- 
ment, such  as  noises,  the  motion  of  clouds  of  dust,  camp 
tires,  conflagrations,  <fec.,  endeavor  to  divine  what  is  pass- 
ing in  his  camp,  and  his  probable  intentions. 

38.  Accurate  written  reports  should  be  promptly  sent  to 
the  officer  in  command,  in  the  rear,  on  all  these  points. 
The  reports  should  be  legihly  written,  and  should  clearly 
but  concisely  state  what  has  fallen  under  the  officer's  eye, 
Tvhat  he  has  learned  from  others,  and  the  character  of  the 
soui'Ces  from  ^'hicb  hi;-  iuf'^'i  raation  i?  drann. 


252  •rr-posT  and  picket  putt. 

39.  Ho  will  particularly  see  that  no  comaiuuication  with 
the  enemy  be  allowed,  and  that  no  flag  be  permitted  to 
pass  the  line  of  post,  without  orders  from  the  rear. 

40.  The  post  under  the  officer's  command,  whether  horse 
or  foot,  should  not  all  be  allowed  to  sleep  or  eat  at  once. 
The  horses,  when  watered,  should  be  taken  singly  or  by 
pairs,  and  always  mounted.  At  night,  one  half  of  the 
command  should  be  under  z^rms,  prepared  for  an  attack, 
the  other  seated,  their  arms  and  the  bridles  of  thtir  horses 
in  hand.  The  men  should  never  be  permitted  to  occupy  a 
house ;  and  if  the  weather  is  such  that  a  fire  out  of  doors 
is  indispensable,  it  should  be  as  much  concealed  as  practi- 
cable; one-half  only  being  allowed  to  sit  near  it,  the  oth- 
er posted,  at  a  convenient  spot  at  hand,  to  fall  on  the  ene- 
my should  he  attempt  a  stroke. 

41.  When  the  position  taken  up  is  to  be  held  for  some 
time,  it  will  be  well  to  change  the  locality  of  the  posts  oc- 
ca^nally  ;  this  should  be  done,  particularly  at  night,  in  a 
hilly  district,  changing  the  post  from  the  brow  of  the  hill, 
where  the  men  can  best  keep  a  look-oat  by  day,  to  the  low 
ground  at  night,  as  more  favorable  to  detect  any  move- 
ment above. 

42.  The  out-posts  are  usually  relieved  at  day  break,  as 
being  the  most  favorable  moment  for  the  enemy  to  attempt 
a  surprise  ;  the  new  guard  will  serve  to  reinforce  the  old. 
For  the  same  reasen,  the  old  guard  should  not  be  suffered 
t9  retire  before  the  patrols  come  in,  and  report  all  safe. 

43.  As  a  general  rule,  no  post  should  ever  retire  before 
an  inferior  force  ;  and,  if  attacked  by  one  superior  to  it, 
resistance  should  be  cautiously  made  with  a  view  solely  to 
give  time  to  the  graud-guard  to  be  in  readiness  to  receive 


OUT-rOST  AND  PICKF.l    DLTT.  253- 

tlic  enemy.  When  it  is  aeon  that  the  mov.oicnt  of  the  en- 
vmy  is  serious,  the  officer  should  dravr  fn  his  sentinels  as 
ekirmishers,  and  retire  upon  the  grand  guard  ;  the  latter 
will  usually  be  divided  into  two  divisions,  one  of  which' 
will  be  sent  to  take  up  a  position  to  the  rear,  to  cover  the 
retreat ;  the  other  will  act  as  a  support  to  the  line  of  skir- 
mishers, 80  as  to  feel  the  enemj.  In  all  cases  of  retiring, 
whether  of  sentinels  upon  their  posts,  or  of  posts  upon 
their  supports,  care  should  be  taken  to  assume  a  directiom 
towards  the  flank  of  the  force  in  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  its 
front  and  not  impede  any  forward  movement  it  may  make, 
if  necessary. 

44.  The  degree  of  resistance  to  be  offered  by  the  pick- 
ets will  depend  on  the  object  to  be  obtained,  and  the  im- 
portance of  the  point  occupied.  They  should  not  retire 
until  they  have  received  the  whole  of  their  grand-guards, 
out-posts  and  patrols. 

15.  At  night  the  pfecautions  should  be  neeessarily  re- 
doubled, and  every  movement  bo  made  with  extreme  cau- 
tion. Whenever  any  noise  is  heard  in  the  direction  of  a 
ncntinel's  post,  the  officer  should  proceed,  with  a  part  of 
his  command,  in  its  direction,  to  ascertain  the  cause  of  it. 
If  he  finds  that  it  arises  from  an  onward  movement  of  the 
enemy,  he  should  only  fall  back  upon  his  grand-guard 
when  he  sees  that  resistance  would  be  unavailing ;  retiring 
slowly  and  cautiously,  and  taking  every  advantage,  which 
the  ground  offers,  t©  check  the  enemy's  advance.  Should 
the  enemy  fall  suddenly  upon  his  commmand,  he  must  en- 
deavor to  cut  his  way  through,  and  reach  his  position  in 
the  rear  by  the  best  circuit  he  can  find. 


251  OUl-Pum   AND  ri<REl   Pt   IT. 


ADVANCED-GUAKDhi. 

46,  Jloasuic^  of  precaution,  lor  a.  force  in  po.ntioii,  at  ^ 

far  more  easily  arranp;cd  than  for  ono  in  moUcn.     At  .< 

halt  of  som«'  <Uys,  but  alight  chanffca  in  the  first  di.ipo.-*; 

tiony,  arisinj!^  fi<nn  u   metro  thorough   knowledge  of  tli' 

«jround  taken  up,  will  be  requisite  ;  on  a  march  the  bccn 

is  continually  shifling,  and  the  enemy  may  lall  on  just  ;r 

that  point  or  under  those  circumstances  in  which  we  ai 

least  prepared  to  meet  him.     Hence  a  necessity  for  doul 

ling  the  ordinary  precautions  on  a  march,  and  keeping  tli 

troops  more  in  hand,  so  as  to  be,  at  all  moments,  prepar< 

for  anv  emercrenrv. 
t      * 

47.  The  £{iirit  of  the  dispositions  ia  th«*  i<ame  in  bod' 

cases  :  changes  in  the  details,  so  tm  to  adopt  our  force  to 
(he  changing  features  of  the  ground  passed  over,  present 
the  real  didiculty.  On  a  march,  we  may  hare  to  guard 
against  an  aitack  on  the  head  of  the  column,  on  either 
flank,  or  both,  and  in  the  loar. "Hence  a  necessary  disposi- 
tion of  movable  advanced-posts,  in  each  of  these  direc- 
tions, keeping  pace  with  the  progress  of  the  main  body, 
and  far  enough  from  it  to  give  it  timely  warning  of  a  throal- 
eucd  attack. 


RECONNOISSANCES. 


-is.  Tiic'ic  are  no  more  iraportaut  duties  wluch  an  officer 
may  be  calletlnpon  to  perform  than  those  of  coUocting  and 
an  an5,hig  the  information  upon  which  cither  the  general 
or  daily  operations  of  a  campaign  must  be  based.  For  the 
proper  performance  of  the  former,  acquirements  of  a  very* 
l»igh  order,  in  the  departments  of  gcograjjhy. and  statistics, 
are  indi><pensabli>  requisites,  to  which  must  be  added  a  u>in- 
Ute  acquaintance  Avith  topography,  and  a  good  coup  d'ctil 
militairc  for  that  of  the  latter. 

40.  However  detailed  and  perfect  may  be  a 'map,  it  can 
'never  convey  all  the  information  that  will  enable  an  ofll- 
cer  to  plan  even  an  ordinary  march  .with  safety,  etill  less 
operations  that  necessarily  depend  for  their  success  upon 
a  far  greater  number  of  contingencies.  To  supply  these 
deficiencies  of  maps,  an  examination  of  the  ground  must 
be  made  liy  the  eye,  and  verbal  information  bo  gained,  on 
all  the  points  connected  with  the  operation  over  this 
ground.  This  examination  and  collection  of  facts  is  term- 
ed a  Jiecoiuiois-^aucc. 

fiO.  From  the  services  demanded  of  a  reconnoitering  of- 
fiC3r,  it  i?,  in  the  first  place,  evident  that  lie  should  po.sscss 
acquirements  of  no  ordinary  character,  bnt  in  addition  to 
^ tbeeo,  h«-' shonid   l^e  <rifted  bv  nntui-o  with  certain   ti.'iitp, 


\ 


2S6  EBC0XK§ie9i'4C!E^' 

without  which  his  acquisitions  would  be  of  little  account  in 
the  discharge  of  the  responsible  duty  in  question. 

51.  With  clear  and  specific  information  before  him,  one- 
half  of  a  general's  difficulties  in  planning  his  measures,  are 
dissipated.  In  a  letter  from  Gen.  Washington  to  Major 
Tallmadgc,  now  to  be  seen  framed  in  the  office  of  the  Com- 
missary-General of  Xew  York,  he  remarks,  in  relation  to 
reports  made  to  him  on  a  certain  occasion :  "  But  these 
thitjgs  not  being  delivered  with  certainty,  rather  perplex 
thkn  form  the  judgment."  It  is  in  truth  this  feeling  of 
certainty  that  constitutes  all  the  difierence  ;  having  it,  the 
general  makes  his  dispositions  with  roiiffdence ;  without  it, 
he  acts  hesitatingly,  and  thus  ccmmUnlcates  to  others  that 
want  of  confidence  felt  in  his  oWn  mind. 

62.  A-n  officer  then,  selected  for  the  duty  in  question, 
should  be  known  to  te  cool-headed  and  tntihful — one  wlii; 
sees  things  as  they  Are,  and  telle  clearly  and  precisely  whM 
he-bass^en.  In  making  his  report,  whetlier  verbaluj  or 
in  writing,  the  officer  should  study  conciseness  and'  preei- 
sioa  of  language.  He  must  carefully  separate  what  he- 
knows  from  his  own  observation,  from  that  which  he  hafl: 
learned  from  others,  and  add  all  the  Qircumstanpes-  oit 
place  and  time  with  accuracy. 

DUTIES  OF  REC0NN0I1?ER:I"NG  OFFI'GER. 

hii.  The  first  thing  to  be  drme  by  an  officep  selected  for 
a  reconnoispanee,  is  to  ascertain  precisely. ihc  duty  required 
of  him ;  and  what  further  should  be  done  in  case  of  cer- 
tain contingencies  that  may,  from  the  nature  of  the  duty, 
bp  naturally  looke'Jifor.     lui  tihe  oeiiOwraanof*  of  tlu'  diitVj^ 


RECONNOISSAKOES.  257 

assigned  him,  and  in  making  his  report,  the  "officer  should 
keep  always  in  mind  the  specific  character  of  his  mission, 
as  his  guide  in  both  points. 

64.  As  the  need  of  a  recounoissauce  supposes  a  deficien- 
cy in  information  upon  the  features  of  the  country,  the  of- 
ficer detailed  to  make  one  should  provide  himself  with 
maps,  a  good  telescope,  such  simple  aids  for  judging  of 
distances,  and  ascertaining  the  relative  positions  of  objects, 
as  he  can  himself  readily  make ;  writing  materials ;  one  or 
more  good  guides ;  and  gain  all  the  knowledge  he  can, 
from  the  inhabitants  at  hand,  bearing  upon  his  mission. 

55.  The  talent  of  judging  of  distances,  and  of  the  con- 
nection between  the  various  features  of  a  country  within 
the  field  of  vision,  is  partly  a  natural  and  partly  an  ac- 
quired one.  Some  individuals  can  never  be  brought  to 
have  any  confidence  in  their  own  judgment  on  these  points ; 
others  have  a  natural  aptitude  for  them,  which  requires 
but  little  practice  for  their  perfect  development.  The 
powers  of  the  eye  vary  so  greatly  among  civilized  per- 
sons, that  no  general  rules  can  be  laid  down  as  a  guide  for 
the  matter  in  question.  Among  uncivilized  herdes,  used 
to  a  roaming  life,  there  are  found  standards  which  are 
well  understood  by  all ;  the  Arab,  for  instance,  calling 
that  distance  a  mile,  at  which  a  man  is  no  longer  distin- 
guishable from  a  woman— growing  out  of  their  habits. 

5G.  The  first  thing,  then,  to  be  done  by  an  ofilcer  in  ac- 
quiring the  cox(2)  cVciil  militaire,  is  to  learn,  both  from 
books  and  on  the  field,  what  space  is  taken  up  by  a  battal- 
ion and  its  intervals,by  a  squadron  and  by  a  battery  when  in 
order  of  battle ;  how  much  when  in  column  of  march  ; 
and  the  average  time  required  for  certain  movements,  un- 

9 


der  given  circumstances  of  the  ground.  Thi3  acquire- 
ment he  may  make  by  adopting  some  standard  of  his  own, 
his  ordinary  pace,  and  that  of  a  horse,  serving  for  comput- 
ing time  and  distance  reciprocally.  The  next  step  is  to 
acquire  the  habit  of  estimating,  by  the  appearances  of 
these  different  objects,  from  various  points  of  view,  how 
far  off  they  are.  This  must  be  done  practically.  A  very 
simple  aid  to  it  is  the  following  :  Upon  the  stem  of  a  lead 
pencil,  cut  square,  and  held  out  at  a  uniform  arm's  length 
from  the  eyo,  by  means  of  a  thread  attached  to  it  and  fas- 
tened to  the  top  button-hole,  let  the  officer  mark  off,  on 
one  of  the  edges,  the  length  seen  on  it  by  holding  the  pen- 
cil upright  between  the  eye  and  a  man  placed  successively 
at  different  distances  from  it,  as  100,  150—1000  yards. 
This  will  gi"^e  one  rough  standard  for  practice.  Another 
may  bo  made  by  first  ascertaining  the  average  height  of 
certain  cultivated  trees,  as  the  apple,  &c. 

57.  For  getting  relative  positions,  a  contrivance  for 
measuring  angles  roughl}^  must  be  used.  This  is  done  by 
first  folding  a  leaf  of  paper  across,  and  then  doubling  it 
along  the  folded  edge,  as  if  to  divide  it  into  four  equal 
parts.  The  angle  between  the  edge  of  the  first  fold  and 
that  of  the  second,  will  be  a  tolerably  accurate  right-an- 
gle. Now,  by  cutting  off  carefully  along  the  fold  one  of 
the  pieces,  we  obtain  a  quadrant,  or  90°  ;  then  folding 
this  at  the  angle,  so  that  the  two  edges  will  exactly  coin- 
cide, we  get  the  half  of  a  quadrant,  or  45°  ;  and  so  on,  by 
successive  bisections  we  can  mark  off  smaller  angles.  Then 
making  a  pen  or  pencil- mark  along  each  of  the  folds,  and 
numbering  the  angles  successively  from  0  to  90°,  we  have 
a  rougli  j».'V)^/Trr/or,  that  can  be  uspd  both  for  measuring 


KECUN  N  UlSS.S  N  e  l-x.  2i0 

«ngIos  and  setting  them  off  on  a  s-kctch.  To  measure  ver- 
tical angles,  a  thread  with  a  light  plummet,  must  be  at- 
tached to  the  angular  point.  If  the  object  is  above  the 
horizon  of  the  eye,  we  hold  the  proti  actor  triih  the  anjxi- 
lar  point  from  the  <^ye,  &o  that  the  plumb-line  will  fall  along 
the  face  of  the  paper,  just  touching  it;  then  directing  the 
tep  edge  of  the  protractor  on  the  object,  so  that  it  is  juFt 
seen  bj  the  eve,  sighting  along  the  edge,  the  angle  formed 
between  the  plumb-line  and  the  other  edge,  will  be  the 
.same  as  the  angle  between  the  line  of  sight  and  the  hori- 
zon of  the  eye. 

58.  If  the  object  is  below  the  horizon  of  the  eye,  the  an- 
gular point  !•?  ^^/f/cer^ /ocarc/^ //tr;  eye',  the  same  scried  of 
operations  will  give  the  ar.r^lc  below  the  eye's  horizon, 

GUIDE?. 

59.  Trustworthy  guides  are  invaluable,  but  most  rare, 
in  an  enemy's  country.  The  best,  from  the  information 
they  acquire  by  their  habits  of  life,  are  to  be  found  among 
those  classes  whose  avocations  keep  them  much  abroad, 
going  from  place  to  place  within  a  certain  sphere  con- 
stantly— such  as  common  carriers,  hunters,  smugglers, 
kc.  Among  the  first  things  to  be  attended  to  by  an  offi- 
cer, in  taking  post  at  any  point,  is  to  find  out  persons  of 
this  class,  and  to  ascertain  their  whereabout  when  want- 
ed. Kind  treatment,  doucciira,  and  promises,  should  not 
be  spared,  to  enlist  either  their  good  will  or  their  inter- 
ests ;  and,  if  policy  requires  it,  they  may  openly  be  treat- 
ed with  apparent  harfchncs?,  to  screen  them  from  odiuia 
among  their  neiuhbory. 


260  RECONNOISSANSES. 

60.  If  none  of  this  class  can  bo  found,  then  resort  must 
bo  had  to  a  liigjher — local  authorities  being  in  preference 
selected — and  if  necessary,  forced  to  act.  Here  rery  care- 
ful treatment  is  requisite.  When  the  necessity  of  the  case 
is  admitted  by  thorn,  much  may  be  gleaned  by  kindness, 
courtesy,  and  a  certain  deference,  from  such  persons,  that 
cannot  be  looked  for  from  their  inferiors. 

61.  Before  starting  on  his  mission,  the  officer  should 
question  his  guide  thoroughly ;  and  if  he  has  several, 
question  each  apart ;  like  precautions  should  be  taken  with 
respect  to  other  inhabitants.  Care  must  be  had  to  find 
out  the  usual  beats  of  one  taken  as  a  guide,  so  as  not  to 
take  him  out  of  his  own  neighborhood.  In  all  cases,  the 
guide  must  be  well  watched,  however  trustworthy  he  may 
seem.  If  unwilling  or  sulky,  he  must  if  needs  be,  be  tied, 
and  attached  to  a  strong  man,  with  a  rope  round  his  mid- 
dle ;  being  first  strictly  searched  for  any  cutting  instrument 
about  him. 

62.  Should  there  be  but  one  guide,  he  must  necessarily 
be  placed  with  the  most  advanced  portion  of  the  detach- 
ment accompanying  the  oflicer.  If  there  are  several,  one 
must  be  there  also ;  the  one  apparently  the  most  intelli- 
gent with  the  officer,  who  should  ply  him  with  questions, 
and  the  others  in  the  rear  strictly  guarded. 

63.  It  may  be  well  to  remark,  that  guides  are  useful 
even  in  a  country  of  easy  communications ;  as  in  case  of 
a  rencontre,  they  may  point  out  bye-ways  convenient  for 
retreat,  if  necessary. 


REGONNOISSANCKS.  261 


RECONNOISSANCE. 


6'1.  To  designate  all  the  objects  to  be  embraced  in  a  re- 
connoisance,  would  lead  farther  than  the  limits  of  this  lit- 
tle woi'k  will  allow  ;  some  general  heads,  which  will  serve 
as  guides  in  all  cases,  wall  therefore  be  alone  noticed. 

65.  A  general  view  of  the  ground  to  be  examined  must 
first  be  taken  in,  so  as  to  obtain  some  notion  of  the  forms 
of  the  parts,  their  connection  and  relations  to  each  other, 
before  going  into  a  detailed  examination.  To  one  posess- 
cd  of  some  topographical  knowledge,  this  study  of  what 
is  before  him  will  not  demand  much  time.  A  level  country 
for  example,  he  knows  is  usually  well  cultivated,  and 
therefore  has  plenty  of  hedges,  ditches,  &c.,  which  lend 
themselves  w^elllto  affairs  of  light  troops,  may  be  not  a 
little  inconvenient  to  manoeuvres  of  artillery,  and  fre- 
quently bring  up  cavalry  very  nnexpcctedly  in  full  career. 
In  a  mountainous  one,  dangerous  passes,  narrow  roads, 
torrents  with  rough  beds,  ugly  sudden  turns,  &c.,  will  ne- 
cessarily be  met  with.  Each  and  all  these  demand  a  par- 
ticular examination,  and  in  his  report  their  advantages 
and  ilisadvantages  should  be  clearly  pointed  out  by  the 
officer. 

66.  If  the  reconnoissance  is  for  an  onward  movement, 
the  distances  from  halt  to  halt,  as  well  as  all  others,  should 
be  estimated  in  hours  of  march  ;  the  nature  of  the  roads, 
and  the  obstacles  along  them  be  carefully  detailed ;  the 
means  that  may  be  gathered  along  the  line  to  facilitate  the 
movement,  as  vehicles,  men  and  materials  for  removing 
obstacles,  &c.    The  points  where  cross-roads  are  found, 


EECOMsOlSSANCES 


must  be  specified  ;    the  direction  of  tbese  roads,    their 
uses,  &G. 

67.  All  local  objects  aloug  the  line,  as  villages,  farm- 
houses, &c.,  should  be  carefully  designated,  both  as  to 
their  position  on  the  line,  or  on  either  side  of  it ;  and  also 
as  to  their  form,  and  color,  Ac,  as  -'square  white  houge 
on  the  right,"  "round  gray  stone  tower  on  hill  to  left.'' 

68.  The  names  of  localities,  in  the  way  in  which  tht  in- 
habitants pronounce  them,  sliould  be  carefully  written, 
and  called  over  several  times,  so  as  to  be  sure  to  get  them 
as  nearly  as  practicable  right  in  sound  ;  then  the  names, 
as  written  by  an  intelligent  inhabitant,  should  be  added. 

69.  All  halting  points  must  be  well  looked  to  ;  their 
military  capabilities  in  case  of  attack,  as  well  as  their  re- 
sources for  accommodating  the  troops,  be  thoroughly  gone 
into. 

TO.  If  the  halt  is  to  take  position  for  some  time,  to 
await  or  watch  the  enemy,  then  more  care  must  be  taken, 
the  whole  site  be  well  studied  as  to  its  fulfilling  the  pro- 
posed end  ;  the  points  of  support  on  the  flanks  be  desig- 
nated, as  well  as  others  in  front  and  rear,  that  may  re- 
quire to  be  occupied  ;  the  suitable  localities  to  be  chosen 
for  parks,  hospital,  &c  ;  the  communications  to  be  opened 
or  repaired,  pointed  out ;  and  all  the  facilities  either  for 
an  advance  or  a  retrograde  movement  to  be  laid  down. 

ARMED  RECONXOISSANCE. 

71.  Reconnoissanees,  made  in  the  neighborhood  of  an 
enemy,  require  to  be  done  under  the  protection  of  a  prop- 
er detachment,  the  strength  and  composition  of  which 

TV  ill  depend  ou  the  object  to  be  attainod. 


f.  ^:^•3^o^»^A.•<f•Ji^.  'i('>3 

12.  If  the  object  be  to  gain  secretly  a  knowledt^e  of  the 
enemy's  whereabout  and  strength,  then  a  detachment  of 
light  cavalry,  conducted  by  a  trusty  guide,  through  cir- 
cuitous bye-ways,  and  moving  with  celerity,  but  with 
proper  precautions  against  falling  into  an  ambush,  or  hav- 
ing his  retreat  cut  off,  is  usually  resorted  to.  The  detail? 
for  this  will  be  found  under  the  head  of  Patrols. 

73.  When  an  enemy's  position  is  to  ba  recoflnoitcred, 
with  a  view  to  force  him  to  show  his  hand,  by  causing 
him  to  call  out  all  his  troops,  then  a  large  detachment  of 
all  arms,  adequate  to  the  task  of  pressing  the  enemy  vig- 
orously, and  also  of  withdrawing  with  safety  when  press- 
ed in  turn,  must  be  thrown  forward. 

74.  Under  the  shelter  of  either  of  these  forces,  the  ofli- 
cer  charged  with  the  reconnoissance,  takes  the  best  mo- 
ment, and  best  point  of  view,  for  cirefullv  ascertaining 
the  dispositions  made  by  the  enemy.  A  good  time  will 
be  at  early  dawn,  when  troops,  in  most  servicea,  are  all 
made  to  stand  to  their  arms.  The  points  which  the  ofli- 
cer  must  exhibit  most  attention  in  finding  out,  are  those 
occupied  by  the  batteries,  and  nil  those  in  any  way  in- 
trenched. 

TATROLS. 

75.  Patrols  are  of  two  classes,  from  the  different  objocta 
had  in  view.  The  first  are  those  made  with  a  view  of  in- 
sui  iug  greater  security  from  the  enemy's  attempts  to  pass, 
or  force  the  line  of  out-posts,  and  may  therefore  be  term- 
ed drfensive  patrols.  They  consist  usually  of  three  or 
i\n\r  m.^n,  who  go  the  rounds,  along  the  cliain  of  Pftritin*^U 


264  RBCONNOISSANCES, 

and  bet\reen  the  posts  ;  seldom  venturing  farther  than  a 
few  hundred  paces  beyond  the  sentinel's  chain  ;  the  object 
being  to  search  points  which  might  present  a  cover  to  the 
enemy's  scouts,  and  to  keep  the  sentinels  on  the  alert. 

76.  The  second  class  are  those  made  exterior  to  the  line 
of  out-posts,  with  a  view  of  gaining  intelligence  cf  the 
enemy's  whereabout,  and  may  therefore  be  termed  offen- 
sive 2^  atrols.  They  are  composed  of  larger  bodies  of  men 
than  the  first  class,  the  number  being  proportioned  both 
to  the  distance  to  be  gone  over,  and  the  extent  of  front  to 
be  examined.  In  a  position,  presenting  but  few  cross- 
roads, and  sparsely  settled,  a  patrol  of  ten  or  twenty 
horsemen,  may  be  found  ample,  to  search  with  all  desirable 
thoroughness,  from  twenty  to  forty  miles  in  advance  of 
the  position,  along  the  principal  avenues  to  it ;  whereas, 
with  a  more  extended  front,  presenting  many  lateral  ave- 
nues, double  this  number  might  be  required  for  the  same 
duty.  From  the  information  obtained,  through  the  ordi- 
nary channels  of  maps,  and  by  questioning  the  inhabitants 
at  hand,  the  commanding  officer  can  usually  settle,  with 
sufficient  accuracy,  the  strength  of  a  patrol. 

77.  From  the  duties  to  be  performed  by  patrols,  cavalry 
are  usually  employed  alone ;  in  cases  of  very  broken 
country,  infantry  mjiy  be  necessary,  but  they  should  al- 
ways be  accompanied  b}'^  some  horse,  if  for  no  other  pur- 
pose than  to  transmit  intelligence  promptly  to  the  rear. 

78.  The  main  duties  of  a  patrol  are  to  find  the  enem}^  if 
in  the  neighborhood,  gain  a  good  idea  of  his  position  and 
strength,  to  make  out  his  movements,  and  to  bring  in  an 
accurate  account  of  his  distance  from  the  out-posts  of  their 
own  force,  and  the  character  of  the  ground  between  the 
position  occupied  by  the  respective  forces. 


liECoNMU.SSANCEc.  Ibr^ 

79.  From  the  nature  of  these  duties,  it  i^s  OTident  that 
both  officers  and  men,  for  a  patrol,  should  be  selected  with 
especial  reference  to  their  activity,  intelligence,  and  the 
aptitude  thej  may  possess,  from  previous  habits  of  life, 
for  a  service  requiring  a  union  of  courage,  prudence,  and 
discriminating  observation — usually  to  be  met  with  only 
in  individuals  who  have  been  thrown  very  much  upon  their 
own  resources.  When  the  character  of  the  country  ad- 
mits of  it,  the  employment  of  such  individuals,  singl^^,  or 
in  very  small  bodies,  as  scouts,  is  one  of  the  most  availa- 
ble means  of  gaining  intelligence  of  an  enemy,  without 
betraying  the  secret  of  our  own  w^hereabout. 

DUTIES  OF  OFFICER  IN  COMMAND  OF  A  PATROL. 

80.  In  conducting  a  patrol,  the  commanding  officer 
should  provide  himself  with  a  good  map,  telescope,  and 
guides,  and  gain  all  the  information  ho  can  before  start- 
ing, by  questioning  persons  in  the  neighborhood.  Noth- 
ing should  escape  his  eye  along  bis  line  of  search,  and  ho 
should  particularly  note  points  which  might  be  favorable 
to  his  defence,  if  driven  back  by  the  tnem}',  or  by  which 
his  retreat  might  be  endangered. 

81.  The  order  of  march  of  the  patrol  will  be  regulated 
by  the  circumstances  of  its  strength,  kind  of  troops  em- 
ployed, the  character  of  the  country  passed  over,  the  hour 
of  the  day,  and  the  particular  object  in  view.  The  intelli- 
gence and  judgment  of  the  officer  in  command  will  have 
sulficiont  exercise  on  these  points,  as  he  will  be  continual- 
ly called  upon  to  vary  his  dispositions.  The  general  and 
obvious  rule  of  keeping  a  look-out  on  all  sides,  will  prompt 


'J66  Kk,CO^.>'Jl:y8A.NLllS. 

the  general  disposition  of  .an  advanced-guard,  rear-guard, 
and  flankers,  according  to  the  circumstances  of  the  case, 
however  small  his  coniraand.  The  sole  object  being  to  car- 
ry back  intelligence  of  the  enemy,  no  precaution  should 
be  omitted  to  cover  and  secure  his  line  of  march,  without 
making,  however,  too  great  a  subdivision  of  his  force. 

82.  Too  much  circumspection  cannot  be  shown  in  ap- 
proaching points  favorable  to  ambuscades,  as  woods,  ra- 
vines, defiles,  inclosures,  fiirm-houses,  villag?s,  &o.  The 
main  body  should  ahvaj'-s  be  halted,  in  a  good  position  be- 
yond musket-shot,  or  where  cover  can  be  obtained,  whilst 
a  few  men  proceed  cautiously  forward,  following  at  some 
distance  in  the  rear  of,  but  never  losing  sight  of  each  oth- 
^r,  to  examine  the  suspected  spot.  If  the  officer  deem  it 
Deccssary,  at  any  point,  to  detach  from  his  command 
smaller  patrols,  to  examine  points  at  some  distance  on  his 
flanks,  he  should  halt  the  rest  at  the  point  where  they 
separate,  until  the  detachments  como  in  and  report;  or 
if  he  decides  to  move  forward,  he  should  leave  three  or 
four  men  at  the  spot,  to  convey  intelligence  promptly 
to  the  rear,  if  anything  is  discovered,  ns  well  as  to  him- 
self. 

83.  It  may  frequently  be  found  that  some  eminence  on 
the  flanks  ma}'  present  a  good  view  of  the  surrounding 
country,  in  which  case,  if  it  be  decided  to  use  it,  two  or 
three  men  ought  to  be  detached  for  the  purpose,  with  or- 
ders to  keep  in  sight  of  each  other,  but  far  enough  apart 
to  guard  against  a  surprise  of  the  whole. 

8-i.  When  the  officer  finds  himself  in  the  presence  of 
the  enemy,  he  should  halt  his  command  at  a  convenient 
spot,  wher^  ihpy  will  be  screened  from  the  eii^mr's  rievr, 


and  having  made  his  dispositions  agaicsi  a  surprise,  he 
will  proceed  with  a  few  picked  men  to  the  most  favorable 
point  from  which  he  can  obtain  a  good  look-out,  to  recon- 
noitre the  position  occupied,  and  the  other  points  of  inter 
est.  If  he  deem  it  advisable  to  keep  his  position,  or  change 
it  for  some  other  point  more  favorable,  he  will  first  trans- 
mit a  report  to  the  rear  of  what  he  ha?  observed. 

85.  When  tlte  patrol  moves  bv  night,  the  ordinary  pre- 
cautions must  be  redoubled.  Signals  must  be  agreed  up- 
on to  avoid  danger,  should  any  of  the  party  become  sepa- 
rated from  the  main  body.  Careful  attention  must  bo 
given  to  every  thing  passing  around,  as  the  barking  of 
dogs,  noises,  fires,  &c.  On  approaching  any  inhabited 
spot,  the  command  should  be  brought  to  a  halt,  whilst  a 
few  picked  men  move  noiselessly  forward,  and  if  practica- 
ble, by  stealing  up  to  the  windows,  learn  the  character  of 
the  inmates. 

86.  It  cannot  b.*  too  strongly  impressed  upon  the  mind 
of  the  officer  in  command  of  a  patrol,  that  he  must  be  all 
ears  and  eyes  j  that  he  will  be  called  upon  in  turn,  to  exer 
else  great  boldness,  caution,  presence  of  mind  and  good 
judgment,  in  accomplishing  a  mission  where  the  enemy 
must  be  seen  but  not  encountered ;  and  such  roads  and 
halting  points  be  selected,  both  in  moving  forward  and  re- 
turning, as  shall  be  most  favorable  to  his  movements,  and 
least  liable  to  expose  him  to  surprise,  or  a  disadvantage- 
ous collision  with  the  euemv. 


SURPRISES  AND  AMBUSCADES. 


87.  These  two  classes  of  operations  depend  for  their  suc- 
cess upon  the  same  point — that  of  being  able  to  attack  the 
enemy  suddenly  when  he  is  not  prepared  to  resist.  The 
term  siuyrise  is  applied  to  unexpected  attacks  upon  an 
enemy's  position  ;  that  of  ambuscade,  where  a  position  is 
taken  for  the  purpose  of  falling  suddenly  upon  the  enemy 
when  he  reaches  it.  Secrecy,  good  troops,  and  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  localities,  are  indispensable  to  the  suc- 
cess of  either  of  these  operations. 

SURPRISE. 

88.  In  planning  a  surprise,  the  officer  must  spare  no 
pains  in  ascertaining  the  fact  of  the  country  leading  to, 
and  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  enemy's  position,  the 
character  and  disposition  of  his  troops,  and  the  state  of 
preparation  of  the  defenses  of  the  position.  Information 
may  be  obtained  on  the  points  from  the  spies,  deserters, 
inhabitants  of  the  locality  occupied  by  the  enemy,  good 
maps,  &c. 

89.  The  troops  to  be  employed  in  the  expedition,  as  well 
as  the  other  necessary  arrangements,  will  depend  upon  the 
information  gained  on  these  points.  If  the  position  be  an 
intrenched  one,  infantry  will  constitute  the  main  force  ; 


glRrniSF.S    AN'U    AMBUSCADES.  269 

cavalry  and  artillery  can  be  of  little  other  use  than  to 
cover  the  retreat  of  the  infantry,  and  to  make  pris- 
oners of  those  who  may  escape  from  the  position.— 
A  body  of  engineer  troops  or  of  picked  men  used  to  hand- 
ling tools,  will  accompany  the  infantry,  carrying  with 
them  such  implements  as  may  be  requisite  from  th«  char- 
acter of  the  defenses,  as  axes,  saws,  crowbars,  email  scal- 
ing ladders,  &c. 

90.  If  the  position  be  not  intrenched,  as  an  open  village, 
&c.,  cavalry  may  perform  a  very  important  part,  by  a 
sudden  dash  among  the  enemy,  in  creating  confusion  and 
alarm. 

91.  As  the  success  of  the  affair  will  greatly  depend  upon 
the  secreey  with  which  these  preparations  are  made,  and 
the  celerity  with  which  it  is  conducted,  all  orders  for  col- 
lecting the  necessary  implements  and  assembling  the 
troops,  should  be  given  at  the  shortefet  notice ;  no  more 
troops  should  be  taken  than  are  indispensably  necessary, 
and  they  should  cary  nothing  with  them  but  their  arms, 
and  the  requisite  amount  of  ammunition. 

92.  Midnight  is  the  best  hour  for  small  bodies  of  trooj^a 
to  carry  out  such  enterprise,  as  they  must  effect  all  they 
desire  to  do  and  be  off  before  day  break.  A  few  hours  before 
daylight  is  the  best  time  for  large  expeditions,  as  the 
dawn  of  day  will  be  favorable  to  their  retreat  by  which 
time  they  will  have  been  able  to  effect  their  purposes. 
The  season  of  the  year  and  the  state  of  the  weather  should 
be  taken  advantage  of.  Winter  and  bad  weather  are  most 
favorable,  as  the  enemy's  sentinels  and  out-posts  will  then, 
in  all  probability,  be  less  on  the  alert,  and  more  disposed 
'o  keep  under  such  shelter  as  they  can  procure. 


\ 
\ 


\ 


270  SCIirillSES    and    AMIirscADKS. 

93.  As  our  purpose  may  be  divined  by  the  enemy,  meas- 
ures should  bo  taken  against  such  a  contingency.  These 
will  mainly  consist  in  securing  by  detachments  all  defiles 
and  roads  by  which  our  retreat  might  be  cut  off,  and  by 
designating  a  rallying  point,  on  which  our  force  will  i'all 
back,  if  repulsed,  which  should  be  strongly  occupied  by 
cavalry  and  artillery,  if  they  constitute  a  part  of  the  force. 

94.  In  conducting  the  march,  the  troops  will  be  kept 
well  together  ;  the  greatest  order  and  silence  be  observed. 
Instead  of  the  ordinary  precautions  of  as  advanced-guard 
and  Hankers,  reliance  should  rather  be  placed* upon  a  few 
active  and  iijteUigent  scouts,  to  gain  timel}^  notice  of  any 
movement  on  the  part  of  the  enemy. 

95.  Concerted  attacks  upon  several  points  are  good 
means  of  creating  confusion  and  paralyzing  the  enemy's 
efforts,  when  they  can  be  successfully  carried  out;  but, 
a.i  they  may  req^uirc  some  of  the  detachments  to  make  con- 
siderable circuits  to  reach  their  points,  much  will  depend 
upon  chance  as  to  their  success.  In  such  cases,  some  sig- 
nal must  be  agreed  upon,  to  let  the  detachments,  already 
in  position,  know  when  those  which  are  likeliest  to  reach 
theirs  latest,  are  ready  ;  but  this  may  have  the  inconve- 
nience of  giving  the  alarm  ta  the  enemy.  Rockets  may 
be  used  for  this  purpose,  and  also  to  give  notice  to  the 
troops  to  retire  together, 

9o.  Tiie  retroat  after  a  successful  issue,  should  be  con- 
ducted with  the  same  promptitude  as  the  advance.  Time 
must  not  be  lost  in  waiting  too  long  for  all  the  detach- 
ments to  coine  in  at  the  rallying  point,  as  the  safety  of  the 
wfii>l(>  command  misrht  bo  comptonrii-'pil. 


SX  lirKl.SK.S  A.N»  AMliVtfiAl'K*..  -271 


AMBUSCADE. 

07.  In  planning  an  ambuscade,  we  should  be  well  ac- 
quainted with  the  enemj-'s  force,  and  the  state  of  disci- 
pline shown  hy  it.  The  position  chosen  for  the  attempt, 
must  be  favorable  to  the  concealment  of  troops,  and  if 
practicable,  it  should  be  reached  by  night,  every  precau- 
ti®n  beiii'i;  thken  to  insure  secrecy.  The  best  positions  are 
those  where  the  enemy  is  incioscd  by  a  defile,  or  villacce- 
and  has  not  taken  the  proper  precautions  to  secure  him 
t<clf  from  an  attack.  By  seizing  the  outlets  of  the  defile 
by  infcintry,  in  such  cases,  and  making  an  impetuous 
charge  of  cavalry  into  it,  the  enemy  inny  be  completely 
routed. 

1)8.  Ambuscades  may  frequently  bo  attempted  with  suc- 
cess in  the  aflairs  of  the  advanced  and  rear-guards,  bv 
pushing  the  enem.y  vigorously  and  then  falling  back,  if 
he  ofiers  a  trong  resistance,  Eo  as  to  draw  him  upon  a 
point  where  stroops  are  posted  in  force  to  receive  him. 

on.  To  trace  anything  more  than  a  mere  outline,  ai  a 
guide  in  operations  of  this  kind,  which  depend  upon  so 
many  fortuitous  circumstances,  would  serve  but  little  use- 
ful purpose.  Au  active,  intelligent  ofFicor,  with  an  imagi- 
nation fertile  in  the  expedients  of  his  pi't.fession,  will  sel- 
dom be  at  a  loss  as  to  his  best  course  when  the  occasion 
offers  ;  to  one  without  these  qualities,  opportunities  prfr- 
scnt  themselves  in  vain. 


KEGlJiATIONS  AS  TO  INSPECTIONS,  PARADE, 
ETC.,  ETC. 

PART  SEVENTH. 

FORM   OF   INSPECTION. 

1.  The  inspection  of  troops,  not  less  than  a  company,  will 
generally  be  preceded  by  a  review.  The  present  example 
embraces  a  battalion. 

2.  The  inspecting^  officer  and  the  field  and  staff  officers 
will  be  on  foot.  The  battalion  being  in  the  order  of  battle 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  into  open  column  of  com- 
panies, right  in  front.  He  will  next  order  the  ranks  to  be 
opened ;  when  the  color-rank  and  color-guard,  under  the 
direction  of  the  adjutant,  will  take  post  ten  paces  in  front, 
and  the  band  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  column.  The  colonel 
seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  then  command  : 

1,   Officers  and  Sergeants  to  the  front  of  your  Companies. 
2.  March. 

3.  The  officers  will  form  themselve  in  one  rank,  eigt' 
paces,  and  the  non-commissioned  officers  in  one  rank,    * 
paces  iu  advance,  along  the  whole  fronts  of  their  r"^*^"*" 


IXSPECTICN.  273 

tivc  companies,  from  right  to  loft  in  the  order  of  seniority; 
the  pioneers  and  music  of  each  company,  in  one  rank,  two 
paces  behind  the  non-commissioned  officers.  The  colonel 
will  then  command : 

1.  Field  and  Staff  to  the  front.     2.  Maroh. 

4.  The  commissioned  olRccrs  thus  designated,  will  form 
themselves  in  one  rank,  on  a  line  equal  to  the  front  of  the 
column,  six  paces  in  front  of  the  colors  from  righ  to  left 
in  the  order  of  seniority  :  and  the  non-commissioned  staff, 
in  a  similar  manner,  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  preceding- 
rank.  The  colonel  seeing  the  movement  executed,  will 
take  post  on  the  right  of  the  lieutenant  colonel,  and  wait 
the  approach  of  the  inspecting  officer.  But  such  of  the 
field  officers  as  may  be  superior  in  rank  to  the  inspector, 
will  not  take  post  in  front  of  the  battalion. 

5.  The  inspector  will  commence  in  front.  After  in- 
specting the  dress  and  general  appearance  of  the  field  and 
commissioned  staif  under  arms,  the  inspector,  accompan- 
ied by  these  officers,  will  pass  down  the  open  column, 
looking  at  every  rank  in  front  and  rear. 

G.  The  colonel  will  now  command.  1.  OrcZcr— Amis.  2. 
Rest  ;  when  the  inspector  will  proceed  to  make  a  minute 
inspection  of  the  several  ranks  or  divisions,  commencing 
in  front. 

7.  As  the  inspector  approaches  the  non-commissioned 
staff,  color-rank,  the  color-guard  and  the  band,  the  adju- 
tant will  give  the  necessary  orders  for  the  inspection  of 
arms,  boxes  and  knapsacks.  The  colors  will  be  planted 
firm  in  the  ground  to  enable  the  color-bearers  to  display 
the  contents  of  their  knapsacks.     The  nun-commissioned 


J  (4  l^irLL'Ily^. 

stalFmay  be  diamisicd  as?  soon  as  inspected,  but  the  color- 
rank  and  color-guard  will  remain  imtil  the  colors  are  to 
be  escorted  to  the  place  from  which  they  were  taken.  As 
the  inspector  successively  approaches  the  eonipanies,  the 
captains  wii!  command  : 

1.  Attcntien.     2.   Conipniiy.     3.  In^peciion — Akjss, 

8.  The  inspecting  officers  will  then  go  through  tha 
whole  company,  and  minutely  inspect  the  arms,  accoutrc- 
raeuts  and  dresoofeach  soldier.  After  this  is  done  the 
captain  will  command:  0/>cn— Boxes  ;  when  the  amron- 
iiition  and  boxes  will  be  examined.  He  will  then  com- 
mand : 

1.  Shouhlcr — Arms.  '_'.  Clone- OnL'T.  3.  Marpk.  \.  OrJcn' 
— Arm:>.  5.  Stack — ARMy-  <j.  To  the  rear  open  order. 
7.  Map. cit.  8.  Front  rank,  About — Face,  5.  Z'neliiV] 
JCnupsack'.     10.    Open  Knup>sacl:8, 

^.  The  sergeants  will  face  inward  at  the  second  com- 
-inand,  and  close  upon  the  centre  at  the  3rd,  and  at  the  oth 
command  st nek  their  armsi  at  the  6th  they  M"ill  face 
■r.utward,  and  at  the  7lh  resurae  their  position.  When  the 
ranks  are  closed,  preparatory  to  iahe  armi,  the  serg■eant^< 
will  also  close  upon  the  centre,  and  at  the  word,  take  their 
iirms  and  re>uino  their  position. 

10.  The  knapsacks  will  be  placed  at  the  feet  of  the  men, 
the  flaps  from  tliem,  with  the  gi'cat  coats  on  the  flaps,  and 
knapsacks  leaning  on  the  great  coats.  In  this  pojition 
the  inspector  will  examine  their  contents  or  so  many  of  them 
as  he  may  think  necessary,  commencing  with  the  r.nn  cr.m- 
s'iiiisioae^l  otVirerf.  tko  men  gf.'indinc;'  at   sttrntion,     VrinHi 


the  iKspector  La;  pa3sed  through  the   companj,   the   cap 
tain  will  comiT^and  :  Repack  Knajy^achs^   when  each  sol- 
dier win  repack  and  buckle  up  his  knapsack,  leaving  it 
on  the  ground,  the  nuuihrr  upwards   turneJ  from   hiin, 
and  then  ptanJ  at  rest.     Tlte  captain  will  tlien  command  : 

1.  Attention.  2.  Company.  3.  Sling  Knap.=iack8.  i. 
Front  rank,  Anoi'T  Face.  5.  Clone  Ortltr.  C.  March. 
7.  JaA'e— Akms.  8.  .^Aow/c/^r— Arms.  0,  OjUrfrs  anJ 
Sergeants  10  your  2>OHt9.     10.  March. 

11.  At  the  works7tW7  of  the  *rd  command,  each  soldier 
will  take  his  knapsack,  holding  it  by  the  inner  Flraps,  and 
Etand  erect;  at  tlvc  la^-t  word,  he  will  replace  it  on  his 
back.  At  the  10th  command,  the  company  will  fde  off  to 
their  tents  or  quarters,  except  the  company  that  is  to  re- 
escort  the  colcr?,  which  will  await  tb«  further  order?  cf 
the  coloneh 

FOllMS  OF  PARADE. 

12.  ThcJ  *jzample3  here  given  embrace  a  battaliun  of  in- 
fantry. A  single  company  will  parnde  as  if  it  wore  with- 
the  h.att.'ilion, 

I.  DRESS  PAR  A  in:, 

13.  At  the  hour  appointed,  on  thoFigna!  of  the  adjutant 
the  captain.s  will  march  their  companies  to  the  parade- 
ground,  where  they  take  their  position.?  in  the  order  of 
battlff.  When  the  line  is  formed,  the  captain  o^'  the  lirst 
company,  on  notice  fiom  the  adjutant,  ftcpn  one  pace  to 
the  front  and  gives  to  hia  company  the  coiiminnd  :  Order — 
4rm  :  •    l*i^,io<h — Kvsr  •   which    i^  rr-peatpd   Ur    *^n.ch  nap- 


27C  DKESS    PARADE. 

tain  in  succession  to  the  left.  The  adjutant  takes  post  two 
paces  on  the  right  ©fthe  line;  the  sergeant-major  two 
paces  on  the  left.  The  music  will  be  formed  in  two  ranks 
on  the  right  of  the  adjutant.  The  senior  officer  preisent 
will  take  the  command  of  the  parade,  and  will  take  post 
at  a  suitable  distance  in  front,  opposite  the  centre,  facing 
the  line. 

14.  When  the  companies  have  ordered  arms,  the  adju- 
tant will  order  the  music  to  heat  off',  when  it  will  commence 
on  the  right,  beat  in  front  of  the  line  to  the  left,  and  back 
to  its  place  on  the  right  The  adjutant  will  then  step  two 
paces  to  the  front,  face  to  the  left,  and  command  : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Battalion.    3.  Shoulder — Arms.    4.  Pre- 
pare  to  open  ranks.    5.  To  the  rear  open  erder.  G.March. 

16.  At  the  sixth  command,  the  ranks  will  be  opened,  the 
commissioned  officers  (tield  and  stafi"  dismounting)  will 
march  to  the  front,  field  officers  six  paces,  the  company 
officers  four  paces,  opposite  to  their  position  in  line  of 
battle,  halt  and  dress.  The  adjutant  seeing  the  ranks 
aligned,  wall  command:  Fr8nt,  and  march  along  the  front 
to  the  centre,  face  to  the  right,  and  pass  the  line  of  com- 
pany officers,  eight  or  ten  paces,  face  to  the  right  about 
and  command  : 

Present —Anna. 

16.  Seeing  this  executed,  he  will  face  about  to  the  com- 
manding officer,  salute  and  report,  "Sii',  the  parade  is 
formed."  The  adjutant  will  then,  on  intimation  to  that 
efiect,  take  his  station  three  paces  on  the  left  of  the  com- 
manding officer,  one  pace  retired,  passing  around  bis  rear. 


DRESS   PAUADE.  277 

17.  The  commanding  nfticer,  having  acknowledged  the 
salute  of  the  line  by  touching  his  hat,  will,  after  the  adju- 
tant has  taken  his  post,  draw  his  sword  and  command. 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Shoulder — Akms, 

and  add  such  exercises  as  he  may  think  proper,  conclud- 
ing with  Order — Arms.  He  will  then  return  his  sword, 
and  direct  the  adjutant  to  receive  the  reports. 

18.  The  adjutant  will  now  pass  around  the  right  of  the 
commanding  oflicer,  advance  upon  the  lino,  halt  midway 
between  him  and  the  line  of  company  officers,  and  com- 
mand : 

1.  First  Sergeants  to  the/rorU  and  centre,     2.  Mar#h. 

19.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  sergeants  will  shoul- 
der arms,  march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and  face  inward. 
At  the  second  command,  they  will  march  to  the  centre, 
and  halt.     The  adjutant  will  then  order : 

1.  Front— FxcE.     2.  Report. 

20.  At  the  last  word,  each  in  succession,  beginning  o» 
the  right,  will  salute  by  bringing  the  left  hand  smartly 
across  the  breast  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  report  the  re- 
sult of  the  roll-call  previously  made  on  the  company  pa- 
lade.     The  adjutant  then  commands  : 

1.  First  Sergeants,  outward—FACE.     2.   To  your  posts — 
March, 

when  they  will  resume  their  places  and  order  arms.  Tho 
adjutant  will  then  face  to  the  commanding  officer,  salute, 
report  absent  officers,  and  give  the  result  of  the  first  ser- 


2Ts  IiRESS    Pa U ADS. 

geants'  reports.  The  commanding  officer  will  then  direct 
the  orders  to  be  read,  when  the  adjutant  will  face  about 
and  announce : 

ATTENTION    TO    ORDERS. 

21.  Having  read  the  orders,  the  adjutant  will  lace  to 
the  commanding  officer,  salute  and  report;  when,  on  an 
intimation  from  the  commander,  he  will  face  again  to  the 
line  and  announce : 

PAKAQK    IS    SISM2SSI2D. 

22.  All  the  officers  will  now  return  their  swords,  face 
inward,  and  close  on  the  adjutant,  he  having  taken  posi- 
tion in  thetr  line,  the  field  officers  on  the  flanks.  The  ad- 
jutant commands : 

1.  Front — Face..    2.   Forward — March. 

When  they  will  march  forward,  dressing  on  the  centre,  the 
music  playing,  and  when  within  six  paces  of  the  coai' 
mander,  the  adjutant  will  give  the  command  ?  Halt. 
The  offiers  will  then  salute  the  commanding  officer  by 
raising  the  hand  to  the  cap,  and  there  remain  until  he 
?hall  have  communicated  to  them  such  instructions  as  he 
may  have  to  give,  or  intimates  that  the  ceremony  is  fin- 
ished. As  the  officers  disperse,  the  first  sergeants  will 
close  the  ranks  of  their  respective  companies,  and  march 
them  oti",  the  band  continuing  to  plaj-  until  the  companies 
clear  the  regimental  parade  ground. 


KETIKU.  279 


II.  IIEVIEW. 


23.  Preparatory  to  a  review,  the  adjutant  will  cau^e  a 
camp-color  to  be  placed  80  or  100  paces,  or  more,  in  front  of, 
and  opposite  to,  where  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  rest, 
where  the  reviowinj^j  officer  is  supposed  to  take  his  station  ; 
and  although  he  may  choose  to  quit  that  position,  still  the 
color  is  to  be  considered  as  the  point  to  which  all  the 
movements  and  formations  are  relative.  The  adjutant 
will  also  cause  points  to  be  marked,  at  suitable  distances, 
for  the  wheeling\s  of  the  divisions,  so  that  their  right  flanks, 
in  marching  past,  shall  only  be  about  four  paces  from  the 
camp-color,  or  position  of  the  reviewing  officer. 

24.  The  battalion  being  formed  in  the  order  of  battle  at 
shouldered  arms,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Battalion, pn par cf or  review.  2.  To  th«re<ir,oj)cn  order. 
3.  Mauch. 

25.  At  the  word  march,  the  field  and  staft'  officers  die- 
moiint,  the  company  officers  and  the  color-rank  advance 
four  paces  in  front  of  the  first  rank,  and  place  themselves 
opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  the  order  of  battle  ; 
the  color-guard  replace  the  color-rank;  the  stafl'offieer«i 
place  themselves,  according  to  rank,  three  paces  on  the 
right  of  the  rank  of  the  company  officers,  and  one  pace 
from  each  other  ;  the  music  takes  post  as  at  dress  parade; 
the  non-commissioned  stafii"  takes  post  one  pace  from  each 
other,  and  three  paces  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of 
the  battalion. 

2G.  When  the  ranks  arc  aligned,  the  colonel  will  com- 
m«'\nd  :   Fuont  :   ^ml    place    hi ni.HelC  eight  paces,   und    tl<'< 


280  KEVIEW. 

lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  two 
paces,  in  front  of  the  rank  of  company  oflEicers,  and  oppo- 
site to  their  respective  places  in  the  order  of  battle,  all 
facing  to  the  front. 

27.  When  the  reviewing  officer  presents  himself  before 
tlie'centre,  and  is  fifty  or  sixty  paces  distant,  the  colonel 
will  face  about  and  command  : 

Present — Arms  ; 

and  resume  his  front.  The  men  present  arms,  and  the  of- 
fficers'salute,  so  as  to  drop  their  swords  with  the  last  mo- 
tion of  the  firelock.  The  non-commissioned  staff"  salute 
by  bringing  the  sword  to  a  ^joise,  the  hilt  resting  on  the 
breast,  the  blade  in  front  of  the  face,  inclining  a  little  out- 
wards. The  music  will  play,  and  all  the  drums  beat,  ac- 
cording to  the  rank  of  the  revieAving  officer.* 

28.  The  reviewing  officer  having  halted  and  acknowl- 
edged the  salute  by  touching  or  raising  his  cap  or  hat,  the 
colonel  will  face  about  and  command  :  Shoulder — Aums  1 
when  the  men  shoulder  their  pieces  ;  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned staff"  recover  their  swords  with  the  last  mo- 
tion, and  the  colonel  faces  to  the  front. 

29.  The  reviewing  officer  will  then  go  towards  the  right, 
the  whole  remaining  perfectly  steady,  without  paying  any 
further  compliment,  while  he  passes  along  the  front  of 
the  battalion  and  proceeds  around  the  left  flank,  and  along 

*  If  the  reviewing  officer  be  junior  in  rank  to  the  com- 
mandant of  the  parade,  no  compliment  will  be  paid  to  him, 
but  he  will  be  received  with  arms  carried,  and  the  officers 
will  not  salute  as  the  column  passes  in  review.  The  col- 
ors salute  such  persons  only  as  from  their  rank,  and  by 
regulation,  arc  entitled  to  that  honor. 


nKVir.w.  2^1 

the  rear  of  the  file  closers,  to  the  right.  While  the  re- 
viewing officer  is  going  round  the  battalion  the  band  will 
play,  and  will  cease  when  he  has  returned  to  the  right 
flank. 

30.  When  the  reviewing  officer  turns  off  to  place  him- 
self b}'  the  camp-color  in  front,  the  colonel  will  face  the 
line  and  command : 

1.   Close  order.     2.  Mauch. 

31.  At  the  first  command  the  field  and  company  officers 
will  face  to  the  ri(/ht-eihout  ;  and  at  the  second  command, 
all  persons,  except  the  colonel,  wiU  resume  their  places  in 
the  order  of  battle ;  the  field  and  staff  officers  mount. 

32.  The  reviewing  officer  having  taken  his  position  near 
the  camp-color,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  By  Company,  riyhl  ivhcel.  2.  Qwic/c— Marcu.  3.  Paaa 
in  revieio.  4.  CvUnnn,  foricard.  5.  Guide  right.  6. 
Maucu. 

33.  The  battalion,  in  column  of  companies,  right  in 
front,  will  then  in  common  time,  and  at  shoxilder  arms, 
bo  put  in  motion  ;  the  colonel  four  paces  in  front  of  the 
captain  of  the  leading  company;,  the  lieutenant-colonel  on 
a  line  with  the  leading  company  ;  the  major  on  a  line  with 
the  rear  company  ;  the  adjutant  on  a  line  with  the  second 
company ;  the  sergeant-major  on  a  line  with  the  company 
next  preceeding  the  rear — each  six  paces  from  the  flank 
(left)  opposite  to  the  reviewing  officer  ;  the  staff  officers 
in  one  rank,  according  to  order  of  precedency,  from  the 
right,  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  column  ;  the  music  prece- 
ded by  the  principal  musician,  six  paces  bofor  the  colonel, 


'1H2  RKVIEVV. 

the  pioneers  preceded  by  a  coi'poral,  four  paces  before  the 
principal  musician  ;  and  the  quartermastei'-sergeant  two 
paces  from  (lie  side  opposite  to  the  guides,  and  in  line  with 
the  pioneers.  The  guides  and  soldiers  will  keep  their  heads 
steady  to  the  front  in  passing  in  review. 

34.  The  music  Avill  begin  to  play  at  the  command  to 
march,  and  after  passing  the  reviewing  officer,  wheel  to 
the  left  out  of  the  column,  and  take  a  position  opposite 
and  facing  him,  and  will  continue  to  play  until  the  rear  of 
the  column  shall  have  passed  him,  when  it  will  cease,  and 
follow  in  the  rear  of  the  battalion.*  The  officers  will  sa- 
lute the  reviewing  officer  when  the}^  arrive  within  six  pa- 
ces of  him,  and  recover' their  swords  when  six  paces  past 
him.  All  officers,  in  saluting,  will  cast  their  eyes  towards 
the  reviewing  officer.     The  colonel,  when  he  has  saluted 

.  at  the  head  of  the  battalion,  will  place  himself  near  the  re- 
viewing officer,  and  will  remain  tkere  until  the  rear  has 
passed,  when  he  will  rejoin  the  battalion.  The  colors 
will  salute  the  reviewing  officer,  if  entitled  to  it,  when 
within  six  paces  to  him,  and  be  raised  when  they  have 
passed  by  him  an  equal  distance.  The  color-bearer  will 
remain  in  ranks  while  passing  and  saluting. 

35.  The  reviewing  officer,  or  personage,  will  acknowl- 
edge the  salute  b_y  raising  or  taking  oflf  his  cap,  or  hat, 
when  the  commander  of  the  troops  salutes  him  ;  and  also 
when  the  colors  pass.  The  rest  of  the  time,  occupied  by 
the  passage  of  the  troops,  he  will  bo  covered. 

36.  When  the  column  has  passed  the  reviewing  officer, 
the  colonel  will  direct  it  to  the  ground  it  marched  from, 

*  That  is,  unless  the  battalion  is  to  pa?s  in  qitich  time 
al?o,  in  which  case  it  will  keep  it*  poaition. 


C.CAKD-MOCMl.NG.  2S5 

and  command  Guide  left,  in  time  for  tlie  guides  to  cover. 
The  column  having  arrived  on  its  ground,  the  colonel  will 
command  :  1.  Column.  2.  Halt  ;  from  it  in  order  of 
battle,  and  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened  as  above  directed. 
The  review  will  t«rmiuate  by  the  whole  saluting  as  at  the 
beginning. '•'•■ 

37.  The  colonel  will  afterward  cause  the  troops  to  per- 
form such  exercises  and  manceuvres  as  the  reviewing  oHi- 
cer  may  direct. 

:{8.  A  number  of  companies,  less  than  a  battalion,  will 
be  reviewed  as  a  battalion,  and  a  single  company  as  if  it 
were  with  the  battalion.  In  the  latter  case  the  company 
may  pass  in  column  of  platoons. 

] I  r.  G UARD-MOUNTING. 

39,  At  the  first  call  for  guard-mounting,  the  men  warn- 
ed for  duty  turn  out  on  their  company  parades  for  inspec- 
tion by  the  first  sergeants.  Each  detachment,  as  it  ar- 
rives, will,  under  the  direction  of  the  adjutant,  take  post 
on  the  left  of  the  one  that  preceded  it,  in  open  order,  arms 
shouldered  and  bayonets  fixed  ;  the  supernumeraries  five 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  men  of  their  respective  companies; 

*  If,  however,  instructions  have  been  given  to  march  the 
troops  past  in  quick  time  also,  the  column  will,  instead  of 
changing  the  guide,  halting  the  column,  and  wheeling  it 
into  lino,  ns  above  directed,  give  the  command  :  1.  Quick 
time.  2.  ^Mauc^.  In  passing  the  reviewing  officer  again, 
no  salute  will  be  offered  by  either  officers  or  men.  As  the 
column  approaches,  the  music,  having  commenced  play- 
ing at  the  command  mnrch,  will  place  itsef  in  front  of,  and 
march  oU' with  the  column,  and  continue  to  play  until  the 
battalion  is  halted  on  its  original  ground.  The  review  Avilf 
lerminatc  iu  the  .?a)ric  mannor  as  abi>v*j  diicciiKU 


284  GUAUD-MOUNTUsG. 

the  first  sergeants  in  rear  of  them.  The  sergeant-major 
will  dress  the  ranks,  count  the  files,  verify  the  details,  and 
when  the  guard  is  formed,  report  to  the  adjutant,  and 
take  post  two  paces  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank. 

40.  The  adjutant  then  commands:  Front,  when  the  offi- 
cer of  the  guard  takes  post  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the 
centre,  the  sergeants  in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  rear  of  the 
officers  ;  and  the  corporals  in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  rear 
of  the  sergeants — all  facing  to  the  front.  The  adjutant 
then  assigns  their  places  in  the  guard. 

41.  The  adjutant  then  command  : 

1.    Offi-cer  and  non-commissioned   Officers.     2.  About  face. 
3.  Inspect  your  guards — Marsh. 

42.  The  non-commissioned  oflBcers  then  take  their  posts. 
The  commander  of  the  guards  then  commands : 

1.  Order — Arms.     2.   Inspection — Arms. 

and  inspects  his  guard.  When  there  is  no  commissioned 
officer  on  the  guard,  the  adjutant  will  inspect  it.  During 
inspection  the  band  wiU  play. 

43.  The  inspection  ended,  the  officer  of  the  guard  takes 
post  as  though  the  guard  were  a  company  of  a  battalion 
in  open  order,  under  review  ;  at  the  same  time,  also,  the 
officers  of  the  day  will  take  post  in  front  of  the  centre  of 
guard  ;  the  old  officer  of  the  day  three  paces  on  the  right 
of  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  one  pace  retired.  The  adju- 
tant will  then  command  : 

1.  ParatZe— Rest.      2.   Troop— Q^Ki  Off. 

■  when  the  music,  beginning  on  the  right,  will  beat  down 


GUARB-MOUMIMi.  265 

tlio  line  in  front  of  the  oflScer  of  the  guard  to  the  left,  and 
back  to  its  place  on  the  right,  it  will  cease  to  play. 

44.  The  adjutant  will  command : 

1.  t^ttention.     2.  Shoulder — Arms.      3.  Close  Order.-' 
March. 

45.  At  the  word  **  close  order,"  the  officer  will  face 
about;  at  " march,"  resume  his  post  in  line.  The  adju- 
tant then  commands  :  Present — Arms:  at  which  he  will 
face  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day,  salute  and  report,  ^'Sir, 
the  guard  is  forjyied."  The  new  officer  of  the  day,  after 
acknowledging  the  salute,  will  direct  the  adjutant  to  march 
the  guard  in  review,  or  by  Hank  to  its  post.  But  if  the 
adjutant  be  senior  to  the  officer  of  the  day,  he  will  report 
without  saluting  with  the  sword  then,  or  when  marching 
in  review. 

46.  In  review,  the  guard  march  past  the  officer  of  the 
day,  according  to  the  order  of  review,  conducted  by  the 
adjutant,  marching  on  the  left  of  the  first  division;  the 
sergeant-major  on  the  left  of  the  last  division.  When  the 
column  has  passed  the  officer  of  the  day,  the  officer  of  the 
guard  marches  it  to  its  post,  the  adjutant  and  sergeant- 
major  retiring.  The  music,  which  has  wheeled  out  of  the 
column  and  take  post  opposite  the  officer  of  the  day,  will 
cease,  and  the  old  officer  of  the  day  salute,  and  give  the 
old  or  standing  orders  to  the  new  officer  of  the  day.  The 
supernumeraries,  at  the  same  time,  will  be  marched  to 
their  respective  company  parades  and  dismissed. 

47.  On  the  approach  of  the  new  guard,  the  officer  of  the 
old  guard  having  his  guard  paraded,  will  command: — 
/Vescj(<— Arms.      The  new  guard  will  march  in  quick 


<ime,  puft  the  old  guard,  at  ehouldur  arms,  nfiicefs  ealut- 
ing-,  and  take  post  four  paces  on  its  right,,  when,  being 
aligned  v.ith  it,  its  commander  will  order  :  Present — Akms". 
The  two  officers  will  then  approach  each  other  and  salute. 
Tliey  will  th«n  return  to  their  respective  guards,  and  com- 
mand : 

1.  Shoulder— Anus.    U    Order-~A\i^i^. 

48.  The  otllcer  ®f  the  new  guard  wHl  now  direct  the  de- 
tail for  the  advance  guard  to  be  formed  and  marched  to 
its  post,  the  list  of  the  guard  made  and  divided  into  three 
reliefs,  and  perform  all  the  other  duties  incident  to  his  post 
itnd  necessary  at  this  time  to  be  done. 

4:0.  The  first  relief  having  been  designated  and  ordered 
two  paces  to  the  front,  the  corporal  of  the  new  guard  will 
take  charge  of  it,  and  go  to  relieve  the  sentinels,  accom- 
panied by  the  corporal  of  the  old  guard/  Vvho  will  take 
command  of  the  old  sentinels,  when  the  whole  are  reliev- 
ed. The  relief,  with  arms  at  a  support,  in  two  ranks,  will 
march  by  a  flank,  conducted  by  the  corporal  on  the  side 
of  the  leading  front  rank  man  ;  and  then  men  will  be  num- 
bered alternately  in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  the  man  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank  being  No.  1.  Should  an  offi- 
cer approach,  the  corporal  will  command :  Carry  c(rm<i, 
and  resume  the  support  arms  when  the  officer  is  passed: 

50.  When  the  sentinel  sees  the  relief  approaching,  ho 
will  halt  and  face  to  it,  uith  his  arms  at  a  shoulder.  At 
fix  paces  the  corporal  will  command  :  1.  lleU'f,  2.  Halt  ; 
when  the  relief  will  halt  and  carry  arras.  The  corporal 
will  then  add,  '-'  No.  1,"  or  ''No.  2."  or  ''No.  8,"  accord- 
ing to  the   number   of   the   port,  Arms—Voi.i,     Thet'-ro 


tlAHJiS     AX*    SK.S  I  IMil.S. 

utitteU  will,  with  arms  &tport  tkon  approach  each  other. 
n  hen  the  old  j-entincl,  under  the  correction  of  the  corpo^ 
ral,  v\ill  whisper  Ihc  inEtruciions  to  tlic  now  sentinel.  Tuiti 
*lone,  the  two  sentinels  will  shoulder  arnip,  and  the  old 
sentinel  will  pass,  in  quick  time,  to  his  place  in  rear  of  the 
relief.  The  corporal  will  then  command  :  1.  Support — 
Anjfs.  2,  Foruard,  3.  JlAncn.  And  the  relief  prooeedB 
in  the  same  manner  until  th^e  wh«le  .ire  relieved. 

51.  The  detachments  and  sentinels  from  the  old  guard 
hsviniy  come  in,  it  will  bo  marched,  at  shovlcUr  avnin, 
.'•ioDg  the  front  of  tlie  new  fcuai  d,  in  quick  time,  the  new 
guard  standing  at  presented  arms  ;  oHiccrs  saluting  and 
the  music  of  both  guards  beating,  except  at  the  out-posti?. 

52.  On  arriving  at  the  regimental  or  garrison  parade, 
the  commander  of  the  old  guard  will  send  the  detachment^ 
oonipos-ing  it  to  thrir  respective  regiments  or  compani'^s. 

53.  Wlicn  the  old  guard  has  marched  off  fifty  paces,  the 
officer  of  the  new  gnard  will  order  his  men  to  stack  their 
arm  SI.  or  ]-lace  them  in  the  arm-rack?. 

GUARDS  AND  SENTINELS. 

iii.  Camp  and  garrison  guards  will  be  relieved  every 
tvTenty-four  hours.  Sentinels  will  bo  relieved  every  two 
hours.  The  oflicers  are  to  remain  constantly  at  their 
guards,  except  while  visiting  the  sentinels  or  necessarily 
engaged  elsewhere  on  their  proper  duty.  Neither  officers 
nor  soldiers  are  to  take  off  their  clothing  or  accoutrements 
while  they  are  on  guard.  AVhen  a  fire  breaks  out,  or  any 
alarm  is  raised  in  a  garrison,  all  guards  are  to  be  imme- 
diately under  arms.  Sontinck-;  will  not  take  ord?)-  or  al- 
low thi'^Hi=»lvp«  to  be  relieved,  orcopt  by  an  (Wlienv  or  non- 


288  '}UARDS    AKli   SENTINELFo 

commissioned  officer  of  their  guard  or  party,  the  officer  of 
the  day,  or  the  commanding  officer.  Sentinels  will  re- 
port every  breach  of  orders  or  regulations  they  are  en- 
trusted to  enforce.  They  must  keep  themselves  on  the 
alert,  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within  ^ight 
and  hearing  of  their  post.  They  will  carry  their  arms 
habitually  at  support  or  on  either  shoulder,  but  will  never 
quit  them.  In  wet  weather  they  will  secure  arms.  No 
sentinel  will  quit  his  post  or  hold  conversation  not  neces- 
sary to  the  proper  discharge  of  his  duty. 

55.  Sentinels  will  be  respected  by  all  persons  of  whatev- 
er rank.  They  will  present  arms  to  general  and  field  offi- 
cers, to  the  officer  of  the  day,  and  to  the  commanding  offi- 
cer of  the  post.  To  all  other  officers  they  will  carry  arms. 
The  sentinel  at  any  post  of  the  guard,  when  he  sees  kny 
body  of  troops,  or  an  officer  entitled  to  compliment,  ap- 
proach, must  call  "Turn  out  the  guard;  and  announce 
who  approaches.  Guards  do  not  turn  out  as  a  matter  of 
compliment  after  sunset,  but  sentinels  will,  when  officers 
in  uniform  approach,  pay  them  proper  attention,  by  facing 
to  the  proper  front  and  standing  steady  at  sJioulder  arms. 
This  will  be  observed  until  the  evening  is  so  far  advanced 
that  the  sentinels  begin  challenging. 

CHALLENGING. 

56.  After  re/rea^  (or  the  hour  appointed  by  the  com- 
manding officer)  until  broad  daylight,  a  sentinel  challeng;- 
63  every  person  who  approaches  him,  taking  at  the  same 
time  the  position  of  arms  poj-f.  He  will  suffer  no  person 
to  come  nearer  than  within  the  reach  qf  bis  bayont,  until 


CBAIIfiS    AM)    ^E.Ml-NKL.-.  2S'J 

the  peisou  has  given  the  coHn!crsijfi.  A  sciitiucl  in  dial- 
longing,  wHl  call  out :  "Who  coviev  pJure*^^  If  ausweir 
ed—'' Friend ,  icith  (he  conntcftign,'^  and  he  be  instructed 
to  pass  pei'ons  with  the  countcvtign,  he  will  reply — *'  Ad- 
vance, friend,  with  (he  coi(i)(ersignJ"  If  answered— 
"  Friends"  he  will  repl^'— "  HaU  friends.  Adcance  one 
ivith  (he  countertvjn"  If  answered— "  Relief,"  **  Patrol  " 
or  "  Grand  rounda,"  he  will  reply — "  Jfalt ;  advance  »cr- 
ffcant  (or  corporal)  with  (he  countcrsifjn,"  and  satisfy  him- 
self that  the  party  is  what  it  represents  itself  to  be.  If  he 
have  no^authority  to  pass  persons  with  the  countersign,  if 
the  wrong  countersign  be  given,  or  if  the  persons  hare  not 
the  countersign,  he  will  cause  thcni  to  stand,  and  call — 
*'  Corporal  of  (he  f/ucird." 

«RAM)   KOl'NUS. 

57.  The  oflicei'  wishing  to  make  the  rounds,  will  take  an 
escort  of  a  non-commissioned  oQiccr  and  two  men.  When 
the  rounds  arc  challenged  by  a  sentinel,  the  sergeant  will 
answei" — '*  Grand  roiinds  ;"  and  the  sentinel  will  replv— 
'"Halt,  grand  rounds.  %fldrance,  sergeant  with  the  toro)- 
tersign."  Upon  Avhich  the  sergeant  advances  and  gives 
the  eounter&ign.  Tiie  sentinel  will  thou  cry — **  Adoanut- 
7'ounds  ;  and  stand  at  a  shoulder  till  th;^y  have  passed. 

58.  When  the  sentinel  before  the  guard  challenges,  and 
is  answered — "  Grand  rounds,"  he  will  reply  •'  HaU,  grand 
rounds.  Turn  ou^ (he guard ,  grand  rounds."  Upon  whirh 
the  guard  will  be  drawn  up  at  shouldered  arm?.  The  ofiicfir 
commanding  the  guard  will  then  order  atcigeaut  and  tno 
caeu  to  advancs:  when    within   ten  pace:?,   the  ser;rcaut 

10 


cballengcs.  Tiiu  soi'g-eant  of  the  grand  rouniLi  aiis\?ers — 
'*  Grand  rounds."  The  sergeart  of  the  guard  replies — 
"t^dvance,  sergeant,  ivith  the  countersign." 

59.  The  sergeant  of  the  rounds  advances  alone,  gives  the 
countersign,  and  returns  to  his  round.  The  s«rgeant  of 
the  guard  calls  to  his  officer — ''The  countersign  is  right"; 
on  which  the  officer  of  the  guard  calls — "Advance  rounds." 
The  officer  of  the  rounds  then  advances  alone,  ihe  guard 
i<tanding  at  shouldered  arms.  The  officer  of  the  rounds 
passes  along  the  front  of  the  guard  to  the  officer,  who 
keeps  his  post  on  the  right,  and  gives  him  theparole.  He 
then  examines  the  guard,  orders  back  his  escort,  and  tak- 
ing a  new  one,  proceeds  in  the  same  manner  to  other 
guards, 

ESCORTS  OF  HONOR. 

,  ,60.  The  escort  will  be  drawn  up  in  line,  the  centre  op- 
posite to  the  place  where  the  person  to  be  escorted  pre- 
sents himself,  with  an  interval  between  the  wings  to  re- 
ceive him  and  his  retinue.  On  bis  appear Jince  he  will  be 
received  with  the  honors  due  to  his  rank.  When  he  haa 
taken  his  place  in  the  line,  the  whole  will  bo  wheeled  into 
platoons  or  companies,  as  the  case  may  he,  and  take  up 
the  march.  The  same  ceremony  will  be  observed,  and  the 
same  honors  paid,  on  his  leaving  the  escort. 

61.  When  the  position  of  the  escort  is  at  a  considerabl© 
distance  from  the  point  where  he  is  expected  to  be  receiv- 
ed a  double  line  of  sentinels  will  be  posted  from  that  point 
to  the  escort,  facing  inward,  and  the  sentinels  will  succes- 
aively  salute  as  he  passes.  An  officer  will  be  appointed  to 
attend  him,  to  bear  such  communications  as  h«  may  have 
Co  make  to  ^he  eommandcr  of  the  es-c&rt. 


K5cr.PT  OF  Ho\"o*i  -29i 


COLOR    ESCORT. 


€2>  Whoii  a  battftliou  turns  out  under  arms,  and  tliB 
coior  is  WRotcd,  a  company,  other  tban  that  of  the  color, 
will  be  put  in  march  to  receive  and  escort  the  color,  in  the 
following  order,  in  quick  time  and  without  music  :  the 
drum-major  and  field  music  followed  by  the  band-;  the  es- 
cort in  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  with  arms  shift- 
ed to  the  right  shoulder,  and  the  color-bearer  between  the 
platoons. 

63.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  cr  quarters  of  the  colo- 
nel, the  escort  will  form  into  line,  the  field  music  and  baud 
on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be  carried.  The  eolor-bearer, 
preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by  a  serge- 
ant of  the  escort,  will  then  go  to  receive  the  color. 

Gi.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed  br 
the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the  en- 
trance ;  the  captain  will  cause  the  escort  to  present  armsp 
and  the  drums  will  beat  to  the  color  for  half  a  minute, 
when  arms  will  be  shouldered,  and  the  escort  will  fee  bro- 
ken into  column  by  platoon.  The  color  bearer  witi  place 
himself  between  the  platoons.  The  lieutenant  and  serge- 
ant will  resume  their  posts,  and  the  escort  will  march  back 
to  the  battalion  to  the  sound  of  music,  in  quick  time  and 
in  the  same  order  as  above. 

65.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from  the 
battalion  the  escort  will  be  halted,  and  the  music  will 
cease;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  sis  paces  before  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  approach  the 
o:>Ionel.  by  fha  rront-,  in  quick  (miip  :  whf»n  at  tiie  drstanre 


Of  ten  paces,  ho  wlU  halt:  the  colonel  will  cause  arm,  tx. 
h.  presented,  and  to  tJ^e  .olor  to  be  played  -^-.^'^-g  ^  ; 
c.uted,the  color-bearer  will  take  hi«  place  u.  the  froiU 
rank  >fthe  color-guard,  and  the  battalion  by  command 
,viU  shoulder  arms.  The  escort,  field  mus^c  --'  -"^  ^^  . 
return  in  quick  time  to  their  several  places  m  tnc  hue  ot 
battle,  marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 

66  The  color  will  bo  escorted  back  to  the  colonel  s  tc^.t 
or  quarters  with  like  ceremony  and  in  the  same  order. 

rUNKRAL  HONORS. 

67  Th.  funeral  escort  will  be  formed  i:.  two  rank.,  op- 
^oe  te  to  the  quartern  or  tent  of  the  deceased,  with  shoul- 
S  eda-sand  bayonets  unfixed  ;  the  artillery  and  cav- 
a  rvon  the  right  of  the  infantry.-  On  the  appearance  ot 
tt/corpse,  the  officer  commanding  the   escort  will   com- 

inand : 

/^•e?-?Hf~  AuMS. 

68    When  the  honors  due  to  the  deceased  will  be  paid  by 
,vhen  it  will  be  halted.     The  commander  will  then  oidci  . 

a.h.el       n.  March.    4.    Jieverse-A^m.      5.    Column, 
fonmrd.     C.  GHide  right.     7.  March.  , 

69.  The  column  ^viU  bemai;chedm_^lm^ 

-;i^;;.;ri;;dge  of  ^^^^^^^  4^r:^f 

black     crape   ^''""'^^^  *''';.  ^^j   "be  worn  when  in  full  or 


music,  and  on  reacliin<(  tlio  o;ravo,  will  take  a  diiection  so 
ns  that  the  g'uides  shall  be  next  to  the  grave.  When  the 
centre  of  the  column  is  opposite  the  grave,  the  coinuiander 
will  order  : 

1.   Column.  2.  Halt.    2.  Right  into  line  tvhecl.    4.  Maiith. 

70.  The  coffin  is  then  brought  along  the  front,  to  the 
oppofiite  side  of  the  grave,  and  the  coramandei-  then  or- 
ders : 

1.  Shoulder. — AuMS.     2.  Piebeut—Xv.\\\i. 

71.  And  when  the  coflin  reachen  the  grave,  he  adds  : 

3.  Shoulder — Arm?.     4.  Rent  on — Arms. 

72.  After  the  funeral  service  is  performed,  and  the 
coffin  is  lowered  into  the  grave,  the  commander  will  ordei  : 

1.  Jittention.     2.  Shoulder — Arm.«.     3.     Load  at  will.     A. 
Load. 

73.  And  cause  three  rounds  of  small  arms  to  be  fired  by 
the  escort.     He  will  then  command  : 

1.  P,tf  company  {or  platoon)  r'ujht-wh eel.     1.    March.     S, 
Column  forward.     4.   Guide  left.     5.    Quick — March. 

74.  The  music  will  not  begin  to  play  until  the  escort  is 
clear  of  the  enclosui-e. 


AMMUNITION. 


Troops  in  the  field  should  not  only  be  supplied  with  a 
sufficient  quantity  of  ammunition,  but  the  men  of  the 
command  should  be  taught  how  to  prepare  it.  Cartridges 
for  small  arms  are  made  of  paper  in  the  following  manner: 
Having  prepared  the  paper,  which  should  be  strong,  but 
not  too  thick,  by  cutting  it  first  into  strips  eight  and  a 
half  inches  wide,  then  cutting  these  strips  crosswise  to 
smaller  strips  four  and  a  half  inches  in  width,  and  then 
cutting  these  last  diagonally,  so  that  the  pieces  will  be 
three  inches  on  one  side  and  five  and  a  half  on  the  other  ; 
the  pieces  are  then  rolled  on  a  small  cylindrical  stick  of 
the  same  diameter  as  the  ball  to  be  used,  about  six  inches 
long,  having  a  spherical  cavity  at  one  end  and  rounded  at 
the  other.  The  paper  is  laid  on  a  table  with  the  side  per- 
pendicular to  the  bases  next  the  workman,  the  broad  end 
to  the  left;  the  stick  laid  on  it  with  the  concave  end  half 
an  inch  from  the  broad  edge  of  the  paper,  and  enveloped 
in  it  once.  The  right  hand  is  then  laid  flat  on  the  stick, 
and  all  the  paper  rolled  on  it.  The  projecting  end  of  the 
paper  is  now  neatly  folded  down  into  the  concavity  of  the 
stick,  pasted,  and  pressed  on  a  ball  imbedded  in  the  table 
for  the  purpose. 

Instead  of  being  pasted,  these  cylinders  maybe  closed 
by  choking  with  a  string,  tied  to  the  table,  and  having  at 
the  other  end  a  stick  by  which  to  hold  it.  The  convex  end 
of  the /ormcr  is  placed  to  the  left,  and  after  the  paper  is 
rolled  on,  the  former  is  taken  in  the  left  hand,  and  a  turn 
made  around  it  with  the  choking  string  half  an  Inch  from 
the  end  of  the   papei'.     Whilst  the  ■-'■fiing:   is  drawn  tight 


AMMUMIIOK.  29o 

with  the  right  hand,  the  former  is  held  iu  the  left  with 
the  forfinger  resting  on  the  end  of  the  cylinder,  folding  it 
neatly  down  upon  the  end  of  the  former.  The  choke  ib 
then  firmly  tied  with  twine. 

For  ball  cartridges,  make  the  cylinders  and  choke  thoui 
as  above  described,  and  the  choke  tied  without  cutting  the 
twine.  The  former  is  then  withdrawn,  the  ball  put  in,  and 
the  concave  end  of  the  former  put  iu  after  it.  The  half 
hitches  are  made  a  little  above  the  ball,  and  twine  cut  off. 

For  ball  and  buckshot  cartridges,  make  the  cylinder  as 
before,  insert  three  buckshot,  fasten  them  with  a  half  hitch 
and  insert  and  secure  the  ball  as  before. 

For  buckshot  cartridges,  make  the  cylinder  as  before, 
insert  four  tiers  of  three  buckshot  each,  as  at  first,  making 
a  half  hitch  between  the  tiers,  and  ending  with  a  double 
hitch. 

To  till  the  cartridges,  the  cylinders  are  placed  upright 
in  a  box,  and  the  charge  poured  into  each  from  a  connical 
charger  of  the  appropriate  size;  the  mouths  of  tlie  cylin- 
ders are  now  folded  down  oa  the  pov/der  by  two  rectan- 
gular folds,  and  the  cartridges  bundled  in  packages  often. 
For  this  a  folding  box  is  necessary  ;  it  is  made  with  two 
yertical  sides  at  a  distance  from  each  other  equal  to  five 
diameters  of  the  ball,  and  two  diameters  high. 


FORMS, 


rtw  or  FUKT.orr.H.  2*»7 

FopM  No.  1. 
FORM  OF  FURLOl  GH. 

FURLOUGHS    TO    ENLISTED    MEN. 

Furloughs  will  be  grantod  onh'  by  the  ■commanding  ofh- 
cer  of  the  post  or  the  commanding'  ofliccr  of  the  regiment 
actually  quartered  with  it.  Furloughs  may  be  prohibited 
At   the  discretion  of  the  olticer  in  command. 

Soldiers  on  furlough  shall  not  take  n-ith  them  their 
arms  or  accoutrements. 

Form  of  furlough  : 

TO  ALL  WHOM  IT  MAY  COXCERX. 

The  bearer  hereof, ,  a  Sergeant  [corpora], 

or  private,  as  the  case  may  be]  of  Captain • 

company  —  regiment  of ,  aged  — ■  years,  —  feet, 

—  inches  higli, complexion, pyes, 

hair,  and  by  profession  a ;   born  in   the  — 

,  and  enlisted  at ,  in  the of  — 

the  —  day  of eighteen  hundre<:l  and  - 

for  the  period  of  is  hereby   permitted   to  go   to 

in  the  county  of State  of he  having 

received  a  Furlough  from  the  —  day  of ,  to  the  — 

day  of ,  at  which  period  he  will  rejoin  his  company 

or  regiment  at ,  or  wherever  it   then  may  be,   oV 

be  considered  a  deserter. 

iSubsistence  has   been   furnished  to   said 

tlie  —  day  of ,  and  pay  to  the  —  day  of 

inclusive. 

Uiven  under  my  kand,  at ,  this —  day  of 

iiignature  of  the  officer  > 
giving  the  furlough     )  — 


298 


PIT   AcenuvT. 


a 

« 


Eh 

O 
O 

o 


o 

i^ 

«3 

s 

« 

<•* 

>^ 

o 

'C 

f»H 

^ 

.' 

1 

■^         1 

»- 

c« 

a 

a; 

tf 

, 

W' 

-«^ 

o 

o_ 

, 

a 

Q 

j_^ 

xn 

«  • 

-u 

-1 

c;) 

id 

a> 

, 

- 

M 
>% 

t-'O 

CJ 

Q 

M 

r-^ 

riS 

* 

a  o 

-W 

J5 

S 

in 

JH 

•^ 

,  -.       , 

a  a       , 

cy  o        I 

8  '-^       o 

<v)  rt 

H 

o   j:; 

?, 'g. 

_- 

1 

a 

Stj 

o 

J5  a 

u 

O  rt 

flH 

-i-> 

;h    (U 

a 

.O  o 

0 

«« .« 

o 
o 
o 

(m 

"o 

aJ 

en 

fS 

to 

rt: 

r   ^ 

a 

I   2 

,a 

1  ^ 

V.  f% 

|s 

p^ 

L  => 

O     I 

a 

^f^ 

fM  I 

1     o 

Cs 

N 

PAT    ACCUC-NI. 


293 


13 


"a  J'r,*"  o^  e-:S  ^  ^     ^  *: 
«  S  S^  S:  «  S  -  I   s 


"■  be  S 

■a    i)    r: 


±>S-. 


O    jj    i> 


bo  a  o 
a  S  e  <u 

bt)  c?,  ^  .2  P  -^  xi  _  o  be  « 
•°  ^  o  :S  ^  ^  «  -^  -  =  -^  ^ 

r;  Ujs  fe  g  --girt  S  g  eti 

.        "  t»l   '-H  J3     --v   r-  1^     ri  C  ^ 

^  ^  i»  .d  o  '^ 


—    0) 


^ 


„  o  *c;  *^  'S  -^>  B 
«  -  :2  ^  x3  "  =^   ' 


«» 


e3    O    C 


e 

o 
S 


300 


SUBfilylAiViCK. 


w 


o 


^ 


s 

s 

05 

•S     t^ 

O 

<Si     c 

^ 


H 

di 

r// 

l-H 

5 

M 

fti 

ca 

a 

1:3 

^ 

.§^5^ 


7-         O 

ft5 


no 

w 

M 

o 
■■n 

H 
->( 

p5 

•IIBS   1 

•dtjog  i 

soipu«o  1 

.icSoui^  1 

Mui^n^  1 

•^S^fOQ  1 

•00  iH  ! 

•su'Bog;  1 

'jno]j[  1 

•iiaoj  1 

jsaq  -J^  1 

'SUOl^TJ.!  'OJy:   1 

•SATjp  JO  -OX   1 

•I^^OJL  1 

•aaraoAV  -o^vj  | 

'tiain  JO  -o^Nj  I                                  1 

( 
1 

o 

■"< 

H 

o 
(/) 

I 

i 

o    s 


ir, 
O 


J** 


m 
I 
« 


N 


pecitied  are 

circumstan- 

tending  to 

3 

an    CJ 

■?-2 

1?, 

1:1 

•a  0 

4;   C.2 

'^ 

!S  "S  ;:^ 

t-» 

^C 

■^    i 

1  -^  o  o 

S 

?i  ^ 

i:  ►- 

fc.  -s  *-> 

^ 

"^   as 

0  a 
0  ar- 

the a 
the  fol 
ink  fit 

< 

c; 

m 

'J 

d 

-<:: 
,  0 

cs  &• 

:!5 

a 

0  a> 

C  n 

<u 

'.  '■^ 

-^^••-i  *■* 

^    »    g 

;  .Cn 

^•.2  c 

S"^' 

t.-  ' — ' 

0  ^  c 

ed  i7>  a> 

^, 

—     XI 

13  correct, 
ice,  render, 
easons  as  h 

TJ 

^ 

0 

o 

c 

»— < 

6J    UV     ^ 

•  •«•       cy)      ^ 

'5 

-   a; 
1    a^ 

1  -r.  « s 

'i* 

U..5 

-Ji  i 

*S  -^  f  '^  "i^  ii 

>  +J  "  .■G    O    ™ 
C    .      te  -^^    CIS    0) 

c9  •*;  t-  .0  .i  *-> 

_      4;  5»-.     /J 
5J   i)   o    ,     ■•"    S 

-^^  •-  •£  S'<  •-' 

b^  i,,  2  «  fl  p- 
w-5  ..  ^  »"o 


w::; 

•  ^     Q,- 

?^  ^• 

-e  s- 

S    !=l 

d  <^ 

4J      ^ 

C5  -i-> 

"< 

c  0 

■SI 

-»->  i) 

0 

./J  _o 

C4 

0:1:  u 

-,  ^   w 

0  >  t) 

<p    cS 

1     fcfci, 

.Ur     1> 

.,;  0  p 

tt 

h:S">. 

0  0  •-• 

,*^ 

a  «-• 

APPENDIX. 


1.  The  t'ollovTiDg^  movements  are  designed  principallj 
for  the  Hse  of  volunteer  compaaies  on  public  occasion8,  for 
parade  and  show,  and  when  properly  executed,  greatly 
enhance  the  looks  of  a  corps  of  citizen  soldiery. 

2.  In  the  execution  of  these  movements,  the  company 
»3  supposed  to  be  in  one  rank,  facing  to  the  froat ;  the  cap- 
tain then  counts  off  the  strength  of  the  company  from 
right  to  left,  and  divides  them  into  fowr  eq^ual  parte,  termed 
♦ '  RrcUobs."'  To  execute  movement  No.  L,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Brtak  into  coltivm   by  sections.     2.  By   icctions   righi 

wheel.     3.  March. 

(/-%.  1.) 


3.  At  the  cemmand  warch,  the  sectioiis-iirhc-Gt  as  is  pre- 


scribed  in  company  drill  for  hreuking  i»to  cohapn  hy  jjla^ 
toon,  being  halted  and  dressed  in  the  same  manner,  and 
each  officer  and  non-commissioned  officer  taking  the  po- 
sition  prescribed  for  thorn,  that  is,  the  captain  takes  com* 
niand  of  the  first  section,  the  iirst  lieutenant  the  fourth, 
Ac,  and  the  first  sergeant  acting  as  guide  of  the  first  sec- 
tion, and  the  second  of  the  fourth.  At  the  command, 
Forieard — Marcii,  thcj  will  step  off  promptly. 

{Fig.  2.) 


i.  To  c-xecute  Fig.  2.,  the  company  is  supposetl  to  be 
marching  in  the  position  of  Fig.  1.  ;  ihe  captain  will  give 
the  cautionary  command.  Subdivision  of  secHoni,  at  which 
each  chief  of  sections  will,  with  his  sword,  divide  his  sec- 
tions in  two  parts,  and  at  the  command  :  1.  Subdivision/i 
of  sections^  right  and  left  ohlique,  2.  March,  each  subdi- 
vision will  oblique  two  paces,  the  right  going  to  the  right 
,ind  the  left  subdivision  to  the  left,  and  when  at  that  dis- 
tance the  captain  will  command  :  1.  Fortpord,  2.  March. 
The  captain  may  sometimes  command  :  Offictrs,  c«ntre, 
when  each  chief  will  take  his  place  in  the  interval  formed 
in  the  centre  of  his  section. 

ft.  To  cause  the  position  of  Fig.  1.,  to  be  resumed,  the 
tfomraand  will  be.  I.  Subdivisions  af  »e(^tons,  right  and I^C 


304  AP{»EXDI.t. 

oh^ijue  to  place,  2.  MiRCH;  at  the  ^'omnrand  march,  oarh 
subdivision  will  oblique  to  Its  pkce,  and  as  soon  sa  the 
connexion  is  mride  they  will  Continue  the  march  to  the 
front  without  farthef  cotrimand. 

( ^*V-  3 ) 


6.  Fig;.  3.  is  formed  by  giving  the  command  : 

1.   Subdivlsion.1  of  Sections  to  rear.     2.  Margk, 

7.  At  the  first  command  the  guide  of  each  section  will 
go  immediatety  to  the  right,  if  not  already  tbere,  and  iit 
the  command  march,  each  left  subdivision  will  mark  time 
until  each  right  subdivision  gets  about  3  paces  in  front^ 
the  left  subdivisions  will  then  oblique  right  until  exactly 
behind  and  in  a  line  with  their  right  aubdivisions  when 
the  command  will  be  given  1.  Foi'irard.     2.  ^aecip, 

8.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  Fig.  1,  the  command  will 
feejl.  Form  sections.     2.  Marc^,     At  thecoijjmand  wsflo-cA, 


APPKNDIX. 


30.» 


thft  right  subcHvi>'ion?i  mark  timo  until  the  K^ft  «hall  have 
obliqued  left  to  their  placo*?,  when  tlio  commantl  will  l)e- 
given,  fo  r  ira  /•  d,  m  a  v  cJi^ 


9.  To  form  Fig.  4,  the  canipAny  is  supposed  marching: 
to  the  front  in  position  of  Fig.  1.  ;  the  captain  will  com- 
mand :  ' 

1.  Form  crosD.     2.  Maucit. 

10.  At  the  first  command  the  guide  of  each  section  will 
place  himself  promptly  on  the  right,  and  at  the  command 
inarch,  tha  first  section  will  come  by  the  riffht  Jlank,file 
left,  and  mark  time,  forming  the  first  wing  of  the  cross: 
the  second  section  will  march  straight  to  the  front  and 
form  the  left  wing  of  the  cross;  the  third  will  oblique  to- 
the  right  and  connecting  its  left  flank  to  the  rearmost  file 
of  the  first  section,  will  form  the  right  wing;  the  fourth, 
will  come  by  the  right fank,  hyjile  left,  and  the  front  mjin 
of  this  section  will  connect  Mmself  with  tlve  rearmost  man' 
of  the  first,  forming   kbe   fourth  wing ;  the  wote  move- 

-"nt  will  be  done   »imuU:inpon?1v.  nnd    nr;   soon    as   it    \^ 


306 


APfKXlHX. 


ffxecuted  the  captain  will  cominan4, 1.  Forward,  2.  M^irch; 
at  which  command  the  company  will  move  off  promptly. 

{Fig.  5.) 


-  Colors, 


11.  The  company  marching  in  the  position  of  Pig.  4., 
and  the  captain  wishing  it  to  execute  the  movemewt  of 
Fig.  6,  will  command  : 

1.   Open  order  hy  sections.     2.  March. 

12.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  section  will  mark 
time  until  the  first  has  gotten  to  the  distance  of  four  pa- 
ces to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  the  second  and  third 
sections  will  oblique  to  the  right  each  two  paces,  the  cap- 
tain will  then  command:  1,  .For!i«7'(^,  2,  March,  when 
tlie  company  will  move  cfF. 

18.  In  both  these  movements  the  flag  will  take  position  in 
the  centre  of  the  cross. 

14.  The  captain  wishing  to  change  the  movement,  will 
command  :  1.  Close  ortfergy  2.  March  :  at  the  second  c?om- 


tVFhSBlX. 


30V 


iiiaud  the  iiist  »ot;tiou  will  mark  tiuio  and  the  utbei>?  will 
close  on  it,  assuming  the  position  of  Fig.  4.  The  com- 
mand will  then  be  given  : 

1.   Form  column  by  tectiovi.      2.  March. 

)5.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  of  the  first  section 
will  form  rapidly  on  the  left  of  tfre  front  rank  man  in  the 
manner  prescribsd  in  the  movement,  by  platoon  in  line, 
the  front  rank  man  (who  is  the  first  sergeant),  marching- 
straight  to  the  front ;  the  second  oection  .continues  to 
march  straight  to  the  front  at  its  proper  distance ;  the 
third  obliquing  to  its  place  in  rear  of  the  second  and  the 
fourth,  going  through  the  movement  prescribed  for  the 
first ;  the  company  will  then  be  in  the  position  of  Fig.  1. 

{Fig.%.) 


lb":  The  company  marching  in  the  position  of  Fig.  1, 
tlie  captain  wishing  to  cause  it  to  assume  the  positiou  of 
Fig.  6,  will  command  ; 

1.  Form  square.     2.  March. 

17.  At  the  command  mirch,  the  first  and  fourth  eoctions 
will  majrk  time,  the  sQCond  will  come6j/  ths  right  fiank,  by 


;](jg  APfENWlX. 

nie  lepy  and  iurm  the  right  side  of  the  cro^s,  the  third  will 
come  hi,  the  left  flank,  file  right,  and  form  the  left  wing  ot 
the  cro'ss ;  as  soon  as  executed  the  captain  will  command  : 
1.  i'bnrarrf,  2.  MAKCH,at  which  command  the  company 

will  step  ofi". 

18.  To  execute  this  movement  well,  it  is  exceedingly 
necessary  that  it  be  done  all  together  ;  the  captain  should 
dwell  sometime  between  the  command  of  caution  and  that 
ofcreoMh-oH,  to  enable  the  men  to  think  how  the  move- 
ment is  to  be  executed. 

19.  The  captain  may  add  to  this  command  by  halting,' 
the  company,  and  putting  them  through  the  diflerent  fir- 
ings,  to  do  this  hr/will  command  : 

1.   Compcouj.     2.  Halt. 

20.  At  the  second  command  the  company  will  halt 
promptly,  dosing  up  any  interval  that  may  have  been 
made ;  the  captain  will  then  command  :  Outward  face, 
at  which  the  2nd,  3rd  and  4th  sections  will  face  outwards, 
they  will  then  be  put  through  the  firings  as  the  captain 
may  see  proper  ;  when  he  wishes  them  to  march  forward 
acrain  he  will  cause  them  to  ceasefirinrj,  and  command  :- 
1?  To  first  position.  2.  Face.  At  this  command  they 
^villface  promptly  to  their  places. 

21.  To  cause  them  to  resume  tlieir  posJtioa  <jf  Fig.  1, 
the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Form  sec'ioue.     2.  March. 

22.  At  the  command  marck,  the  first  section  will  con- 
liime  to  marth  titraight  forward,  the  second  section,  which 
is  the  right  side  of  uf  the  square,  will  form  promptly  ou  it? 


.irrEN-rtiA.  309 

right  guide  and  follow  in  the  rear  of  the  first;  the  third 
Avill  form  in  like  luanner,  and  the  fourth  will  march 
straight  forward;  but  marking  time  a  little  at  first,  to 
allow  the  second  and  third  to  finish  the  execution  of  theiv 
movement. 

(/',V.  7.) 


23.  The  compinn'  uiarchinsf  in  the  position  of  Fig.  1, 
and  the  captain  wishing  it  to  assume  the  position  of  Fig.  7, 
he  will  command : 

1.   Echelon  hi/  sections  to  the  right.     2.  Mauoh. 

24.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  section  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  forward,  the  2nd,  3i'd  and  4th, 
will  commence  obliquing  to  the  right,  and  as  soon  as  the 
left  fde  of  the  second  section  is  in  a  line  with  the  right  file 
of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  section  will  command:  For- 
ward March  ;  as  soon  as  the  left  file  of  the  third  has  got- 
ten in  line  with  the  right  file  of  the  second,  the  same  com- 
mand will  be  given;  the  same  thing  is  applicable  to  the 
fourth  section. 

25.  This  movement  may  bo  varied  by  commanding 
Echelon,  to  the  left  —  Jfarch,  which  will  be  done  in  the 
v^amc  manner,  except  in  this  case  the  sections  oblique  to 
the  left. 


2t).  To  caipse  the  position  of  Fig.  1,  tu   be  resttined,  the 
captain  will  command : 

1.  Form  eolumn.     2.  MAucn.. 

27.  At  the  command  march,  the  sections  will  oblique  to 
their  places,  keeping  the  regular  distances  from  each  other. 

\Fig.b.) 


28.  Thexompany  marching  in  the  powtiou  of  Fig.  1, 
and  the  captain  wishing  it  to  assuume  that  of  Fig.  8,  will 
command : 

1.  Echelon  hy  sections^  right  andhift.     2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  section  marches 
straight  forward  ;  the  second  obliques  right  until  it  gets 
into  the  position  as  indicated  in  Fig.  7. ;  the  third  obliques 
left  in  the  same  manner,  the  fourth  continuing  to  march 
forward.  The  second  and  third  must  be  exactly  opposite 
each  other. 

30.  To  cause  the  position  of  Fig.  1  to  be  resumed,  the 
command  will  be  :  1.  Form  coZK??i?i.  — 2.  March,  at  which 
the  sections  oblique  to  their  proper  places. 


APPENDIX.  311 

{Fig.   9... 


31.  To  assume  the  position  of  Fig.  9,  the  company  is 
supposed  to  be  marching  in  the  position  of  Fig.  3,  when 
the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Echelon  by  subdtvition  »/ tectione  to  the  right  {or  l^t) 
2.  March. 

32.  At  the  command  march,  each  subdivision  will  oblique 
right  (or  left)  as  has  been  indicated  in  No.  24,  Fig.  7, 
except  that  as  soon  as  the  left  flank  man  of  each  subdivis- 
ion is  in  line  and  covers  the  right  flank  man  of  the  preced- 
ing section,  they  will  forward  without  further  command. 

33.  To  resume  the  position  of  Fig.  3,  the  captain  will 
command  : 

1.  Forvi  column  hy  subdivision  of  sections.     2.  March. 

34.  At  the  command  march,  each  subdivision  will  oblique 
to  its  prcper  place,  keeping  the  required  distance  from 
each  other. 


3-1' 


IPPENDTT. 


{F!g.    10.) 


35.  The  company  being  in  march,  in  the  position  of  FI<j. 
?>,  and  the  captain  wisliing  it  to  assume  the  position  of  Fig. 
10,  will  command  : 

1 .    Echelon  hy  stihdirision  of  sections  to  front  and  rear.     2, 
March. 

36.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  subdivision  will 
continue  to  march  forward,  the  2nd  and  3rd  will  oblique 
to  the  right  and  left,  and  place  themselves  opposite  each 
other,  the  4th  and  5th  execute  the  same  movement ;  the 
Cth  and  7th  oblique  right  and  left  until  they  get  opposite 
each  other  and  in  an  exact  line  with  the  2nd  and  3rd  ;  the 
8th  continues  to  march  forward,  and  the  whole  keeping 
the  proper  interval  between  them. 

37.  To  resume  the  position  of  Fig.  3,  the  captain  will 
command: 

1.  Form  eohimn  hy  snhdivision  of  secfioii.     2.  March. 

38.  At  the  command  march,  the  subdivisions  will  obliqua 
right  and  left  until  they  get  in  <ht»ir  proptM-  position?. 


APPU.NDIX. 


{Fig.  11.) 


31: 


39.  The  coim>anv  uiarching  in  the  position  o(  Fig.  10, 
and  the  captain  wishing  it  to  assume  that  of  Fig.  11,  will 
com  ui  and : 

1.  Subdivisiom  of  section.     2.  By  the  right  jlank,Jile  lej'i. 
3.  March. 

40.  At  the  command  march,  each  subdivision  will 
promptly  and  simultaneously  execute  the  movement  of 
flanking  to  the  right  and  filing  to  the  left. 

41.  To  resume  the  position  of  Fig.  10,  the  captain  will 
command  :  Subdivisions  of  sections ,  file  right — 3Iarch,  and 

,as  soon  as  they  shall  have  filed,  he  will  command: 
\.  By  tUUftJkmk.    2.  March. 


>li  APPBNUIa. 

{Fiy.Vl.) 


41.  To  execute  the  movement  of  Fig.  12,  the  company 
is  supiioscd  to  be  marching  in  the  position  of  Fig.  3,  when 
the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Echelon   hy  subdivisions  of  sectione^  right  and  left.     2. 
Marck. 

42.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  subdivision  of  sec- 
tion continues  to  march  forward,  the  second  obliques  right, 
the  third  left,  the  fourth  right,  the  fifth  left,  and  so  on 
forming  the  movement  as  indicated  in  Fig.  12. 

43.  The  captain  wishing  them  to  assume  the  position 
of  Fig.  3,  will  command: 

•1.  Form  column  by  subdivision  of  sections.     2.  March. 

44.  At  the  command  march,  each  subdivision  will  ob. 
liqae  right  and  left  to  its  proper  place,  taking  care  not  to 
loae  the  distance  between  them. 


.tPPFN»IX;  31i) 

{f;s.  15.) 


45.  In  the  execution  of  Tig.  13,  the  company  should  be 
marching  in  one  rank,  (single  file),  and  when  the  captain 
shall  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be  executed,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Echelon  Jjy  Jilt  right  and  left.     2.  March. 

46.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  sergeant  continues 
to  march  forward,  the  man  next  in  his  rear  will  oblique  to 
the  right  until  his  left  shoulder  is  in  a  line  and  thirteen 
inches  in  rear  of  the  sergeant's  right  shoulder  ;  thus  the 
movement  will  continue  alternately  from  right  to  left, 
each  man  obliqueing  in  the  Ojiposite  direction  from  the 
one  in  front  of  him.  In  the  execution  of  this  movement 
the  first  sergeant  will  shorten  his  steps  to  enable  the  men 
to  execute  it  without  confusion.  Should  the  company  be 
a  large  ontv  t  r  r>venit>nt  hnd  better  be  done  in  double 
ijuick  timi*. 


210  A.PPKNPfX. 

47.  The  onptain  may  var3M,his  movement 'by  command- 
ing: Jiic/lit  uhont—March,  when  in  thd  position  of  Fig.  13. 
He  may  also  put  the  company  throiigh  the  different  firings 
in  this  position. 

48.  The  captain  may  vary  these  movements  ao  he  sees 
proper. 

49.  He  may  also  greatly  add  to  the  appearance  of  the 
company  when  marching  by  section,  to  give  the  caution- 
ary command,  subdivision  a  of  necfiotit,  right  and  left  wheel-, 
and  then  command  : 

1.   First  section,  right  and  left  wheel.     2.   M.vp.CU, 

at  which  command,  each  subdivision  of  section  will  begin 
wheeling,  the  right  subdivision  wheeling  right  and  (he  left 
wheeling  Uft,  they  will  continue  the  wheel  and  go  to  the 
rear,  passing  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  other  three  sec- 
tions, who  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front ;  as 
soon  as  it  has  an  ived  to  the  rear,  its  chief  will  command  : 
1.  Firist  section  right  and  left  wheel — March  ;  both  subdi- 
Tisions  will  wheel  at  the  same  time  and  form  the  section 
again,  which  will  march  on  after  the  other  three ;  the  se- 
cond will  go  through  the  same  movement  and  by  the  same 
commands  from  its  chief,  as  soon  as  it  has  arrived  at  sec- 
tion distance  in  front  of  the  ground  where  the  first  section 
wheeled;  the  thiid  and  fourth  will  execute  the  same  move- 
ment, thus  keeping  up  a  succession  of  wheels  as  the  column 
moves  on.  i 

50.  In  the  execution  of  Figures  4,  5,  fi.  8,  10  and  11,  the- 
color-bearer  takes  his  place  in  the  ccntii.'. 


AdTUTAM    ami   iNSPECTOC-ORNKRAf/s  OFirCE, 

Richmond,   Va.,  June  fi,   11^61, 
General  Orders.  Xo.  9.] 


UNIFORM  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  ARMY. 

T  t:  X  1  c . 
For  Cnmmissionrd  OJfirers. 

1.  All  officers  shall  woar  a  tunic  of  ifray  cloth,  known  as 
cadet  gray  ;  the  skirt  to  extend  half-way  between  the  hip 
antl  the  knee;  double  breasted  for  all  grades. 

2.  For  a  Brigadier-General — Two  rows  of  buttons  on  the 
breast,  eight  in  each  row,  placed  in  pairs  ;  the  distance 
between  the  rows  four  inches  at  top  and  three  inches  at 
bottom;  stand  up  collar,  to  rise  no  higher  than  to  per- 
mit the  chin  to  turn  freely  over  it ;  to  hook  in  front  at  the 
bottom,  and  slope  thence  up  and  backward,  at  an  angle  of 
thirty  degrees,  on  each  side;  cuffs  two  and  a  half  inches 
deep  on  the  undtr  side,  there  to  be  bul  toned  with  three 
small  buttons,  and  sloped  upAvards  to  a  point,  at  a  di.i- 
tance  of  four  inches  from  the  end  of  the  sleeves  ;  pockets 
in  I li<e  fuUls  of   thi^  skirt,  wilh    en.'    bnttnn  at    tli  •  hip  .inJ 


318  SNIPOWX?    JkNB    DRESS. 

one  at  the  entl  of  each  pocket,  making  four  buttoRiss  on  th« 
back  and  skirt  of  the  tunic,  the  hip  buttons  to  range  with 
the  lowest  breast  buttons. 

3.  For  a  Colonel — the  same  as  for  a  Brigadier-General, 
except  that  there  will  be  only  seven  buttons  in  each  row 
on  the  breast,  placed  at  equal  distances. 

4.  For  a  Lieutenant- Colonel,  Major,  Captain  and  Lieu- 
tenant— the  same  as  for  a  Colonel. 

For  Enlisted  Men. 

5.  The  uniform  coat  for  enlisted  men  shall  be  a  double 
breasted  tunic  of  gray  cloth,  known  as  cadet  gray,  with 
the  skirt  excnding  half-way  between  the  hip  and  the  knee  ; 
two  rows  of  buttons  on  the  breast,  seven  in  each  row  ;  the 
distance  between  the  rows  four  inches  at  top  and  three  inch- 
es at  bottom  :  stand-up  collar,  to  rise  no  higher  than  to 
permit  the  chin  to  turn  freely  over  it ;  to  hook  in  front  at 
the  bottom,  and  slope  thence  backwards  at  an  angle  of 
thirty  degrees  on  each  side ;  cufis  too  and  a  half  inches 
deep  at  the  under  seam,  to  button  with  two  small  buttons, 
and  to  be  slightly  pointed  on  the  upper  part  of  the  arm  ; 
pockets  in  the  folds  of  the  skirts.  The  collars  and  cuffs  te 
be  of  the  color  prescribed  for  facings  for  the  respective 
arms  of  service,  and  the  edges  of  the  tunic  to  be  trimmed 
throughout  with  the  same  colored  cloth.  Narrow  lining 
in  the  skirts  of  the  tunic  of  gray  material. 

Facinc/s. 

6.  The  facings  for  General  Officers,  and  for  Officers  of 
the  Adjutant-General's  Department,  the  Quartermaster- 
General's  Department,  the  Commissary-General's  Depart- 


IMVORM    ANb   Dl!i;S>.  31$ 

oieut,  and  the  Engineers — buff.     The  tuuic  lor  all  oflicers 
to  be  edged  throughout  with  the  fasciugs  designated. 

7.  For  the  Medical  department — black. 

8.  For  the  Artillery — red. 

•K  For  the  Cavalry — yellow. 

10.  For  the  Infantry — light  blue. 

11.  For  fatigue  purposes,  a  light  gray  blouac,  doubled 
breasted,  with  two  rows  of  small  button?*,  seven  in  each 
row  ;  small  turn  over  collar — may  be  issued  to  the  troops. 

12.  On  all  occasions  of  duty,  except  fatigue,  and  when 
out  of  quarters,  the  coat  will  be  buttoned  and  hooked  at 
the  collar.  Officers  on  bureau  duty  m:iy  w*ar  the  tunic 
open. 

Buttons. 

13.  For  General  Officers  and  Officers  of  the  Genera! 
Staff — bright  guilt,  rounded  at  the  edge,  convex,  raised 
eagle  in  the  centre,  with  stars  surrounding  it ;  large  sizc» 
one  inch  in  exterior  diameter  ;  small  size,  half  an  incb. 

14.  For  Officers  of  the  Corps  of  Engineers,  the  same  a« 
f©r  the  General  Staff,  except  that,  in  place  of  the  eagle 
and  stars,  there  will  be  a  raised  E  in  German  text. 

15.  For  Officers  of  Artillery,  Infantry,  Riflemen,  and 
Cavalry — guilt,  convex,  plain,  with]  large  raised  letter  in 
the  centre  :  A,  for  Artillery  ;  I,  for  Infantrj' ;  R,  for  the 
Riflemen  ;  C,  for  the  Cavalry  ;  large  size,  seven- eights  of 
an  inch  in  exterior  diameter;  small  size  half  an  inch. 

16.  Aids-de-Camp  may  wear  the  button  of  the  General 
Staff,  or  of  their  regiments  or  corps,  at  their.option. 

17.  For  enlisted  men  of  Artillery— yellow,  convex,  large 
raised  letter  A  in  the  centre ;  three-quartcrd  of  an  infth  in 
exteriof  diameter. 


•18.  For  all  otiiet"  enlisted  meii;  the  saijio  as  lor  the  Ar- 
tillery, except  that  tlie  numTber  of  the  re<;iment,  in  large 
rdgurcs,  wiU'oe  fubtsitiited  for  the  letter  A. 

Troiosers, 

19.  The  uniform  trowsers  for  both  offi(;prs  and  enlisted 
men  will  be  of  cloth  throughout  the  year  ;  made  loose,  and 
to  spread  well  over  the  foot;  oflij^ht  (or  sk}')  blue  color, 
for  regimental  officers  and  enlisted  men  ;  and  of  dark  blue 
clcth  for  all  other  officers  ;  reinforced  for  the  cavalry. 

20.  For  General  Offiers — two  stripes  of  gold  lace  on  the 
outer  seam,  one-eighth  of  an  inch  apart,  and  each  five- 
eighths  of  an  inch  in  width. 

21.  For  Officers  of  the  Adjutant-Generars  Department,- 
the  Quartermaster-General's  Department,  the  Commissary 
General's  Department,  and  the  Corps  of  Engineers — one 
stripe  of  gold  lace  on  the  outer  seam,  an  inch  and  a 
quarter  in  width. 

22.  For  the  Medical  Department— a  black  telvet  stripe; 
one  inch  and  a  quarter  in  width,  ;\  ith  a  gold  cord  on 
each  edge  of  the  stripe. 

23.  For  Regimental  Officers— a  stripe  of  cloth  on  the 
outer  seam,  one  inch  and  a  quarter  in  width;  color  accord- 
ing to  corps ;  for  Artillery,  red  ;  Cavalry,  yellow ;  Infan- 
try, dark  blue. 

24.  For  the  non-eommissioned  staff  of  reti:iments  and  for 
all  sergeants,  a  stripe  of  cotton  webbing  or  braid  on  the 
outer  seam,  one  and  a  quarter  inch  in  width:  color  ac- 
cording to  arm  of  service. 

23.  For  all  othor  enlisted  men — plain. 


CMirtRM  AND   DRESS.  321 

Chapeau,  or  Cocked  Hat. 

26.  A  chapeau,  or  cocked  hat,  will  be  worn  bv  General 
officers  and  officers  of  the  General  Staff  and  Corps  of  En- 
gineers, of  what  is  called  the  French  patern ;  the  model 
to  be  deposited  in  the  office  of  the  Qaartermaster-General. 

27.  Forage  cap  for  officers — a  cap  similar  in  form  to 
that  known  as  the  French  kepi,  according  to  pattern  to 
be  deposited  in  the  office  of  the  Quartermaster-General. 

28.  Uniform  cap— according  to  pattern  to  bo  deposited 
in  the  office  of  the  Quartermaster-General, 

Pompon. 

29.  For  the  Artillery— red. 

30.  For  the  Infantry— light  blue. 

31.  For  the  Caralry — yellow. 

Cravat  or  Stock. 

32.  For  all  offieers--black.  When  a  cravat  is  worn, 
the  tie  not  to  be  risible  at  the  opening  of  the  collar. 

33.  For  enlisted  men— black  leather,  according  to  pat- 
tern. 

Boots. 

34.  For  all  officers—  ankle  or  Jeff*erson. 

35.  For  enlisted  men  of  Cavalry— ankle  and  JeSersoDi 
according  to  pattern. 

36.  For  other  enlisted  men— Jefferson,  according  to 
pattern. 

Spurs. 

37.  For  all  mounted  officeri— yellow  mt tal  or  guilt. 


322  uirir«»M  akd  bress. 

38.  For  enlisted  mounted  men— yellow  metal,  according 
to  pattern. 

Gloves. 

39.  For  (JenerJil  Officers,  and  officers  of  the  General 
Stiff  Corps— buffer  white. 

40.  For  officers  of  Artillery,  Infantry  and  Caralry— 
White. 

tSush. 

41.  For  General  OfiScers — buff  silk  net,  with  silk  bul< 
lion  fringe  ends  j  sash  to  go  twice  round  the  waist,  and  to 
tie  behind  the  left  hip ;  pendent  part  not  to  extend  more 
than  eighteen  inches  below  th©  tie. 

42.  For  officers  of  the  General  Staff  and  Engineers,  and 
of  the  Artillery  and  Infantry  --red  silk  net.  For  officers 
of  the  Cavalry — yellow  silk  net.  For  medical  officers — 
green  silk  net.  All,  with  silk  bullion  fringe  ends  j  to  go 
around  the  waist,  and  to  tie  as  for  General  Officers. 

43.  For  sergeants — of  worsted,  with  worsted  bullion 
fringe  ends ;  red  for  Artillery  and  Infantry,  and  yellow 
for  Cavalry.    To  go  twice  around  the  waist,  and  to  tie  a 
above  specified. 

Sword  Belt, 

44.  For  all  officers— a  waist  belt,  not  less  than  one  aid  one- 
half  inches,  not  more  than  two  inches  widej  to  be  worn 
over  the  sash  5  the  sword  to  be  suspended  from  it  by  slings 
of  the  same  material  as  the  belt,  with  a  hook  attached  to 
the  belt  upon  which  the  sword  may  be  hung. 

45.  For  General  Officers — Russian  leather,  with  three 
stripes  of  gold  embroidery  ]  th«  slings  embroidered  on 
both  sides,  .,   .c     ; 


UKIFORM   AND   DftaSj.  Zl^ 

46.  For  k\\  other  officers— black  leather,  plain. 

47.  For  all  non-coiiiinissioned  officers— black  leather, 
plain. 

Sword  Belt  Plate. 

43.  For  all  officers  and  enlisted  men — gilt,  rectangular; 
two  inches  wide,  with  a  raised  bright  rim  ;  a  silver  wreath 
of  laurel  encircling  the  "arnta  of  the  Confederate  States." 

Sword  and  Srabfmrd. 

40.  For  all  officers — according  to  patterns  to  be  depesi- 
ted  in  the  Ordinance  Bureau. 

Sword  Knot. 

80.  For  all  officers— of  plaited  leather,  with  tassels. 
Badges  to  distingmsh  RanJc. 

51.  On  the  sleeve  of  the  tunic,  rank  will  be  distinguidhed 
by  an  ornament  of  gold  braid,  (in  form  as  represented  in 
the  drawing  deposited  in  the  Quartermaster-General's 
office,)  extending  around  the  seam  of  the  cufi",  and  up  the 
outside  of  the  arm  to  the  bend  of  the  elbow.  To  be  of  one 
braid  for  lieutenants  j  two,  for  captains ;  three  for  field 
officers;  and  four,  for  general  officers.  The  braid  to  be 
one-eighth  of   an  in«h  in  width. 

52.  On  the  front  part  of  the  collar  of  the  tunic,  the  rank 
of  the  officer  will  be  distinguished,  as  follows  : 

53.  General  Officers — A  wreath  with  three  stars  en- 
closed, embroidered  in  gold.  The  edge  of  the  wreath  to 
be  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  the  front  edge  ot  the  col- 
lar ;  the  stars  to  be  arranged  horizontally ;  the  centre  «n9 
t©  be  one  and  one-fourth  inches  in  exterior  diameter,  and 
the  others  tlMT^e- fourths  of  an  inch. 


:324  UNIFORM  AND  SRISt. 

54.  Colonel — Three  stars,  embroidered  in  gold,  arranged 
horizontally,  and  dividing  equally  the  rertical  spac*  of 
the  collar.  Each  star  to  be  one  and  one-fourth  inches  in 
exterior  diameter ;  the  front  star  to  be  three-fourths  of  an 
inch  from  the  edge  of  the  collar. 

55.  Lieutenant- Colonel — Two  stars  of  same  material, 
size  and  arrangement,  as  for  a  colonel. 

56.  Ilajor — One  star,  of  same  material  and  size  as  for  a 
colonel ;  to  be  placed  three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  edge 
of  collar,  and  dividing  equally  the  vertical  space. 

57.  Captain — Three  horizontal  bars,  embroidered  in 
gold;  each  one- half  inch  in  width;  the  upper  bar  to  be 
three  inches  in  length  ;  the  front  edge  of  the  bars  to  in- 
cline to  correspond  with  the  angle  of  the  collar,  and  to  be 
three-fourths  of  an  inch  from  the  edge ;  the  line  of  th« 
back  edges  to  b«  vertical. 

T8.  First-Lieutenant — Two  horizontal  bars  of  the  same 
material  and  size  as  for  captains,  and  dividing  equally  th« 
vertical  space  of  collar. 

59.  Second-Lieutenant — One  horizontal  bar  of  the  same 
material  and  size  as  for  the  centre  bar  of  captain,  and 
dividing  equally  the  vertical  space  of  collar. 

Overcoats  for  enlisted  Men. 

(50.  For  mounted  men— of  cadet  gray  cloth ;  stand-up 
collar  ;  double  breasted;  caepe  to  reach  to  the  cuff  of  the 
coat,  when  the  arm  is  extended,  and  to  button  all  the  way 
(sp,  (buttons,  eighteen.) 

61.  For  footman— of  cadet  gray  cloth ;  stand-up  collar; 
double  breasted  ;  cape  to  reach  to  the  elbows,  when  the 
arm  is  extended,  and  to  button  all  the  way  up,  (buttons, 


trMIPOBM   1V»  BRISS.  32{> 

eighteen.)     For  the  present  to  be  a  talma,  with  sleeves, 
of  water-proof  material;  black. 

Chevrons. 

62.  The  rank  of  non-commissioned  officers  will  t>e  mark- 
ed by  chevrons  on  both  sleeves  of  the  uniform  tunic  and 
the  overcoat,  above  the  elbow,  of  silk  or  worsted  binding, 
half  an  inch  wide;  color  the  same  as  the  edging  of  the 
tunic  ;  points  down,  as  follows  : 

C3.  For  a  Sergeant -Major — three  bars  and  an  arc  in  ailk. 

G4.  For  a  Qaartermasttr- Sergeant — three  bars  and  a  tie 
in  silk 

65.  For  an  Ordnance-Sergeant — three  bars  and  a  star  in 
silk. 

60.  For  a  First  (or  Orderly)  Sergeant — three  bars  and 
a  lozenge  in  worsted. 

67.  For  a  Sergeant — three  bars  in  worsted. 

68.  For  a  Corporal — two  bars  in  worsted. 

Hair  and  Beard. 

69.  The  hair  to  be  short:  the  beard  to  be  worn  at  the 
pleasure  of  the  individual ;  but,  when  worn,  to  be  kept 
short  and  neatly  trimmed. 

By  Command  of  thb  Secretary  of  War  : 

S.  COOPER, 
Adjutant  and  Impector-General. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


TAGS, 

Introduction  - ** 

PART  FIRST. 

Position  of  the  Soldier  ^ 

,,    .                                                                     J 

f  acing?   

The  Direct  Step  ♦♦ "•'". * 

The  Quitk  Step  •• **' 

The  Doable  Quick  Step  ^ 

The  Run  '^ 

Alignments • ^ 

To  March  to  the  Front  ^ 

To  Mark  Time  ^* 

To  Change  Step • •••• ^^. 

To  March  by  the  Flank  • 13 

Wheelings ^^ 

Wheeling  from  a  Halt,  or  on  a  Fixed  Pivot  1* 

Wheeling  in  Marching  or  on  a  Moveable  Pivot  18 

Turning ..•— ^^ 

Manual  of  Arms  for  Heavy  Infantry 20 

Principles  of  Shoulder  Arms  • •• ?l> 

Position  of  Order  Arms  - 23 

To  Ground  Arms ^^ 

;inspectioA  of  j^rms  ....^ • •••••• •  ^^ 


II  TABLB  or  CONTEHTS. 

Loading  and  Firisg  38 

Load  in  Four  Times  41 

Load  at  Will  42 

The  Firings 45 

The  Oblique  Fire  46 

Position  of  Banks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  Right  46 

"        "      "  "  <'        "      "  Left  47 

To  Fire  bv  File 47 

To  Fire  by  Flank  48 

PART  SECOND.~THE  COMPANY. 

Foi-mation  of  Company  64 

To  Open  Banlca 66 

Alignment  in  Open  Ranks 67 

Manual  of  Arms 67 

To  Fire  by  Rear  Rank  69 

ToAdrancein  Line  of  Battle  70 

To  March  in  Retreat 71 

Oblique  March  in  Line  of  Battle  72 

To  March  by  Flank 73 

To  Change  Direction  by  File 75 

Movements  in  Column  78 

Post  of  Officers  in  Column  83 

To  March  in  Column  84 

To  Change  Direction  85 

To  Halt  the  Column,  and  to  form  to  the  right  (or  left) 

into  line  either  at  a  Halt  or  on  the  March  87 

To  Break  the  Company  into  Platoons  91 

To  Re-form  the  Company  92 

Being  in  Column,  to  Break  Files  to  the  Rear,  tud  to 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  lU 

PAGB. 

cause  them  to  Re-enter  into  Line 93 

The  Columa  in  Route  95 

Countermarch  98 

Formation  of  Company  from  Two  Ranks  into  Single 

Rank,  and  Reciprocally  103 

Formation  of  a  Company  from  Two  Ranks  into  Four, 

and  Reciprocally,  at  a  Halt  and  in  March  103 

PART  THIRD. 

Manual  of  Arm«  for  Riflemen  or  Light  Infantry  107 

The  Position  of  Order  Arms  110 

To  Stack  Arms 123 

To  Resume  Arms  124 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  Line  of  Battle  or  in  Line  124 

Position  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff 12fi 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band  127 

Color  Guard  127 

General  Guides ;.  12S 

PART  FOURTH. 

Instruction  for  Skirmishers    12? 

Deployments 132 

Bayonet  Exercise 169 

PosUion  of  the  Guard  170 

Develop  aud  Volts  ". 171 

Develop 172 

Combinations  of  the  Movements 174 

Parries  and  Thrusts  176 

Guard  agaiust  lufantrv , 170 


)v  »  table  of  contehtb. 

?aob; 

Guard  against  Cavalry  180 

Manual  of  Sword  or  Sabre  for  Officers  182 

Manual  for  Relieving  Sentinels  183 

Color  Salute 182 

Instruction  for  Chief  Bugler  184 

General  Calls 185 

Callifor  Skirmishers 180 

PART  FIFTH.-FIELD  FORTIFICATION, 

Nomenclature  and  General  Principles  of  Field  Fortifi- 
cation    187 

Manner  of  Throwing  up  a  Work  193 

Distribution  of  the  Working  Party  15^4 

Revetmentt  « 196 

Obstacles  201 

Inundations 205 

Mines  .., 207 

The  Outlines  of  Field  Works  208 

Powder  Magazines  216 

Lines   223 

Lines  with  Intervals  or  Broken  Lines  22G 

Defence  of  Field  Works 227 

Loopholing  Walls 230 

Fortifying  Houses  231 

Intrenching  a  Village 235 

Attack  on  Field  Works  236 

Attacking  Houses  238 

**  Barricades 23^5 


TABLE   OF  CONTEXTS.  T 

PAHT  SIXTH.— OUTPOST  AND  PICKET  DUTY. 

Plus. 

Instructions  for  Picket  Dutj  240 

AdTaHced  Posts  24a 

Out  Posts  246 

Sentinels  , 247 

Graod  Guards  247 

Pickets   248 

Strength  of  the  Advance  Posts  249 

Duties   of  Officer  Commanding^  Out  Posts  251 

Advanced  Guards  254 

Reconnoissances   255 

Duties  of  Reconnoitering  Officer  25G 

Guides   259 

Reconnoissance  262 

Armed  Reconnoissance  202 

Patrols    23.3 

Duties  of  Officer  in  Command  of   Patrol  205 

SURPRISES  AND  AMBUSCADES. 

Surprise 268 

Ambuscade 271 

REGULATIONS  AS  TO  INSPECTIONS,  PARADE,  Ac. 

Form  of  Inspection    272 

Forms  of   Parade  275 

Dress  Parade  275 

Review   279 

(ruard  Mounting 283 

Guides  aad  ^Sentinels  287 


VI  TABLE  OF  C0KTBNT3. 

PAOH. 

Challenging  288 

Grand  Rounds 28& 

Escort  of  Honor :  290 

Color  Escort : 291 

Funeral  Honors 292 

AMMUNITION. 

Preparation  of  Ammunition  294 

FORMS. 

Form  of  Furloug-h  29T 

Officers*  Pay  Account  298 

Subsistence  Form  300 

Requisition  Form   ". 301 

APPENDIX. 

The  Mo'/ements  of  Volunteer  Corps  for  Public  Occa- 
casions  302— 81G 

UNIFORM  AND  DRESS  OF  THE  ARMY. 

For  Comoiissioned  Officers,  &c 317—324 


ERRATA. 

By  neglect  of  the  Proof-reader  several  mistakes  have 
occurred  in  numbering  (he  pages  of  the  foregoing  work. 
The  errors,  however,  are  confined  to  the  figures  on  the  up- 
per corners  of  the  pages.  The  text  is  in  its  proper  order 
and  the  whole  number  of  pages  contained  in  the  work  is 
correctly  given  in  the  concluding  pages.  In  ether  ree- 
pects  it  is  believed  the  work  ii  generally  accurate. 


